5650-5690 Balance Repair Manual

SAME DEUTZ-FAHR DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
WORKSHOP MANUAL
Combine
5650 H, 5660 HTS
5670 H / HTS
5680 H, 5690 HTS
Service
Training
The technical informations and data in this Service documentation were correct when the manual was printed.
We are constantly seeking to improve our products and therefore reserve the right to introduce all changes
and improvements that we consider appropriate. However, we undertake no obligation to apply such
improvements to previously supplied machines and additional equipment.
This document may not be copied - even in part - without our consent. We reserve all rights under German
copyright law and accept no liability for possible mistakes.
This document describes the full equipment level, including special accessories that are not part of the
standard equipment version.
No claims regarding the equipment of machines already delivered or to be delivered may be derived from this
description. The price list applicable at the time of purchase is decisive.
Products made by other manufacturers (GPS, printer, etc.) and the associated software are described without
obligation and based on information provided by the manufacturer in each case. The safety regulations
contained in the normal operating manual also apply here.
Impressum:
Manufacturer
Deutz-Fahr-Strae 1
D-89415 Lauingen/Donau
Germany
Telefon/Phone +49 (0) 90 72 / 9 97 0
Fax
+49 (0) 90 72 / 9 97 - 300
WWW:
http://www.deutz-fahr.de
Copyright 2006 by

Deutz-Fahr-Str. 1
D-89415 Lauingen/Donau
Contents
Layout
Order
DF-EZ (Technical Documentation)

DF-EZ (Technical Documentation)
DF-LC (Spare Parts Department)
All rights reserved.

1. Edition, 10.2006
Part No.: 307.1133.3.6

Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
i2
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Service
Training
Summary 5650H 5690HTS
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .i4

General
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Engine Assembly, Engine Parts, Engine Control, Engine Power Take-Off
....
Front axle, gearbox, Steering axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B

Belt drive clutches, Greasing equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C
Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D
Feed passage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E
Cabin, Driver's stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H
Air condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I
Threshing mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K
Cleaning aggregates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L
Grain elevator, Grain tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M
Cutting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P
Straw chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .U
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
i3
Service
Training
General Safety Instructions

Before starting assembly, repair or maintenance work, make sure you read and follow these safety
instructions. Please also transmit all safety instructions to all other people concerned.
In this manual, we have marked all points relevant to your safety with the following symbol:
WARNING!
This combine harvester is designed exclusively for normal use in agricultural work
(intended use).
Any use of the machine beyond the above description does not conform to the intended use.
The manufacturer shall not accept any liability for any damage resulting from such use;
the user shall bear all risks relating to such use.
Conformity with the intended use includes adherence to the operating, servicing and maintenance conditions
specified by the manufacturer.
This combine harvester may only be operated, serviced and repaired by persons familiar with the machine
and instructed in the dangers involved.
The manufacturer shall not accept any liability for any damage resulting from modifications to the machine by
persons not authorised by the manufacturer.
General regulations on safety and accident prevention:
1. In addition to the instructions contained in this manual, you must strictly follow all relevant accident
prevention regulations and other generally recognised rules of technical and occupational safety.
The legal operating specifications laid down in the Operating Manual for driving the combine on the road
and for working use also apply to this manual and must therefore also be observed.
2. Before starting the engine, make sure that no gear is engaged or, in the case of hydromatic systems,
that the drive lever is in the '0' position, and that all protective devices are fitted and in the protection
position.
3. Only start the engine from the driver's cab. The engine must not be started by short-circuiting the
electrical connections of the starter motor, because otherwise the machine may start moving immediately.
4. Before driving off, check the zone immediately around the combine harvester.
Make sure you have sufficient visibility. Sound the horn as a warning signal.
5. Do not leave the engine running in enclosed spaces.
6. On leaving the combine harvester, protect it from rolling free (parking brake, wheel chock).
Switch off the engine and remove the key. If applicable, lock the cab door.
7. Before leaving the combine, fully lower all front attachments (cutting table etc.).
8. Take care when handling fuel increased fire risk. Never refuel the combine close to naked flames or
ignitable sparks. Do not smoke when refuelling.
9. Before refuelling, switch off the engine. Do not refuel in enclosed areas.
Immediately wipe away any spilt fuel.
10. To prevent fire risk, keep the machine clean.
11. Take care when handling brake fluid and battery acid (toxic and liable to cause chemical burns).
i4
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Service
Training
Safety instructions for maintenance and repair

General:
1. As a general rule, the drive train must be disengaged and the engine stopped before carrying out any
assembly, repair, maintenance and cleaning work or before remedying malfunctions.
Remove the ignition key.
2. Fluids escaping at high pressure (fuel, hydraulic oil etc.) can pierce the skin and cause severe injury.
In the event of injury, immediately call a doctor, because otherwise there is a grave risk of infection.
3. Care is required when handling fuel increased fire risk. Never refuel the combine close to naked flames
or ignitable sparks. Do not smoke when refuelling.
4. To prevent fire risk, keep the machine clean.
Electrical system:
1. When working on the electrical system, always remove the cable from the negative pole of the battery.
2. Make sure that the battery is correctly connected. First connect the positive pole and then the negative.
3. Take care with battery gases, since they are highly explosive.
Avoid generating sparks or naked flames close to batteries.
4. Only use OEM fuses of the specified ratings. If any of the fuses used are too highly rated, the electrical
system may be destroyed.
5. Before starting any electric welding work on the combine harvester, disconnect the cables from the
alternator and battery.
6. Take care when handling battery acid (toxic and corrosive).
7. Only operate the starter motor for a limited period, because otherwise the winding will overheat.
Allow the starter to cool down.
Brakes, brake fluid:
1. Check that the brakes are working correctly before each use.
2. The brake systems must be regularly submitted to a thorough test.
3. Settings and repairs to the brake system must only be carried out by qualified workshops or recognised
brake services.
4. When driving on public roads, the individual wheel braking mode must be deactivated
(interlock the pedals).
5. Regularly check the brake fluid level. Only use the specified brake fluid and change as specified.
6. Take care when handling brake fluid (toxic and liable to cause chemical burns).
Do not spill brake fluid.
7. Dispose of brake fluid in accordance with the applicable regulations.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
i5
Service
Training

Hydraulic system:
1. The hydraulic system is under high pressure. When searching for leaks, use a suitable aid
(e.g. piece of cardboard) to protect against the risk of injury.
2. Before carrying out any work on the hydraulic system, depressurise the system and lower any front
attachments.
3. When working on the hydraulic system, switch off the engine and remove the key.
Prevent the combine harvester from rolling (handbrake, wheel chocks).
4. When connecting hydraulic equipment, make sure that the hydraulic hoses are correctly connected.
If the hoses are connected to the wrong points, the switch functions will be inverted (e.g. raise/lower).
Risk of accident.
5. Regularly inspect hydraulic hoses and replace if damaged or aged.
The replacement hoses must conform to the technical specifications of the device manufacturer.
6. The hydraulic accumulator contains pressurised gas.
Do not drop the accumulator or expose it to temperatures above 150C
Air conditioning system:
1. Avoid all contact with the liquid refrigerant of the air conditioning system. If refrigerant is sprayed into the
eyes, call a doctor immediately.
2. All maintenance, installation and repair work must be carried out exclusively by qualified personnel.
3. No welding work may be performed on components of the refrigerant circuit or in its immediate vicinity.
Risk of poisonous fumes.
4. Maximum ambient temperature for refrigerant: 80C.
5. When draining the air conditioning system, dispose of the refrigerant in accordance with the applicable
regulations.
Tyres, screwed fixings:
1. When working on the wheels, make sure that the combine harvester is safely immobilised and prevented
from rolling (wheel chocks).
2. When working under the jacked combine, allow no-one on the machine.
3. Make sure that the lifting device has sufficient load-bearing capacity.
4. Removing and refitting tyres requires sufficient knowledge and specified fitting tools.
5. Check the tyre pressures regularly. Excessive tyre pressure leads to a risk of bursting.
6. All fixing screws and nuts for the front and rear wheels and track adjusting components must be
retightened in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications.
7. This retightening is also required after each track adjustment and wheel change.
i6
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Service
Training

Engine:
1. Do not carry out maintenance work while the engine is running.
Remove the ignition key.
2. When working on the engine, disconnect the battery (negative terminal).
3. Only refill the fuel tank when the engine is at standstill. Do not smoke while refuelling.
4. Take care whenever hot oil may be released risk of burns.
5. Make sure that the oil and fuel used are of the specified quality, and only store them in approved
containers.
6. Dispose of oils, fuels and filters in accordance with the relevant regulations.
Miscellaneous:
1. Before throwing away used and apparently empty pressurised cans (paint sprays etc.),
empty them fully in a well-ventilated area away from sparks and naked flame.
2. If any parts have to be replaced, only authentic original DEUTZ-FAHR spare parts may be used.
The use of spare parts, accessories and auxiliary devices that do not originate from DEUTZ-FAHR and
are not tested and approved by DEUTZ-FAHR can have a negative effect on the specified characteristics
or reliability and thereby detract from active and/or passive driving and working safety
(accident protection etc.).
DEUTZ-FAHR cannot accept any liability for any damage caused by the use
of non-DEUTZ-FAHR original parts, accessories and auxiliary devices.
3. Replace all protective devices and guards after maintenance and repair work.
4. Do not carry out any welding, drilling, sawing and grinding work on the cab frame or the safety frame.
Replace any damaged parts.
5. When replacing the cab ventilation filter, dispose of the used filter in accordance with regulations.
6. Auxiliary heaters must never be operated in closed rooms or during refuelling.
7. When carrying out electric welding work on the combine harvester,
disconnect the alternator cable and battery.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
i7
Service
Training
Notes
i8
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
General information on repair and maintenance
Table of Contents
Combine Harvester Type
5650H
5680H
5660HTS 5690HTS
Conversion table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .02 03
Tightening torques, bolting classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .05
Sealing, Adhesives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .06
Single-component adhesives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .07
Maintenance and Inspection Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .08 09
Operating fluids, filling levels and oil grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Release list DEUTZ lube oil quality stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 13
Tightening torques for adapter sleeve bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Check tension of chain and belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 19
Maintenance and repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Servicing and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Service
Training
Conversion Tables
Conversion factor
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
mm
in.
ft
cm2
sq.in.
cm3
l
cu.in.
US gall
Imp.gall
g
kg
oz
Ibs
kp/cm2
Ibs/sq.in.
bar
kpm
ft.lbs
Nm
daNm
PS
BHP
kW
1,0
25,4
304,8
1,0
6,4516
1,0
1000
16,3870
3785,4
4546
1,0
1000
28,353
453,59
1,0
0,0703
1,0193
1,0
0,1383
0,1019
1,019
1,0
1,0139
1,36
mm
mm
mm
cm2
cm2
cm3
cm3
cm3
cm3
cm3
g
g
g
g
kp/cm2
kp/cm2
kp/cm2
kpm
kpm
kpm
kpm
PS
PS
PS
0,03937
1,0
11,9999
0,155
1,0
0,001
1,0
0,016387
3,7854
4,546
0,001
1,0
0,028353
0,45359
14,21
1,0
14,485
7,233
1,0
0,7373
7,373
0,98632
1,0
1,3405
in.
in.
in.
sq.in.
sq.in.
l
l
l
l
l
kg
kg
kg
kg
Ibs/sq.in.
Ibs/sq.in.
Ibs/sq.in.
ft.Ibs
ft.lbs
ft.Ibs
ft.lbs
BHP
BHP
BHP
0,00328
0,08333
1,0
ft
ft
ft
0,06102
61,024
1,0
23,1
277,41
0,03527
35,27
1,0
15,9983
0,981
0,06903
1,0
9,81
1,356
1,0
10,0
0,736
0,7462
1,0
cu.in.
cu.in.
cu.in.
cu.in.
cu.in.
oz
oz
oz
oz
bar
bar
bar
Nm
Nm
Nm
Nm
kW
kW
kW
0,00026477
0,26417
0,04329
1,0
1,20091
0,0022046
2,2046
0,0625
1,0
USgall
USgall
USgall
USgall
USgall
Ibs
Ibs
Ibs
Ibs
0,981
0,1356
0,1
1,0
daNm
daNm
daNm
daNm
0,00021998
0,21998
0,03604
0,8327
1,0
Imp.gall
Imp.gall
Imp.gall
Imp.gall
Imp.gall
Conversion from mm to inches

mm
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
0,0
0,0394
0,0787
0,1181
0,1575
0,1969
0,2362
0,2756
0,3150
0,3543
0,3937
0,1
0,00394
0,0433
0,0827
0,1220
0,1614
0,2008
0,2402
0,2795
0,3189
0,3583
0,3976
0,2
0,00787
0,0472
0,0866
0,1260
0,1654
0,2047
0,2441
0,2835
0,3228
0,3622
0,4016
0,3
0,0118
0,0512
0,0906
0,1299
0,1693
0,2087
0,2480
0,2874
0,3268
0,2661
0,4055
0,4
0,0157
0,0551
0,0945
0,1339
0,1732
0,2126
0,2520
0,2913
0,3307
0,3701
0,4094
0,5
0,0197
0,0591
0,0984
0,1378
0,1771
0,2165
0,2559
0,2953
0,3346
0,3740
0,4134
0,6
0,0236
0,0630
0,1024
0,1417
0,1811
0,2205
0,2598
0,2992
0,3386
0,3780
0,4173
0,7
0,0276
0,0669
0,1063
0,1457
0,1850
0,2244
0,2638
0,3031
0,3425
0,3819
0,4213
0,8
0,0315
0,0709
0,1102
0,1496
0,1890
0,2283
0,2677
0,3071
0,3465
0,3858
0,4252
0,9
0,0354
0,0748
0,1142
0,1535
0,1929
0,2323
0,2717
0,3110
0,3504
0,3898
0,4291
307.1133.5.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Service
Training
Conversion Tables
Conversion from degrees Celsius (C) to degrees Fahrenheit (F)
C
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
32
33,8
35,6
37,4
39,2
41
42,8
44,6
46,4
48,2
50
51,8
53,6
55,4
57,2
59
60,8
62,6
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
64,4
66,2
68
69,8
71,6
73,4
75,2
77
78,8
80,6
82,4
84,2
86
87,8
89,6
91,4
93,2
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
95
96,8
98,6
100,4
102,2
104
105,8
107,6
109,4
111,2
113
114,8
116,6
118,4
120,2
122
123,8
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
125,6
127,4
129,2
131
132,8
134,6
136,4
138,2
140
141,8
143,6
145,4
147,2
149
150,8
152,6
154,4
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
156,2
158
159,8
161,6
163,4
165,2
167
168,8
170,6
172,4
174,2
176
177,8
179,6
181,4
183,2
185
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
186,8
188,6
190,4
192,2
194
195,8
197,6
201,2
203
204,8
206,6
208,4
210,2
212
Conversion from degrees Celsius (C) to degrees Kelvin (K)

C
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
Temp. C = 5 (t F 32)
9
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Temp. F = 5 (t C + 32)
9
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Tightening value for bolts according to in-house standard H0385-1
Bolting class II
Bolts and nuts are to be tightened by means of a torque wrench
Shoulder stud with standard metric thread
Friction factor ges. = 0,12
Bolting class II
Tightening torques M A nenn
Nm
Shoulder stud with metric fine thread

Friction factor ges. = 0,12
Bolting class II
Tightening torques M A nenn
Nm
d
mm
Strengh
class
M4
8,8
10,9
12,9
2,5
3,5
4,5
M8 x1
8,8
10,9
12,9
22
34
38
M5
8,8
10,9
12,9
5,0
7,5
8,5
M10 x 1,
8,8
10,9
12,9
46
70
80
M6
8,8
10,9
12,9
8,5
13
13
M10 x 1,25
8,8
10,9
12,9
44
65
75
M7
8,8
10,9
12,9
14
20
24
M12 x 1,25
8,8
10,9
12,9
80
110
140
M8
8,8
10,9
12,9
20
30
36
M12 x 1,5
8,8
10,9
12,9
75
110
130
M10
8,8
10,9
12,9
42
60
70
M14 x 1,5
8,8
10,9
12,9
120
180
210
M12
8,8
10,9
12,9
70
110
120
M16 x 1,5
8,8
10,9
12,9
190
280
320
M14
8,8
10,9
12,9
110
170
200
M18 x 1,5
8,8
10,9
12,9
280
400
480
M16
8,8
10,9
12,9
180
260
300
M18 x 2
8,8
10,9
12,9
260
380
440
M18
8,8
10,9
12,9
260
360
420
M20 x 1,5
8,8
10,9
12,9
400
550
650
M20
8,8
10,9
12,9
360
500
600
M20 x 2
8,8
10,9
12,9
360
550
600
M22
8,8
10,9
12,9
480
700
800
M22 x 1,5
8,8
10,9
12,9
550
750
850
M24
8,8
10,9
12,9
600
850
1000
M22 x 2
8,8
10,9
12,9
500
700
850
M27
8,8
10,9
12,9
900
1300
1500
M24 x 1,5
8,8
10,9
12,9
700
1000
1200
M30
8,8
10,9
12,9
1200
1700
2000
M24 x 2
8,8
10,9
12,9
650
950
1100
M27 x 2
8,8
10,9
12,9
650
950
1100
M30 x 2
8,8
10,9
12,9
1400
1900
2300
d
mm
Strengh
class
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Service
Training
Lubricants
Solid lubricants
Material
specification
Part No.
Operating temperature
range in C
Equivalent manufacturer's
DEUTZ S 1
0134 0198
180 bis +1400
Never Seize
DEUTZ S 2
DEUTZ S 5
0100 5149
0101 6126
125 bis +1450

130 bis +1130
Molykote Paste G-n Rapid

Molykote BR 2
0100 9454
20 bis +140
Emteka NU 15
Grease
DEUTZ F 15
Cooling System Protection
5l Container
0101 1490
20l Container
0101 6416
210l Container
1221 1500
307.1133.5.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Service
Training
Sealants
Material
specification
KHD Part-No.
range in C
designation
DEUTZ DW 25
DEUTZ DW 30
DEUTZ DW 40
0100 1306
190 to + 250
190 to + 700
190 to + 350
DEUTZ
DEUTZ
DEUTZ
DEUTZ
DEUTZ
0100
0100
0100
0134
0100
9463
8379
8383
0088
1286
135
130
165
173
190
to
to
to
to
to
+ 100
+ 150
+ 230
+ 230
+ 110
0100
0131
0109
0101
0134
0100
0131
0100
0100
0100
0100
0109
0633
8329
9907
8072
6113
0167
1254
9912
9670
8802
8874
9679
1503
9192
190
155
155
155
155
155
to
to
to
to
to
to
+ 150
+ 150
+ 150
+ 150
+ 150
+ 150
155
155
155
155
155
to
to
to
to
to
+ 200
+ 150
+ 150
+ 120
+ 150
Thread tape
Devametal NiCuFe 10.83/8-3W
Reinz 4402
Ferrolastic
Terostat 8585
Terolan 3531
Silastic Q3-3305
Silastic 732 RTV
Curil
Teroson-Fluid
Sealing compound G
Loctite Prod.-No. 601
Loctite Prod.-No. 747 (activator T)
Sikaflex
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
43
44
47
48
50
DEUTZ DW 53
DEUTZ DW 55
DEUTZ DW 56
DEUTZ DW 57
DEUTZ DW 59
DEUTZ DW 60
DEUTZ DW 61
DEUTZ DW 62
DEUTZ DW 63
DEUTZ DW 64
DEUTZ DW 65
DEUTZ DW 66
Sealing Compound
Adhesives
Material
specification
KHD Part No.
range in C
designation
DEUTZ
DEUTZ
DEUTZ
DEUTZ
DEUTZ
DEUTZ
DEUTZ
DEUTZ
0100
0292
0100
0100
0100
0131
0100
0100
30 to + 200
Gupalon normal
Epple adhesive 56
Loctite IS 414
Loctite IS 495
Loctite IS 416
Terostat 58
Terokal
Gupalon express
KL 1
KL 1
KL 5
KL 5A
KL 5B
KL 8
KL 9
KL 14
1300
5947
8365
9331
9332
9914
4131
9506
60
60
60
30
30
30
to
to
to
to
to
to
+ 180
+ 180
+ 180
+ 120
+ 120
+ 200
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Service
Training
Single-component adhesives
Use of single-component adhesives
For particularly important screwed connections and for snug-fit connections subject to high stress, a single-component
adhesive is factory-applied, to guarantee increased protection against loosening and undoing. When the machine is
repaired, the parts to be glued together must first be cleaned carefully with commercially available cleaning agents or
purified gasoline. The threads or surfaces to be glued must be free of oil and grease and must be dry.
Adhesive application:
For threaded connections, it is sufficient to apply the adhesive to the outside thread.
For tapped blind holes, the adhesive must always be applied to the internal thread, since otherwise the adhesive would be
forced out by the air escaping as the part is screwed in.
For snug-fit and joint connections with low play on one part, if there is relatively high play on both parts, apply the
adhesive as a closed ring and mount with a gentle rotating movement.
Hardening:
The adhesive takes 6 24 hours to harden at a room temperature of 20 C, which must be maintained constant for the
entire hardening period. Since this is not always possible for outside assemblies, we recommend that the relevant site be
locally heated by heaters. About 1 4 hours at 60 C will be sufficient to harden the adhesive. Do not move the parts.
Accelerated hardening is also achieved by pretreatment with an activator. The use of activators reduces the strength of
the adhesive, and so if necessary the strongest adhesive should be used. The following table provides a list of adhesives
of different makes used in combine harvesters.
KHD
Designation
KHD
Part No.
Loctite
Type
Omnifit
Type
Conloc
Type
Guidelines for use
DEUTZ DW 55
0100 1251
601
M 150
CL 202
for play of 0.020.03, makes threads harder to loosen,

secures screws up to M16
DEUTZ DW 56
0109 8072
586 (AVX)
M 80
red
CL 103
for play of 0.020.02, makes threads harder to loosen,

secures screws up to M20
DEUTZ DW 57
0100 1256
221
L 150
green
CL 051
Improved press-fit 00.03, easily loosened,

screws up to M14
DEUTZ DW 59
0100 1252
270
M 250
violet
CL 301
for play of 0.0203, very firm connection,

only for large-size threads
DEUTZ DW 60
0100 1254
582 (CVX)
H 150
green
CL 303
for play of 0.030.5, extra-firm connection for temperatures

up to 100, only for large-size threads
DEUTZ DW 61
0109 8073
747
Activator
(Activator T) RS
US
CL
Activator
for faster hardening
0114 5546
648
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
high-strength connection for joints shafts hubs
Service
Training
Maintenance and Inspection Schedule for Combine Harvesters

for the first time after
operating hours
after every
operating hours
Maintenance and Inspection Schedule

for DEUTZ-FAHR Combine Harvesters
To be carried out by authorised DEUTZ-FAHR workshops only
Engine Maintenance and inspection according to engine operating instructions

1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
1.18
1.19
1.20
1.21
1.22
1.23
1.24
Check oil level (twice per day during running in phase)

Engine oil change (at least once a year)
Replace lube oil filter cartridge
Check coolant level (antifreeze protection)
Change coolant
Retighten engine fastening bolts
Check engine for leak tightness
Check, adjust valve clearance (not earlier than
X
X
X
X
every two years

X
X
2 hours after engine shutdown)

X
Check air intake and exhaust system for form fit and for leaks
Check condition of hose sleeves of air ducts and coolant lines and check for leaks
Check cooler, clean if necessary: Coolers for engine, charge air, fuel
Drain condensate at the charge air cooler
Check condition of oil drain hose and check for leaks
Check alarm facilities (air filter, oil pressure, temperature, coolant level)
Check sealing at cooler frame and sieve pan
Clean engine compartment
X
X
Change fuel filter cartridge

Drain fuel tank sump
Drain fuel pre-filter
Replace fuel pre-filter, filter cartridge
Clean air filter cartridge if indicated by warning light
Replace air filter cartridge when cleaned five times or when contaminated by soot
Replace air filter safety cartridge
Oil quality Deutz DQC III-05, ACEA E4-99/E6-04*
X
X
X
X
at least every two years

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
*Deutz lube oil TLX-10W 40FE

Alternatively it is possible to use oils in compliance with the DEUTZ lube oil quality
classes DQC III-05, CEA E4-99/E6-04
Drives
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
Check hydraulic oil level

Clean ventilating filter at oil reservoir
Hydraulic oil change (oil change at least once a year)
Check hydraulic system for leaks
Check hydraulic functions
Check hydrostatic steering system
Check zero-point setting of hydrostatic ground drive control
Replace disposible filter cartridge of hydrostatic ground drive (Hydromat)
Check high pressure hoses at hydrostatic pump and motor for secure mounting
Clean oil cooler when contaminated
Clean or replace line filter of hydrostatic ground drive
Check condition of hydraulic hoses
Gear oil API-GL 5 (MIL-L-2105 D) SAE 90

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Hydraulic oil HLP 46 DIN 51524 Part 2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Check tension of V-belt and feeding chain

Check, adjust friction clutch
X
X
X
X
X
Check function of electrical reversing device

Check rotating parts for signs of wrapping and remove crop residue
Check feeding chain, tighten if necessary
Check locking device for cutting mechanism
Adapt cutting mechanism to ground with diagonal struts in the feed passage
X
X
X
X
Threshing Mechanism, Cleaning System, Grain Tank

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
Oil level checking

Lower angular gear for grain tankoil change (at least once a year)
Oil level checking
Check V-belt and chain tension and retighten if required
Check belt guides and adjust if required
Feed passage
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
Check gear shift and adjust if necessary

Final drive oil change (at least once a year)
Oil level checking
Threshing drum reduction gear oil change (at least once a year)
Hydraulic system
3.1
3.2
3.3
Check for oil leakage
Shift gear oil change (at least once a year)

Oil level checking
Check concave basic setting, threshing drum

Check threshing drum speed variator
Check basic setting of turbo separator
Empty stone trap
Check spray cloth at concave, above straw walkers
Check straw walker shaft speed
Check sieve pan drive and rubber bearings
Check straw walkers, sieve securing bolts and seals
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Service
Training
Maintenance and Inspection Schedule for Combine Harvesters

for the first time after
operating hours
after every
operating hours
Maintenance and Inspection Schedule

for DEUTZ-FAHR Combine Harvesters
5 Threshing Mechanism, Cleaning System, Grain Tank
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
Check grain pan sections for firm fit
Check fan variator

Check grain elevator chain, tighten if necessary
Check grain tank tube lock
Check, adjust friction clutch
Check grain tank and unloading system for leaks
Remove accumulations of crop residuals: Concave, threshing drum, grain pan, under-walker return floor,
5.15 augers, hollow space above fan
5.16 Check inspection and service flaps for tightness and proper closed locks.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
6 Wheels and Brakes

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
X
X
6.6
Check service brake, free movement of brake pads

Check brake fluid level
Replace brake fluid
Check parking brake, readjust if necessary
Retighten screwed connections: Shift gear, final drive, chassis to axle
Retighten wheel nuts to specified torqueDrive wheels 750 Nm
Rear wheels310 Nm
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
Check screw connections on the adjustable steering axle to specifications, retighten 410 Nm
Check toe-in of the rear wheels, adjust if necessary
Check bearing play of the rear wheels, readjust
Check tyre pressure
X
X
X
X
X
X
every two years
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
7 Lubrication (see Lubrication Schedule)
Thoroughly clean points of lubrication prior to greasing

7.1
7.2
Check for grease escape at points of lubrication (hose connection, condition of lubrication hoses)
Check for grease escape at relief pressure valve with centralised lubrication system
X
X
8 Electrical System
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.10
8.11
8.12
Check lighting equipment

Check adjustment of headlights
Check electrical system
Check wiring harness and plugs for pinches or damage
Check battery fastening, terminals
Check battery electrolyte level and density of acid
Check warning devices
Check electrical adjustment of concave and turbo separator, calibrate with Com. Control if necessary
Check on-board computer, grain loss monitoring system
Clean grain loss sensors when contaminated
Calibrate electronic cutting mechanism control (EMR-D) with each change of front attachment
Check Balance control, recalibrate if necessary
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
9 Cabin, Compressor Cooling System, Cabin Heating

9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
Check sealing of fresh air filters

Clean fresh air filter and recirculating air filter (replace if required)
Check correct functioning of compressor cooling system

Retighten V-belt for air conditioning compressor
Check correct coolant filling level, check for leaks
Clean evaporator, condenser when contaminated
Replace fluid container when humidity indicator changes its colour
Check cabin heating for proper functioning and for leaks
X
X
X
10 Cutting Mechanism, Trailer, Front Attachment for Rape

10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
10.9
10.10
Check tension of V-belt and chains

Check friction clutches
Check settings of intake auger
Check proper functioning of reel hydraulics
Check knife gear (head bearing)
Check knife guide for wear
Check sensing skids for free movement, remove contamination
Retighten trailer wheel bolts, wheel nuts
Check oil level of front attachment for rape
Change hydraulic oil, replace return filter
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Cutting Mechanism with Trailer, Front Attachments for Special Crops, Maize Header, Straw
11
Chopper, Chaff Spreader etc.
X
X
All maintenance and inspection operations must comply

with the individual operating instructions
12 Accident Prevention Regulations

Inform operators about compliance with legal requirements
12.1 (see operating instructions)
12.2 Check protective and locking devices
12.3 Let fire extinguishers be checked for proper functioning
Components made by other manufacturers may only be installed with the written
12.4 consent of SAME DEUTZ-FAHR
307.1133.5.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
X
X
X
every two years
Service
Training
5650H, 5660HTS, 5680H, 5690HTS

Operating fluids, filling levels1) and oil grades
Designation
5650H
5660HTS
5680H
5690HTS
Level
Change
Inspection2) Interval3)
operating media
Specifications
Fuel tank
ca.555 l
ca.555 l
daily
Diesel fuel, sulphur content below 0,5 %
DEUTZ-engine
20,0 l
20,0 l
10 h
incl. filter change
21,0 l
21,0 l
50 h then
DEUTZ lube oil TLX-10W 40FE,
every 250 h or oils according to Deutz quality class DQC III-05
4)
(ACEA E4-99/E6-04)
Cooling System
55.0 l
55.0 l
daily
2000 h or
every two years
Shift gear
17,0 l
17,0 l
250 h
50 h then
Gear oil
every 500 h API-GL 5 (MIL-L 2105 D) SAE 90
Final drive
10,0 l
10,0 l
250 h
50 h then
Gear oil
every 500 h API-GL 5 (MIL-L 2105 D) SAE 90
65 l
65 l
daily
50h then
Hydraulic oil DIN 51524 part 2
every 500 h HLP 46 (ISO)
Front attachment for rape
6l
6l
50 h
50 h then
Hydraulic oil DIN 51524 part 2
every 500 h HLP 46 (ISO)
Hydraulic brake system
0,3 l
0,3 l
100 h
every two
years
Threshing drumReduction gear
1.0 l
1.0 l
250 h
50 then
Gear oil API-GL 5 (MIL-L 2105 D) SAE 90
every 500 h
2,0 kg
3
207 cm
2,0 kg
3
207 cm
annualy
Lower angular gear

at grain tank tube
0,75 l
0,75 l
250 h
Gear chaff spreader
0,4
0,4 l
Chains, joints
as required as required
Hydraulic System
4)
Air conditioning system

Compressor
5)
Deutz Cooling System Protection Agent

Ordering no. 01011490 (5l)
Brake fluid
DOT 4 yellow / DOT 3 or SAE J 1703
Coolant R134a
Refrigerant oil SP20 for R134a
50 then
every 500 h
50 then
every 500 h
SAE EP multi-purpose grease NLGI2
1) The specified filling quantity is a recommended value. The corresponding control facilities shall be definitive.
2) Daily visual inspection for oil leaks
3) Oil change at least once a year.
4) In case of high ambient temperatures oils of higher viscosity can be used.
5) Works at the compressor cooling system must only be performed by a specialised work shop.
10
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Service
Training
Release list DEUTZ lube oil quality stage DQC III-05

Manufacturer
DEUTZ
ADDINOL
AGIP
Akros
ARAL
AVIA
BAYWA
BP OIL International
Castrol
CEPSA
CHEVRON
DEA
ESSO
FUCHS EUROPE
MOBIL OIL
OMV AG
Ravensberger
Schmierlvertrieb
Lube oil refinery
Salzbergen
Shell International
Texaco
TOTAL
Lubricant type
DEUTZ OIL TLX-10W40FE
ADDINOL Super Truck MD 1048
ADDINOL Ultra Truck MD 0538
Agip Sigma Ultra TFE
Autol Valve Ultra FE
Akros Synth. Gold
Aral MegaTurboral
Aral SuperTurboral
TURBOSYNTH HT-E
BayWa Super Truck 1040 MC
BayWa Turbo 4000
BP Vanellus E7 Plus
BP Vanellus E7 Supreme
BP Vanellus C8 Ultima
Castrol Enduron Plus
SAE class
10W-40
10W-40
5W-30
10W-40
10W-40
10W-40
10W-40
5W-30
10W-40
10W-40
10W-40
10W-40
10W-40
5W-30
5W-40
Castrol Enduron
10W-40
Castrol Elexion
EUROTRANS SHPD
Chevron Delo 400 Synthtic
DEA Cronos Synth
DEA Cronos Premium LD
DEA Cronos Premium FX
Essolube XTS 501
Fuchs Titan Cargo MC
Fuchs Titan Unic Plus MC
Mobil Delvac 1 SHC
5W-30
10W-40
5W-40
5W-30
10W-40
10W-40
10W-40
10W-40
10W-40
5W-40
Mobil Delvac 1
Mobil Delvac XHP Extra
OMV super Truck
OMC truck FE plus
Ravenol Performance Truck
5W-40
10W-40
5W-30
10W-40
10W-40
Availability
Europe
Europe, Asia
Europe, Asia
worldwide
Germany
Europe
worldwide
worldwide
Germany
South Germany
South Germany
Europe
Europe
Europe
Europe, America,
Australie, Afrique du Sud
Europe, Amrique,
Australia, South Africa
USA
Spain, Portugal
North America
Germany, Europe
Germany, Europe
Europe
Europe
worldwide
worldwide
Europe, SE Asia, Africa
worldwide
Europe, SE Asia
Europe
Europe
Germany
Wintershall TFG
10W-40
Europe
Shell Myrina TX/Shell Rimula Ultra
5W-30
Europe, designation
varies nationally
Shell Myrina TX/Shell Rimula Ul-tra
10W-40
Ursa Super TDX10W-40

Ursa Premium FE 5W-30
TOTAL RUBIA TIR 8600
EXPERTY
10W-40
5W-30
10W-40
10W-40
Europe, designation
varies nationally
Europe
Europe
worldwide
worldwide
307.1133.5.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
11
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Speeds
5670
Combine Harvester
5680
5690 -12225
5650, 5660
5680, 5690 + 12226
Engine
with threshing mechanism disengaged
1/min
2610 2655
2425
15
2390
15
Engine
with threshing mechanism engaged
1/min
2590 2635
2415
15
2385
15
Straw stripper drum 1)
1/min
930
Threshing drum
1/min
400 1250
Grain tank discharge
1/min
560
Fan
1/min
400 900
Sieve box
1/min
285
Returns elevator grain

Returns elevator maize
1/min
1/min
1110 30
795 20
Straw walkers grain

Straw walkers rice
1/min
1/min
201
210
+5
206
213
2
2
206
213
+5/ 6
Feed passage shaft, top
1/min
425
+/ 2
430
20
430
20
10
Turbo Separator Grain

Turbo Separator Maize
1/min
1/min
790 20
380 30
805
390
+30/ 20
805
390
+30/ 20
+25/40
945
50
40
+15
945
405 1265
530
+50/30
+25/40
40
410 950
301
50
405 1265
530
+50/30
50
40
410 950
301
1170 30
850 20
+25/40
+50/30
1170 30
850 20
30
30
1) As of year of manufacture 2007 the straw stripper drum is driven by the threshing drum.
12
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Service
Training
A00005
A00006
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
13
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Tightening values of adapter bearings
Bearing point
Bearing
Tightening torque
Threshing drum/turbo separator
Grooved ball bearing
140 Nm
Straw stripper drum left side
140 Nm
Straw stripper drum right side
Ball joint bearing
180 Nm
Straw walker bearing
Pretensioning torque 50 Nm
+ Swivelling angle 180
Shaft of sieve box drive
Swivel-joint roller bearing
100
Countershaft inside of feed passage
Swivel-joint roller bearing
56 Nm
14
+20
Nm
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Service
Training
Notes
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
15
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Check tension of chain and belt at left side
10
11
Check spring tension L

Caption
Tensioning piece
Length
Comment
Block tightener reel drive chain
fixed
Block tightener angular gear drive chain
fixed
Idler pulley, turbo separator drive
Idler pulley, straw walker countershaft
Tensioning pulley knife gear drive
fixed
Tensioning wheel intake auger drive chain
fixed
Idler pulley, cutting table
Tensioning pulley impeller synchronous drive
Idler pulley, sieve box drive
10
Idler pulley, grain auger drive chain
11
Tensioning pulley returns elevator drive belt
fixed
L = Length according to adjustment gauge
Note:
Refer to chapter C for checking and adjustment of the belt couplings
16
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Service
Training
2
1
L
34940-1
35371
35036
35035
32983
32983
L
L
35355
33815
K0036-2
11
30969
90009
10
307.1133.5.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
11
17
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Check tension of chain and belt at right side
18
13
12
14
16
19
17
15
24
23
22
20
21
34939-2
Check spring tension L

Caption
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Tension spring
Length
Dust extractor fan
Idler pulley, cooler drive

L
Fuel pump, generator V-belt
Air-conditioning compressor V-belt
Idler pulley, grain tank discharge drive

L
Block tightener grain tank filler auger drive chain
Tension device elevator chain
Idler pulley, threshing drum drive

L
Chain variator adjustment
Idler pulley, fan drive

L
Idler pulley, straw walker drive
L
Idler pulley, straw chopper drive
L
Chaff spreader: Check belt alignment, correct if necessary
Comment
Visual inspection
L = Length according to adjustment gauge
18
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Service
Training
12
14
35366
35455
12
13
00-2
14
15
17
L
30509
15
35367
16
31658
17
20
18
L
31656
18
34944
19
35362
20
L
35353
21
34945
22
34942
23
00-3
24
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
19
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Maintenance and repair
General instructions
Observe the general accident prevention regulations with all repair and maintenance works.
Make sure that the engine cannot be started by a second person while working at the combine harvester: Remove
start key and battery master switch!
Operating media must be disposed environmental fairly.
Retighten highly stressed screwed connections subsequent to reassembly after a few operating hours, e.g. wheel nuts,
bolts on axles.
Perform a functional test and check the oil level after carrying out repair works at the hydraulic system. Check hydraulic
system for leaks.
Replace porous or damaged hydraulic or fuel hoses in due time.
Check cable harnesses for pinched spots or damages.
Observe fire protection requirements while carrying out welding works at the combine harvester. Thoroughly remove
dust and crop residuals. Protect cable harnesses, hydraulic hoses and sealing elements against impact of heat. Remove
connectors from electronic control units.
Tighten the circlip to rotational direction of shaft while assembling circlip bearings.
Mount adapter bearing according to factory specification.
Causes for vibration must be remedied immediately. E.g. imbalance caused by foulings on beating arms of the threshing
drum or by broken chopper knives, by v-belts with grinding marks or by imbalance of tensioning pulleys by dust deposit.
20
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Service
Training
Servicing and Maintenance

General Instructions
V-Belts
Since new V-belts still stretch, their tension must be
monitored more frequently during the first few operating
hours.
V-belts with fixed idler pulley are correctly tensioned if
they can still be pressed down slightly. Belts that are
too loose are subject to greater wear.
The V-belt guide must be designed to prevent the
disengaged belt rubbing against the belt pulley. The
gap between the guide and the tensioned V-belt must
be 8 mm.
Never pull the V-belt over a pulley violently or with
a tool.
We recommend that dirty V-belts should be cleaned
with a 1:10 solution of glycerine spirit solution (or
similar). Do not use petrol, benzene, terpentine etc.
Avoid mechanically stressing the V-belts. During winter
storage, make sure that the pulleys are not attacked by
rust.
A00160
Chains
The drive chains must be regularly lubricated with transmission oil. After the harvest season, remove the drive
chains, clean with diesel fuel, dip in warm chain grease
and refit.
Always mount chain locking links so that they cannot
catch, e.g. with the closed side of the retaining spring
facing the direction of drive.
Always use new locking wire if chain locks have been
openend.
Variator drives
Remove dust and dirt deposits between the pulley halves.
The variator drives (reel, threshing drum and cleaning fan)
must be adjusted after lubricating in order to ensure that
the
lubricating film spreads evenly over the friction surfaces.
A00161
Screwed fixings
Check that all screwed fixings are secure, especially on
the sieve box, and retighten if necessary.
Check nuts secured with split pins.
Fuel and oil tanks
Refill the tanks after ending work, in order to prevent
condensation, especially if the difference between working
and non-working temperatures is high.
Tyres
Regularly check the tyre pressures and the tightness of
the wheel nuts.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A00162
21
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Special tools
Nut wrench for mounting adapter bearings
Application
22
Part No
Sieve box drive shaft bearing, countershaft inside of feed passage
0043 6070
Straw walker bearing d 40
0041 6050
Threshing drum bearing, straw stripper, turbo separator
0041 6055
Miscellaneous
Tube headpiece for knocking loose the speed variator pulley
on the shaft of the straw stripper drum
Detaching device heavy
Tubular key SW36/46
Torsion bar
Key driver straight small
Key driver straight great
Key driver crooked
Bolt M16x240 to spread apart the speed variator pulleys
(threshing drum, reel)
0043 6021
0041 6010
0620 8673
0041 6031
0041 6100
0041 6101
1601 2260
Remark
0625 7346
Bolt M16x140 to draw out the adjusting

device of the threshing drum variator
0041 6070
3 pole test adapter for position transmitter EMR-D, balance

55 pole test adapter for EMR-D control device
Programming cable for Balance and Commander Control
1603 1484
1601 7182
1605 0267
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Engine
Table of Contents
5650H
5680H
5660HTS 5690HTS
Index of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03
Technical data DEUTZ engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04
Rating plate / serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05 06
Bolt tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07
Description of engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08 09
EMR, electronic engine controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 15
Overview power supply EMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 17
Control unit EMR, gas control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 19
Plug assignments of the EMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 21
Sensor and transmitters overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 23
Fuel system, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 25
Fuel pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Clean/replace fuel pre-filter, filter element; bleeding of fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Change fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Change fuel oil leakage pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Fuel injection valve, injection pipes assembly, disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 31
Testing and setting of injectors free from leak-off fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 33
Cooling circuit, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 35
Draining / filling cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Mounting of the coolant temperature transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Replacement of thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Mounting of coolant pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Maintenance and inspection Deutz engine, general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Operating media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Release list DEUTZ lube oil quality stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Engine oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
V-Belt generator tensioning/replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Checking, adjusting valve clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Adjustment instruction for valve clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Determination of cylinder-head gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 53
Mounting of the cylinder-head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Tightening of the cylinder head screws sequential order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 57
Charge cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Cooling fan drive, radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Exhauster drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 61
Rotating sieve pan drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 63
Driven shaft of engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 67
Mounting of hydraulic pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A1
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Engine, driven shaft of engine
Index of abbreviations
ATL Exhaust-driven turbocharger
Bh
Running hours
EMR Electronic engine controller
Further technical documentation for the engine of Deutz AG:

Operating instructions engine 1012/1013
Workshop manual BFM 1012/1013 de, en, fr, es
System description EMR de, en
Manual SERDIA, LEVEL III
Fault diagnosis, main focus on fuel injection system
A2
0297
0297
0297
0297
0297
7379
7438
7432
7482
7509
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS Maintenance and

Inspection DEUTZ Engine:
General
Safety Instructions
Engine:
1. Do not maintain the engine while running. Remove
the ignition key!
2. On principle always disconnect the battery (negative
pole) while working at the engine!
A00009
3. Only fill up fuel with the engine stopped No

smoking!
4. Caution while draining hot lube oil danger of
burning!
5. Observe the specified quality of oil and fuel and store
both only in approved containers!
6. Provide for collection of leakage fuel and waste oil in
accordance with anti-pollution regulations!
7. Dispose of properly oils, fuels and filters!
8. After maintenance and repair works: Check whether
all safety devices have been remounted and all tools
have been removed from the engine!
9. Only carry out cleaning jobs with the engine stopped!
10. Battery gases are explosive! Avoid sparking and open
fire near the batteries! Do not spill acid on skin or
clothes! Wear safety goggles! Do not put tools on the
batteries!
11. Also observe the additional safety instructions in this
chapter!
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A3
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Technical Data DEUTZ Engine
Type BFM 1013 E
Four-Stroke Diesel Engine with Direct Injection
BF6M 1013 E
Number of cylinders / configuration
6 in tandem
Bore [mm]
108
Stroke [mm]
130
Total cylinder capacity [ltr.]
7,1
Method of operation / method of combustion
Four-stroke diesel with direct injection

and exhaust-driven supercharger.
Firing order
1-5-3-6-2-4
Rotational direction
when facing flywheel: left
Rated speed [rpm]
see engine name plate
Power [kW]
Valve clearance inlet / exhaust [mm]

Commencement of delivery
Injector opening pressure [bar]
Min. oil pressure [bar], at lower idle speed and
0,3+0,1 / 0,5+0,1
275+8
0,8
warmed-up engine (120 C operating temperature)

Method of cooling
Liquid cooled with integrated lube oil cooler
Coolant quantity [approx. ltr.]

Engine and cooling system
55
Thermostat starts opening at [C]
83
Thermostat fully open from [C]
95
A4
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Rating Plate, Engine Serial Number
Engine Data
The type (A), the engine serial number (B) and the performance
data are stamped on the rating plate.
When ordering spare parts, it is essential to quote the type and
the engine serial number.
26 332_3
The rating plate (C) is affixed to the crankcase.
26 231_1
The engine serial number is stamped on the crankcase itself

(arrow) as well as on the rating plate.
26 232_1
The cylinders are numbered consecutively, beginning at flywheel

end.
26 233_0
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A5
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Technical data DEUTZ engine
Rating Plate
2013-0008
Pos.
Description
Remark
Type of engine
e.g. BF6M 1013 EC
Code
with engines according to specifications of

commission 88/195/EWG
engine number
kW (G)
"overall power (G-power), cooling fan is not running.
kW (S)
"nominal power (S-power), cooling fan is running at

full speed.
1/min
Nominal speed of the engine.
Commencement of delivery and
Commencement of delivery in degrees.
type of camshaft
8
kW (W)
Letter stands for type of camshaft

"Active vent (fan/blower) as a part of the specified
power.
9,10
For free disposal.
11
Statement of standard and/or regulation
12
kW (G) red.
Reduced "overall power, conditions on site

pos. 14, 15.
13
kW (S) red.
Reduced "nominal power, conditions on site pos.

14, 15.
14
Air temperature in C
For environmental conditons on site.
15
Altitude above sealevel in m
For environmental conditons on site.
16
Injection pump code
Code for cylinder related statement about the toolfitting dimension of the pump determined at
manufacturing (beginning from above with
cylinder #1)
A6
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Technical data DEUTZ engine
Bolt Tightening Torques
(for further statements see workshop manual BFM 1012/1013)
Flywheel
If traceable use bolts 5 times max.
Initial tightening value:

Bolts 30 45 mm long
20-30 Nm
Bolts 50 85 mm long
30-40 Nm
1. retightening angle
Bolts 30 85 mm long
60
Bolts 30 mm long
Bolts 35 85 mm long
Cover for wheelhouses
V-belt pulley
30
60
212 Nm
40-50 Nm
If traceable use bolts 5 times max.
Bolts 60 mm long
60
Bolts 80 mm long
60
Bolts 60 mm long
30
Bolts 80 mm long
60
Note: Use Torx socket wrench E20

Front covers
212 Nm
Vibration damper with clutch flange

(bolts fixed with glue)
Cylinder head bolts
(Observe sequential order)
70 Nm
1. step
50 Nm
2. step
130 Nm
Retightening
Rocker arm support
90
21 Nm
Rocker arm locknut
202 Nm
Crank case vent
8,51 Nm
Cylinder head cover
91 Nm
Connection nut fuel injection valve
40-50 Nm
Grip holder for fuel injection valve

Injection pipe
16 + 5 Nm
Initial tightening
Retightening
Pressure control valve
5 Nm
25 + 3,5 Nm
30 Nm
Charging air pipe at cylinder head
111 Nm
Coolant tube at cylinder head
212 Nm
Coolant pump
212 Nm
Exhaust manifold
252 Nm
Exhaust-driven supercharger
- Bolts M8
- Bolts M10
212 Nm
40,54 Nm
Pressure oil pipe at turbocharger
212 Nm
Pressure oil pipe at crank case
393 Nm
Oil return pipe
212 Nm
Lube oil cooler
212 Nm
Connection piece at fuel filter casing
505 Nm
Oil pan - sheet metal oil pan
212 Nm
Connection case at flywheel

Starter
Shut-off solenoid
Positioning element (observe sequential order)
Oil pressure switch, oil pressure transducer
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
M12
9910 Nm
M16
24325 Nm
70 Nm
21 Nm
171,5 Nm
182 Nm
A7
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Description engine BFM 1013 E
Overview
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
A
A8
Oil filling tube

Coolant pump
Fuel pump
Vibration damper (2 pieces)
Exchangeable fuel filter
not applicable
Exchangeable oil filter
Oil sump
Oil-level dip-stick
Lube oil cooler
Attachment facility for hydraulic pump resp. compressor
Fuel oil leakage pipe with pressure control valve
Cylinder head
Transport device
Crank case venting valve
Speed controller
SAE housing
Flywheel
Starter
Exhaust-driven supercharger
not applicable
Exhaust manifold
Intake
Coolant inlet
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
4
26336-3
26337-0
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A9
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
System description
Use of EMR
The electronic engine controller (EMR) serves as speed controller of DEUTZ Diesel engines of product line 1012/1013
(1015) for use in agricultural and construction machines as well as in aggregates. It has been designed for heavy
operation even under difficult environmental conditions and has been approved the corresponding protection classes.
The controller includes all functions of the mechanical controller (all speed control, torque limitation, LDA function) and
provides moreover further functions.
System overview
The EMR mainly consists of the sensors, the control unit and the manipulating element (actuator). All eqipment pertaining
to the engine as well as pertaining to the vehicle/system are connected to the EMR control unit by means of separate
prefabricated cable harnesses. The cabling pertaining to the vehicle is carried out by the manufacturer of the
vehicle/system.
Equipment pertaining to the engine

charging air pressure
sensor
adjusting rod position

transmitter/ actuator
temperature sensor
coolant
speed sensor
camshaft
EMR
control unit
Equipment pertaining to the vehicle

power supply
gas
control unit
Gasverstellmodul
+switch
S5S5
+Schalter
switch
motorspeed:
Schalter
Motordrehzahl:
- -lower
idleLeerlauf
speed
unterer
- -increased
idle speed
erhhter Leerlauf
- -nominal
speed
Nenndrehzahl
Droop switchover
K11
key switch
start/stop
indicator lamp
malfunction
EMR
Fuel temperature
EMR 2
A 10
oil pressure
lifting magnet
sensor (optional)
(optional)
diagnosis plug-socket
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
System description
The sensors mounted on the engine supply the electronics in the control unit with all relevant physical dimensions.
According to these informations about the actual engine condition and according to the setpoints (gas control unit) the
EMR excites a turning magnet actuating the adjusting rod of the injection pumps and thereby metering the fuel amount.
The exact position of the adjusting rod is fed back and corrected if necessary by means of the adjusting rod position
transmitter located in a housing together with the turning magnet, the "manipulating element.
The EMR is equipped with safety facilities and safety measures both in hard- and software, in order to ensure emergency
operating functions (limp home).
The EMR is cut off from the power supply by means of the ignition switch in order to shut down the engine. A sufficiently
strong spring inside of the manipulating element is pushing the adjusting rod into its neutral position when the power is
disconnected. As an option it is possible to additionally excite a lifting magnet for shut-down of the engine.
At first the EMR is programmed non-specifically with respect to the engine. On the test cell the engine is tested, adjusted
and programmed together with the EMR. After this programming, the EMR is assigned to this specific engine and
contains a engine specific data record.
For the various cases of application, e.g. with regard to a defined scope of functions, the EMR is being customized ex
works by means of the band end programming via the ISO 9141 interface.
System functions
The EMR provides a broad choice of functions, which can be activated through an application dependant configuration
and by means of assigning the inputs and outputs. It enables a signal exchange between the engine (via the engine plug)
as well as between the vehicle (via the vehicle plug) and the EMR. The signals may be analog, digital or pulse width
modulated (PWM) signals.
Which of the functions will be used depends on the operating conditions of the engine. Accordingly there are different
variants of the functions and of the pin assignment of the plugs.
The functions of the EMR refer to the speed control, fuel metering (injection), monitoring, vehicle and device functions as
well as to communication and diagnosis interfaces.
Droop
In contrast to a mechanic controller, it is a special feature of an electronic controller to be able to adjust the droop
percentage to 0% and to switch over between two fixed droop percentages. The maximum value is at 80%.
For emulation of the droop behaviour of the mechanic controller a speed dependant droop function is provided
(characteristic with 8 speed bases).
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A 11
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
System description
The EMR offers a basic configuration, upon which all variants optionally are based:
sensor inputs for:

displacement of
adjusting rod speed
coolant temperature
charging air pressure
oil pressure
Fuel temperature
EMR 2
setpoint
microprocessor
pedal position
transmitter
manual gas
switch for
changeover
gas control unit
interfaces
underlined =
basic configuration
program
memory
power supply
diagnosis interfaces
CAN bus
display functions
actuator functions
actuating magnet
lifting magnet
parameters
characteristic
characteristic
diagram
speed
torque
warning signals
error lamp
Key start/stop
The EMR must be switched off by means of the ignition key in order to shut down the engine. With this shutdown the
adjusting rod is moved to the stop position by the spring-loaded actuator.
As soon as the start speed signal is detected by the control unit, the adjusting rod is released for the start-up.
Repair
It is only possible to replace all components (no repair) which are all available individually. As the control unit needs to be
programmed with a engine specific data record, the following information is necessary:
number of engine
complete part number
Caution:
Prior to carry out electric welding works the plug-in connections at the control unit need to be disconnected in
order to avoid damage of the control units!
A 12
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Self-diagnosis with error lamp
The EMR provides a multitude of protective functions for the engine depending on the available points of measurement
resp. sensors. According to the severity of the detected error the engine can either keep on running (eventually with
restrictions, error lamp is permanently lit) or it will be shut off (error lamp is flashing).
Lighting of the error lamp indicates either a wiring fault (short circuit, cable break) or a malfunction with the displays or
the corresponding sensors. As further error sources falling below or exceeding of measuring value limits may come into
question (see table hereafter).
All detected errors in the electronic system will be indicated in the control unit and by means of the error lamp. As soon
as the error is not pending any more, the error lamp is extinguished; only if the electronic system has been changing
over to emergency run (speed), the engine needs to be shut off shortly by means of the ignition key in order to terminate
flashing of the error lamp.
Even recovered resp. non-current errors will be memorized in the control unit and can be read out or erased by means of
the diagnosis software SERDIA, see following chapter.
Diagnosis options with software SERDIA

The error messages stored in the control unit can be read out resp. evaluated by means of the diagnosis software
SERDIA.
Hereby information is displayed about:
-
Error location (e.g. "pedal value transmitter,* "coolant temperature sensor).

Type of error (e.g. "lower limit exceeded, "sporadic error)
Environmental data (e.g. speed at the moment of error occurrence)
Number of error locations
Frequency
Error status ("1 for active, "0 for passive).
Error messages of non-current/recovered errors can be erased with SERDIA.

SERDIA (service diagnosis) is a software program which makes it possible for the user to monitor measuring values by
means of a PC while the Diesel engine is running and hence be able to recognize an incorrect operational behaviour.
Then upon standstill of the engine it is possible to selectively preset specific parameters from the PC via the control unit
(parameterization), in order to change the operational behaviour.
For this, the PC must be connected with the diagnosis interface via an interface. Communication with the control unit is
done via a special EMR protocol.
For handling of SERDIA see separate operating instructions.
* With the combine harvester, the pedal value transmitter corresponds to the gas control unit.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A 13
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Diagnosis
error lamp
error messages (only readable with SERDIA)

type of error
error location (x= type of error)
extinguish subse- (3) reduced power
Coolant temperature monitoring (834x)
quent to
oil pressure monitoring (836x)
continuous light
(normal
(5) shut down limit
speed monitoring (8305)
operation)
fallen below/exceeded
continuous light (0) cable break or
short circuit existing
(2) measuring point

defective
(3) reduced power
continuous light
(engine off)
flashing
(reduced power)
(5) shut down limit

(5) shut down limit
(0) cable break or

(2) measuring point

defective
(5) shut down limit

(engine cannot
be started)
flashing
(0) cable break or

flashing or
continuous light
off
A 14
coolant temperature too high for

short time, oil pressure too low
for short time
recovery limit of overspeed was
fallen below again
plug-in connection interrupted
speed control unit
o.k.
(M9) coolant temperature sensor (8140)
plug contacts polluted

or corroded
o.k.
sensor defective
o.k.
wire interrupted
(M24) boost pressure sensor (8150)

(M21) oil pressure sensor (8160)
(M13) speed 1, camshaft (8170)
(M11) speed 2, terminal w (8180)
(internal) temperature of electronics (8190)
PWM signal monitoring for PWM input 1
(F18) (8002)
PWM signal monitoring for PWM input 2
(F21) (8012)
coolant temperature monitoring (834x)


(only, if speed transducer 2 is not existing
or defective)
(M17) position sensor (8112)

failure actuating magnet (8405)
EEPROM data (8210)
displacement measuring system calibration
data (8220)
output engine shutdown (8010)
output excitation actuating magnet (8020)
-
0) cable break or

(only, if speed transducer 2 is not available)
(5) shut down limit

failure actuating magnet (8405)
remedy
n.o.k.
engine speed switch
(M11) speed 2, terminal w (8180)

(only, if speed transducer 1 is defective)
flashing
(engine off)
possible causes
restore plug-in connection
clean plug, replace

if necessary
replace sensor
check cable harness, replace
check data in SERDIA menu

"configuration, change if necessary
clean plug, replace if necessary
replace the sensor
check cable harness, replace if necessary
problems with evaluation

of external PWM signal
temperature alert limit exceeded

for too long
oil pressure alert limit was fallen
below for too long. Configuration
incorrect.
overspeed was exceeded.
temperature alert limit exceeded
for short-time.
oil pressure alert limit was fallen
below for short-time.
o.k.
or corroded
o.k.
sensor defective
o.k.
wire interrupted
o.k.
or corroded
o.k.
actuator defective
o.k.
wire interrupted
limits were fallen below resp.
exceeded for too long. Incorrect

configuration (e.g. push operation off).
actuator defective
data loss, software defective
failure
failure
failure in central electronic system,
program in EMR was not executed
actuator defective

clean plug, replace
if necessary
replace actuator
check cable harness, replace if necessary
check data in SERDIA menu
configuration, change if necessary
replace actuator
replace control unit
replace control unit
replace actuator
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Engine - Sensors
Sensor
Charge Air Pressure
Oil Pressure
Temperature Sensor Coolant

Temperature Switch/Sensor
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Connector X 107
at Engine
Connector X 107
at Engine
A 15
A
Service
Training
F19
50a
30
75
K0
15
F39
G3
F34
D+
te
Nulls
B46
H34
0
1
2
S5
A
H
S
A30
B7
S40
Commander
Control
2000
15a
A13
B48
30
15
F7
F42
K11 K12
K48
K22
15b
A1
M1
EEC
A2
56-104--1
A 16
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Overview power supply EMR, engine monitoring in addition to EMR (EEC)
Start system
A1
A2
A13
A30
B7
B40
B45
B46
B48
F..
G3
H34
K0
K11
K22
K48
M1
S2
S5
S40
Control unit EEC (electronic controller Diesel engine)

Gas control unit for control unit EEC (A1)
Logic unit
Commander Control 2000
Buzzer
Combined instrument gauge
Sensor multifunction handle neutral (start interlock)
Sensor multifunction handle reverse (reverse gear horn)
Reverse gear horn
Fuses
Generator
Failure lamp engine
70 A relay for terminal 15
Relay release threshing mechanism on, terminal 15b, droop switchover
Relay starter
Relay power supply EEC
Starter
Ignition start switch
Switch engine speed
Working master switch
1
2
3
4
5
Low-pressure switch air filter

Temperature switch coolant
Temperature switch engine oil
Oil pressure switch
Coolant level switch
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A 17
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Control unit EMR
Gas control unit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A1 control unit EMR

Connector on the engine side
Connector on the vehicle side
A2 Gas control unit
Diagnosis plug-socket
LED UB, power supply
LED VCC, supply from EMR
LED TH/2, half throttle
LED TH/1, full throttle
LED SDW, threshing mechanism on = 15b, (LED on = threshing operation)
Note: Upon full throttle and switched-on threshing mechanism all LEDs are lit.
Subsequent to a replacement of the gas control unit a calibration of the setpoint generator must be carried out (see
SERDIA manual, parameterization page 10).
A2 pin assignment
Pin
1
2
3
A 18
Designation
Input half throttle from S5
Input full throttle from S5
Pot. throttle ground
Cable colour
gr/rt
gr/bl
br
Pot. throttle slider
ws/bl
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Pot. throttle supply

Input droop changeover from K11
Output droop changeover to A1
Ground droop changeover
Supply 12V from control cabinet X8
Supply A1
ws/rt
sw/gn
ws/gn
br
sw
sw
Supply for diagnosis connector

Ground for diagnosis connector
Ground for A1
Ground for A1
sw
br
br
br
br
Measuring value
0V/12V
0V/12V
1,2V idle throttle
2,8V half throttle
4,1V full throttle
5V
0V/12V
digit
12V
12V
12V
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
X8
MED_ACAD*11/24/10 11:01 AM Rev:12.23
SOLARI 1.she
Engine
Vehicle
A1
A2
3
16
9
1
56-116
56-055
10
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A 19
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Plug assignments of the EMR 1 control unit
25
13
25
14
13
14
Pin-No. Designation
Description
Pin-No. Designation
Description
Reserve
Reserve
1 x U Batt -
Negative pole at battery (clamp 31)
Output: digital 3
Digital output for solenoid
2 x GND
Reference potential for signal
Output: DIGITAL/PWM 3
PWM or digital output
NC
Not occupied
PWM or digital output,

various functions
NC
Not occupied
4 x Output: Digital 1
Fault lamp
Output: digital / PWM 1
PWM or digital output, various

functions
Reserve
Reserve
NC
Not occupied
NC
Not occupied
NC
Not occupied
NC
Not occupied
NC
Not occupied
GND
Reference potential for analog signal

at pin 9
Input: Analog 3
Analog input for coolant temperature

transmitter (NTC)
Output: digital / PWM2
10
GND
Reference potential for signal at pin 11
10
11
Input: Drehzahl 2
Digital input second engine speed

(crankshaft)
11 x K-Line
12 x CAN high
Interface for CAN-Bus
12
GND
13 x CAN low
13
Input: Drehzahl 1
Digital input first engine speed

(camshaft)
14 x U Batt +
Positive pole for battery (clamp 15)
L-Line
Serial ISO 9141 interface

15
Output: digital 2
Digital output, various functions.
16
Output: digital / PWM/

Frequency
Frequency ., PWM or Digital output

various functions
14
STG -
PWM ouitput, signal for control coil
15
STG +
PWM ouitput, signal for control coil
16
Screen
Shielding for position encoder

(for lines 17,18,19)
17 x Ground
Reference potential for signal at

pins 18, 19 and 21.
17
RF -
General connection for reference and

measuring coil
18
PWM or digital input, various

functions
18
RF REF
Analog input, reference signal of the

reference coil
19
RF MESS
Analog input, measuring signal of the

measuring coil
20
GND
21
Input: Analog 4
22
Input: Digital / PWM 1
19
Input: digital
Digital input, various functions
20
Input: digital / Analog
Digital or analog input,

various functions
21 x Input: digital / PWM 2
PWM oder digital input,

various functions
Analog input 2 sensor signal charge air
22
+5V REF
+5 V Reference voltage for signal at

pin 21 (max. 15 mA)
Screening (e.g. for lines 9 hand

throttle or PWG)
23 x GND
23
GND

pin 24
24
Input: Analog 2
Analog input sensor signal charge air
24 x Input: Analog 1
25
+5V LDA
+5 V Reference voltage for signal at

pin 24 (max. 15 mA)
Analog input pedal value sensor,

(PWG)
25 x +5V REF
+5 V Reference voltage for signal

at Pin 24
Screen
x) Pin used for combines
A 20
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Plug assignments of the EMR 2 control unit
25
13
25
14
13
14
Pin No. Designation

1
Reserve Reserve
Output: digital 3
Description
Digital output for solenoid 1)
Pin-No Designation
1 x U Batt -
Description
Negative pole at battery (clamp 31)
2 x GND
Reference potential for signal
PWM or digital output,

various functions
Output: digital 2
Output: digital 4
For heating flange (optional)/

glow plug (optional)
Input (optional) Temp 1
Fuel temperature 2)
4 x Input / output: DigInOut
Fault lamp and diagnostic button
Input (optional) Temp 2
Charge air temperature
Output: PWM 1/Dig 1
Input (optional) DigIn 5
Coolant level / oil level
PWM or digital output, various

functions
Output: PWM2/digital 6
Multi-function input:
Digin 3
Genset applications/gear shift/motor

brake
GND
Reference potential for analog signal at pin 9
Input: digital 10/velocity
Speed signal (tacho input)
Input: analog 7
Analog input for Coolant temperature

sensor (NTC)
NC
Not occupied
10
GND
11
speed 2/DigIn 2
Digital input second engine speed

(crankshaft) (optional) and speed signal
(optional)
12
GND
13
Input: speed 1
Digital input first engine speed

(camshaft)
14
STG -
PWM output, signal for actuator coil
15
STG +
PWM output, signal for actuator coil
16
Screen
Screening regulating rod travel sensor

(for lines 17, 18, 19)
17
RF -
General connection for
18
RF REF
Analog input, reference signal
19
RF MESS
9
NC
10 x L-line
11 x K-line
15
Output: digital 5
Digital output, various functions
16
Output: digital 7/Frequency
Frequency, PWM or digital output,

various functions
20
GND
21
Input: analog 4/digital 9
Analog input 4 (sensor signal oil

pressure sensor) or digital input 9
22
+5 V REF
+5 V Reference voltage for signal at pin

21 (max. 15 mA)
23
GND
24
Input: analog 2/digital 7
Analog input 2 (sensor signal charge

air) or digital input 7
25
+5 V LDA
+5 V Reference potential for signal at

pin 24 (max. 15 mA)
1) For continuous power: < 4 A

2) Corresponds to special functionfuel temperature compensation at the
EMR (0211 2571)
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Positive pole for battery (clamp 15)
17 x Ground

pins 18, 19 and 21.
18
Input: digital 1 / PWM 1
PWM 1 or digital input 1, various

functions
19
Multi-function input: DigIn 4 Performance curve switching/genset

applications
20
digital 8 / analog 3
Analog input, measuring signal

of the measuring coil

12 x CAN high
13 x CAN low
14 x U Batt +
reference and measuring coil
of the reference coil
Not occupied
Hand hand throttle/genset applications,

Digital (8) or analog input (3)
21 x Input: digital 2 / PWM 2
PWM 2 or digital input 2,

various functions
22
Screening (e.g. for lines 9 hand

throttle or PWG)
Screen
23 x GND

pin 24
24 x Input: analog 1 / digital 6 Analog input 1 (pedal value

sensor, PWG) digital input 6
25 x +5V REF
+5 V Reference voltage for signal
at Pin 24
x) Pin used for combines
A 21
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Sensors and transmitters engine BFM 1013
Overview
1
1.1
2
2.1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Transmitter/switch coolant temperature display

Insulating hose
EMR sensor boost pressure
EMR sensor boost air pressure as of 2005
EMR sensor coolant temperature
EMR actuator (adjusting rod of the injection pumps)
Oil pressure switch (warning light combined instrument gauge)
EMR sensor speed
EMR sensor oil pressure
Transmitter/switch oil temperature display
EMR sensor fuel temperature with EMR 2
2.1
56-117
1.1
4
2
19,39
20,9
8
18,57
19,63
5
9
19,41
A 22
56-118
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
1
2
3
4
26337-2
2.1
9
6
7
26336-2
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A 23
A
Service
Training
34926
5
6
7
11
10
8
9
14
12
13
17
18
15
19
16
A007
A 24
56-069
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Fuel system, overview
Injection pipe
Shut-off solenoid (until year of manufacture 2002)
Fuel oil leakage pipe from fuel injection valves (until year of manufacture 2002)
Pressure control valve 5 bar
Plug-in injection pump
Line to plug-in injection pumps
Line to fuel filter
Fuel pump
Fuel filter
10
Fuel suction line to fuel pump
11
Return line to fuel cooler
12
Fuel Cooler
13
Fuel suction line to pump
14
Tank stopcock
15
Vent pump
16
Fuel tank
17
Fuel pre-filter
18
Drain plug at pre-filter
19
Drain plug at fuel tank sump
Check for proper connection of fuel lines at the pre-filter:

Line from bleed pump (16) to connection EIN / IN
Line to engine at connection AUS / OUT
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A 25
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Fuel pump
The fuel pump is a rotor pump which is driven by the wedge rib belt.
The pump disposes of a double valve (pos. 1 Popen: 6 0,5 bar, pos. 2 Popen: 0,5 bar).
As of year of manufacture 2006 fuel pressure pumps with a relief pressure valve of 7 bar are being used
The relief pressure valve (1) is of the piston valve type and opens at 6 0,5 bar and 7 bar resp. Furthermore the maximum
system pressure is limited to 10 0,5 bar with this valve.
The bypass valve (2) is a ball valve. After draining of the fuel lines it is hereby possible to prefill the fuel system by means
of the hand feed pump. In this way a too long start process will be avoided (starter protection).
Note:
Do not reduce the pipe diameter and the connection to the fuel pump (see installation manual), as otherwise loss of
nominal engine power may occur.
2013 - 0043
A 26
5670-90 englisch (en) 02.2001
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Clean/replace fuel pre-filter, filter element;
bleeding of fuel system
Changing interval filter element: 1000 op. hrs
2
Clean/replace filter element (8)
3
34923
Close tank stopcock (1).
Open the venting screw (7).
Loosen the drain plug (3) and drain the fuel.
Unscrew tightening screw (6), remove filter housing (5).
Replace filter cartridge (8) and if necessary the sealings (4).
Replace filter housing (5).and secure with screws (6).
Tighten drain plug (3).
Open tank stopcock (1).
Open the venting screw (7) until fuel flows out.
Actuate vent pump (2) until fuel flows hereable without

air into the tank.
3
25 801_0
Venting the fuel system.
Open the venting screw (7).
Open tank stopcock (1).
Actuate vent pump (2) until fuel flows out from the
venting screw (7).
Close the venting screw (7).
Actuate vent pump (2) repeatedly.
Start the engine.

Note: If the engine does not start up despite repeated
attempts:
- Vent the system again by means of the vent
pump.
- Possibly loosen the pressure control valve (9)
and actuate vent pump until fuel emerges from
the pressure control valve. Retighten pressure
control valve and start the engine.
30 084_0
5670-90 englisch (en) 02.2001
Check system for leakage after start-up of the engine.
A 27
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Change fuel filter
Close tank stopcock.
Loosen and unsrew fuel filter cartridge (1).
Collect leaking fuel
Remove possible dirt from the sealing surface of the filter

support.
Slightly lubricate the rubber seal of the new fuel filter

cartridge resp. moisten with fuel oil.
Fill filter cartridge with fuel.
Screw on cartridge by hand until the seal properly fits.
Tighten fuel filter cartridge with another half turn.
Open tank stopcock.
Actuate vent pump repeatedly.
Check filter for leakage.
1
26336-2
25880/0
25881/0
25882/0
A 28
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Change fuel oil leakage pipe
Changing interval: 1000 operating hours, at least every

second year.
Mounting tool: Hose clamp pliers TN8020
Close tank stopcock.
Take down the rocker assembly cover hood.
Loosen hose clamps (6) by means of hose clamp pliers

TN 8020.
Disconnect rubber hoses (3) and hose clamps (6) from

the fuel injection valves.
Loosen the pressure control valve (9).
Take down the hose clamps (6), rubber hoses (1), (3),
(4) and the adapters (2) and the collar with socket pin /
threaded pin (5) and dispose of in accordance with antipollution regulations.
30034_1
Observe at assembly that the hose clamp lock is

pointing to the fuel injection valves and the hose
clamp cannot fall into the engine compartment.
Attaching new oil leakage pipe:

Slide rubber hoses (3) (coat inside with sliding grease)
together with hose clamps (6) steadily onto the fuel
injection valves to the connection fitting stop at the fuel
control valve and close by means of hose clamp pliers
TN 8020.
30901_0
Assembly of pressure control valve (9):

Tighten new collar piece with socket pin / threaded pin (5).
Remount the rocker assembly cover hood.
Open tank stopcock.
Actuate vent pump repeatedly.
Check for leakage after commissioning.
30 084_0
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A 29
5650H 5690HTS
Fuel injection valve, injection pipes
Assembly, disassembly
Slide the new seal onto the fuel injection valve by using
some grease and insert injection valve.
Note: The leakage oil line connection must point to the
exhaust side.
28-4-44
Put on the grip holder. Screw in bolt slightly.
38-4-192
Attach new injection pipe with rubber seal. Screw on

connection nut slightly by hand.
Note: At assembly of the fuel injection pipes the sealing
cones must match exactly.
Subsequent bending is not permissible. The fuel
injection pipes may not be used twice.
38-4-193
Tighten the bolt of the gripholders with a tightening torque

of 16 + 5 Nm.
38-4-194
A 30
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Fuel injection valve, injection pipes
Assembly, disassembly
Tighten the connection nuts of the fuel injection pipe at
the injection pump and the injection valve with a pretightening torque of approx. 5 Nm. Tighten the
connection nuts subsequently with a tightening torque of
25 3,5 Nm.
38-4-145
Attach oil leakage pipe and introduce through rubber

seals.
Note: It is mandatory to replace used oil leakage pipes.
38-4-146
Attach pressure control valve with new copper seals and

oil leakage pipe.
Tighten pressure control valve with a tightening torque of
30 Nm.
38-4-164
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A 31
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Testing and setting of injectors free from
leak-off fuel
1. Testing the injector
The volume of leak-off fuel cannot drain and is
collected above the nozzle needle in the
spring compartment of the injector. Now, the
hand lever of the nozzle tester can no more be
operated.
To have the pressure in the spring
compartment relieved, prior to every test, the
tensioning nut must be unscrewed and then
be tightened again as specified.
1.1 Unscrew tensioning nut by approx. 180
and tighten it again.
Tightening instruction: 40 - 50 Nm
Special tool for taking the injector depending on
engine type 6
1.2
Mount injector to nozzle tester.

Attention!
Do not touch the nozzle jet. The fuel deeply enters
the flesh and can cause blood-poisoning.5
1.3
Slowly press down lever of the nozzle tester with

connected pressure gauge.The pressure at which
the pointer stops or suddenly drops is the opening
pressure.
Opening pressure: 275 + 8 bar
Reference: After having operated the hand lever of the

nozzle tester for three to four times, the
pressure in the spring compartment is
established again. The tensioning nut must be
newly unscrewed and tightened again
according to the tightening instructions and
the test be repeated.5
1.4
If the measured values of 3 tests are identical, they

can be considered valid.
Chattering and spray pattern test

Disconnect pressure gauge of the tester. The chattering
test permits to check the unhindered movement of the
nozzle needle in the nozzle body via the developing noise.
New injectors have a different chattering behaviour than
used ones. Due to wear in the needle seat area, it
deteriorates. If the injector does not chatter despite having
been cleaned, it must be replaced by a new one. A used
injector must clearly chatter upon rapid lever operation
and inject with a good atomisation. The spray pattern can
considerably differ from that of a new injector.
A 32
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
2. Setting the injector
2.1
If the opening pressure must be corrected,dismantle

injector from nozzle tester. Unscrew tensioning nut,
dismantle all parts.
Special tools for taking the injector depending of
engine type.
2.2
Sequence of dismantling and mounting of parts

1. Tensioning nut
2. Injector comprising nozzle body with nozzle needle
3. Adapter
4. Pressure bolt
5. Pressure spring
6. Spacer disk
2.3
Set the opening pressure by selecting the suitable

spacer disk. Thicker spacer disk results in higher
opening pressure. Mount injector. Tighten tensioning
nut.
Tightening instruction: 40 - 50 Nm
Test injector again on the nozzle tester.
3. Check for tightness

3.1
Dry injector blow dry with air. Slowly press down

hand lever of the nozzle tester, until approx. 20 bar
below the previously read opening pressure are
reached.
3.2
Injector is tight, when no drop falls down within 10

seconds.
3.3
If a drop should fall, the injector must be

decomposed and the leakage be eliminated by
cleaning. If this should not be successful, the
injector must be renewed.
Reworking is not admissible.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A 33
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Cooling circuit, overview
1.2
1.1
11
12
18,7
5
A 34
10
56-107
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Cooling circuit, overview
Expansion tank
1.1 Sight glass

1.2 Relief valve in the cap opens at 95 kPa
2
Vent hose from cylinder head
Inlet from radiator to coolant pump
Return line from thermostat housing to radiator
Balance line from expansion tank to suction side of the coolant pump
Vent hose from radiator
Radiator
Coolant pump
Heat exchanger coolant/engine oil
10
Drain cock
11
Thermostat housing
12
Connection vent hose (2) at cylinder head
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A 35
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Draining / Filling of Cooling System
Draining:
Open the cap only after cool down of the
cooling system.
Be careful when draining hot coolant: Danger
of scalding!
Collect drained coolant and dispose of in
accordance with anti-pollution regulations!
1
18,7
Place drip tray under drain plug.
Open the cap (2) at the expansion tank.
Attach hose to drain cock.
Drain coolant via drain cock (1).
Drain coolant which remains in the engine at the

drain plug (6) of the heat exchanger.
2
3
Filling:
Close drain cock (1).
Fill up coolant at cap opening (2) until the sight glass

(3) is covered.
Attach the cap (2).
Start the engine and warm up until the thermostat

opens.
Turn off the engine.
Check coolant level when the engine is cold and refill

if necessary.
Venting is done automatically through the vent

hoses.
19,1
Note: Open the heating valve entirely if the heating

circuit for the cabin is connected.
6
(5) Connection for heating hose to the cabin (header).
56-113
(4) Connection for heating hose from the cabin.
56-112
A 36
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Mounting of the coolant temperature
transmitter
Tighten coolant temperature transmitter (1) with new

seal with a tightening torque of 18 2 Nm.
Slide insulating hose (2) over the transmitter (1).
1
39-40
Assembly of coolant level sensor

3
4
5
Coolant level sensor

Floater
Marking
The marking (5) at the hexagonal bolt must point

upward after screwing in. When the float lever (4) is
level the switching contact closes causing a warning
message at the commander control when ground speed
56-119
exceeds 2 km/h.
4
3
56-120
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A 37
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Replacement of thermostat
Mounting tool: 170 090
Dismantle the thermostat housing (1).
Push down thermostat and remove from thermostat

housing.
Visually inspect all parts, replace if necessary.
Push down thermostat and screw into the thermostat

housing.
54
10-3.130
10-3.131
Note: The retainer must engage in the thermostat

housing.
Remove the seal ring for the thermostat housing if

necessary.
10-3.132
A 38
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Mounting of coolant pump
Force on new o-ring seals on plug-in piece.
Note: Coat o-ring seals with mounting agent AP25N.
Push plug-in piece into the coolant pump.
Insert new o-ring seal in connecting piece.
10-4.184-1
Note: Coat o-ring seal with mounting agent AP25N.
38-4-112-1
Attach the assembled coolant pump with a new seal.
Tighten the bolts mutually with a tightening torque of

21 2 Nm.
38-4-244
38-4-245
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A 39
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Maintenance and Inspection DEUTZ Engine
General
Engine running-in time
The engine is immediately ready-to-operate. Please
observe that a new engine requires a running-in time of
approx. 300-500 running hours.
The oil consumption of new engines can be higher than
normal until the engine running-in procedure has been
completed. Therefore check the oil level daily during
running-in time.
All DEUTZ Diesel engines are precision products, so that
special running-in regulations for executing the running-in
procedure smoothly in order to avoid seizing damage
are not necessary. Actually, smooth running-in of new
engines, as known from other engine fields of application,
may even have a negative influence on the running-in
process.
Therefore you can and you should utilize the full
performance of your DEUTZ engines also in new
condition. There is no seizing damage danger if the basic
rule is observed, that full load is only permitted after
warming up the engine.
Only if cylinders and/or piston rings have been replaced
on the occasion of repair, the engine should be operated
carefully for the first 10 running hours.
Commissioning
Check engine oil level prior to commissioning.
10-3.130
A 40
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Maintenance Schedule Engine 1013
Job
Check oil level
once
at/after (op. hrs)
regularly
every (op. hrs)
upon delivery
daily1)
Clean engine compartment
daily
Visual inspection of engine for leaks
upon delivery
5 / 50-150
Check battery and battery cable connections
upon delivery
100
Check cooling system

Change engine oil 2) 3)
125/250/500/1000/2000
50
250 at least annualy
Change oil filter cartridge
50
250
Clean air filter cartridge
only when indicator light is on
Change air filter cartridge
after cleaning 5 times resp.
at least annually
after choking with rust

Change safety cartridge of air filter
Fuel filter cartridge, replace pre-filter element
Drain fuel pre-filter
Check fuel oil leakage pipes
Replace fuel oil leakage pipes (only complete replacement)
Fuel tank: Draining of sump
Check valve clearances, readjust if necessary
Retighten engine mount bolts
when replacing air filter cartridge

50
1000
upon delivery
if required
50-150
---
---
10004)
upon delivery
at least annually
50
500
50-150
500
Vibration damper, check condition

Check V-belt tensions, retension if necessary at:
at least every 2 years
500
upon delivery / 50-150
250
upon delivery / 50-150
annually
generator, coolant pump, fan, suction blower

Alarm system, check/clean
Attachments
50-150
Coolant, check concentration of additives

Check coolant level
upon delivery
Change coolant
Check hose connections / hose clamps
Drain condensate at the charge air cooler
--500
daily
2000/or every 2 years
upon delivery / 50
250
upon delivery
annually
Check hose sleeves between air filter and turbocharger
upon delivery / 50
250
Check sealing brush at sieve pan, replace if necessary
upon delivery / 50
250
upon delivery
250
upon delivery / 50
annually
Check condition of oil drain hose, fuel hoses

Check cable harnesses, connectors for damage and
proper laying
1) During the running-in period twice a day.

2) For approved engine oils see Deutz engine oils approval list (page 46)
3) These intervals only apply for a Diesel fuel with maximum 0,5% by weight of sulfur and for central-european or
comparable climate conditions.
In the case of aggravating conditions for oil stress, e.g.
intensified climate conditions (temperatures exceeding permanently 30 C)
usage of fuels containing more than 0,5% of sulfur
the oil change intervals shown in the table must be halved for each aggravating condition.
4) Replace however every 2 years.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A 41
A
Service
Training
Notes
A 42
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
Air filter
Cleaning of dry-type air filter
Indication at combined instrument gauge.
Lighting of indicator light (1), flashing of central warning
light (2) and sounding of an alarm signal.
The low-pressure switch (3) initiating the alarm is mounted
in the filter housing (4).
Never wipe the air filter cover or the filter

cartridge by using oily rags.
31663
Replacement of fine filter cartridge
11
10
Verify that the gasket between the fine filter

cartridge and the filter housing is clean and
undamaged.
5
6
11
34927
When equipped with exhaust ejector (10)

unscrew butterfly nut (5) and remove cover (6).
Remove dirty fine filter cartridge (8), either clean or

replace by new one.
If the indication (2) is alerting again after maintenance of the
fine filter cartridge, the safety cartridge (7) must be replaced,
too.
Replacement of the safety cartridge

It is not possible to clean the safety cartridge (7); after
repeatedly cleaning of fine filter cartridge for 5 times it
must be replaced at the latest.
Do not start the engine without the cartridge
in it.
8
31696
Checking the lines:
Check hose sleeves and lines between air filter and
turbosupercharger for proper fit and possible damage.
Check hose sleeves and lines between charging air
cooler and engine for proper fit and possible damage.
Check hose sleeves and line (11) of the exhaust ejector
for proper fit and possible damage.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A 43
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Coolant
Remark
The cooling circuit of the engines is filled ex works with instant mixture 40/60 providing frost protection down to 28 C.
Water quality for coolant
The values given below must not be exceeded. A test kit (order number 1213 0382) can be obtained from DEUTZ Service
to check the quality of the water available.
Coolant preparation
Water quality
min.
max.
ph-value at 20 C
6,5
Chloride ion content [mg/dm3]
100
Sulfate ion content [mg/dm3]
100
Total hardness [dKH]
The preparation and monitoring of the coolant in liquidcooled engines is especially important because corrosion,
cavitation and freezing can lead to engine damage.
The coolant is prepared by admixing a cooling system
protective agent with the cooling water.
8,5
12
The cooling system must be monitored continuously. The water level and the cooling system protective agent
concentration should both be checked.
The cooling system protective agent concentration can be checked with a tester commercially available (e.g. gefo
glycomat ).
Cooling system protective agent

Cooling system protective agents must be disposed of in accordance with anti-pollution regulations. The cooling system
protective agent (nitrite-, amine- and phosphate-free; obtainable under order no. 0101 1490 in 5-liter containers) provides
effective protection aigainst corrosion, cavitation and freezing.
The concentration of the cooling system protective agent in the coolant should not fall below/exceed the following limits in
order to obtain a sufficient corrosion protection:
Cooling system protective agent
max. 45% by vol.
min. 35% by vol.
Water
55%
65%
Other cooling system protective agents, e.g. chemical corrosion inhibitors, can, in exceptional cases, be used in the
coolant; in consultation with DEUTZ service.
When nitrite-based cooling system agents are mixed with with amine-based agents, harmful nitrosamines
are formed.
Cooling system protective agents must be disposed of in accordance with anti-pollution regulations.
Cooling System Protection

Protective Agent
[% by vol.]
Protection against freezing to

[C]
35
-22
40
-28
45
-35
50
-45
A 44
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Operating Media
Lube Oil
Quality grade
The lube oil quality grade is defined by specifications. The following
classifications are being used:
DEUTZ Lubrification oil
quality class
DQC I-02 DQC II-05 DQC III-05 DQC IV-05
ACEA-Classification
E2-96
or API-Classification
CF/CF-4
or worldwide specification
E3-96/
E5-02
E7-04
CG-4/
CH-4/CI-4
DHD-1
E4-99/
E6-04
E4-99/
E6-04
Lubricating oils in compliance with the Deutz quality class DQC III-05
or oils listed on the approval list overleaf shall be used for the combine
harvester engines
Viscosity
The lube oil viscosity of the SAE grade is selected according to the
viscosity diagram opposite.
The ambient temperature is decisive for the correct choice. Should the
temperatures temporarily fall below the limits of the SAE grade
selected, this will merely effect the cold start performance, but will not
cause any engine damage. The application limits should not be
exceeded over lengthy periods of time in order to keep wear down to a
minimum.
For all-year application we recommend to use multigrade oils.
Fuel
Viscosity classes in relation to the ambient temperature
Quality grade
Use commercial brands of diesel fuel with a sulfur content less than
0,5%. If the sulfur content is higher than 0,5%, oil change intervals
should be reduced, see maintenance schedule.
Diesel fuels are approved and can be used according to the following
specification:
Fuel
EN 590
ASTM Designation: D 975 Grade-No 1-D and Grade Low Sulfur No. 1-D
ASTM Designation: D 975 Grade-No 2-D and Grade Low Sulfur No. 2-D
JIS K 2204 Grade 1 Fuel and Grade 2 Fuel
NATO F-54, is equivalent to EN 590
The exhaust emission levels possibliy determined during certification
always refer to the reference fuel specified by the supervising
authorities for such certification.
Figure legend:
I
II
A
B
Summer diesel fuel

Winter diesel fuel
Ambient temperature
Percentage of kerosene
added
Winter-grade fuel
At low temperature, waxing may occur and clog the fuel system,
causing operational trouble. In case of sub-zero ambient temperatures
it is recommended to use winter-grade diesel fuel (down to 15 C).
A26441-1
Mix in tank only! Fill in the

appropriate amount of
kerosene first, then add the
diesel fuel.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
At temperatures below 15 C or 20 , kerosene should be added

to the diesel fuel. The relevant percentages are given in the diagram
opposite.
If summer-grade diesel fuel has to be used at temperatures below 0
C, up to 60% kerosene may be added (see diagram opposite).
In most cases, adequate resistance to cold is also attained by adding
a flow improver (fuel additive). Ask your service representative for
further information.
A 45
A
Service
Training
Release list DEUTZ lube oil quality stage DQC III-05

Manufacturer
DEUTZ
ADDINOL
AGIP
Akros
ARAL
AVIA
BAYWA
BP OIL International
Castrol
CEPSA
CHEVRON
DEA
ESSO
FUCHS EUROPE
MOBIL OIL
OMV AG
Ravensberger
Schmierlvertrieb
Lube oil refinery
Salzbergen
Shell International
Texaco
TOTAL
A 46
Lubricant type
DEUTZ OIL TLX-10W40FE
ADDINOL Super Truck MD 1048
ADDINOL Ultra Truck MD 0538
Agip Sigma Ultra TFE
Autol Valve Ultra FE
Akros Synth. Gold
Aral MegaTurboral
Aral SuperTurboral
TURBOSYNTH HT-E
BayWa Super Truck 1040 MC
BayWa Turbo 4000
BP Vanellus E7 Plus
BP Vanellus E7 Supreme
BP Vanellus C8 Ultima
Castrol Enduron Plus
SAE class
10W-40
10W-40
5W-30
10W-40
10W-40
10W-40
10W-40
5W-30
10W-40
10W-40
10W-40
10W-40
10W-40
5W-30
5W-40
Castrol Enduron
10W-40
Castrol Elexion
EUROTRANS SHPD
Chevron Delo 400 Synthtic
DEA Cronos Synth
DEA Cronos Premium LD
DEA Cronos Premium FX
Essolube XTS 501
Fuchs Titan Cargo MC
Fuchs Titan Unic Plus MC
Mobil Delvac 1 SHC
5W-30
10W-40
5W-40
5W-30
10W-40
10W-40
10W-40
10W-40
10W-40
5W-40
Mobil Delvac 1
Mobil Delvac XHP Extra
OMV super Truck
OMC truck FE plus
Ravenol Performance Truck
5W-40
10W-40
5W-30
10W-40
10W-40
Availability
Europe
Europe, Asia
Europe, Asia
worldwide
Germany
Europe
worldwide
worldwide
Germany
South Germany
South Germany
Europe
Europe
Europe
Europe, America,
Australie, Afrique du Sud
Europe, Amrique,
Australia, South Africa
USA
Spain, Portugal
North America
Germany, Europe
Germany, Europe
Europe
Europe
worldwide
worldwide
Europe, SE Asia, Africa
worldwide
Europe, SE Asia
Europe
Europe
Germany
Wintershall TFG
10W-40
Europe
5W-30
Europe, designation
varies nationally
10W-40
Ursa Super TDX10W-40

Ursa Premium FE 5W-30
TOTAL RUBIA TIR 8600
EXPERTY
10W-40
5W-30
10W-40
10W-40
Europe, designation
varies nationally
Europe
Europe
worldwide
worldwide
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
Notes
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A 47
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Maintenance and Inspection DEUTZ Engine:
Engine Oil Change
Be careful when draining hot oil: Danger of scalding!
Do not let used oil run into the soil but collect it in a
container ready for proper disposal!
A00023
Ensure that the combine harvester is on a level surface.

Allow the engine to warm up lube oil temperature
approx. 80 C.
Switch off the engine
A00024
Unscrew oil drain plug (1).

Drain oil.
Fit oil drain plug with new seal ring and tighten firmly.
Replace oil filter cartridge at each oil change.
Fill up with lube oil.
For grade/viscosity see section operating media.
Quantity:
First-filling quantity approx. 21 l
1
33975
Start the engine and operate at low idle speed.

Observe oil pressure indicator light.
Switch off the engine.
Check oil level with the machine placed on a level
surface.
If necessary, fill up oil to the max marking.
A00026
A 48
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
V-Belt generator
Tensioning/Replacement
Tensioning:
Loosen screws (1), (2) and (3).
Push generator (5) to direction of arrow (A) until correct

v-belt tension is attained.
Replacement:
Loosen screws (1) and (2).
Push generator (5) to direction of arrow (B) until v-belt

is strainfree.
Remove v-belt and apply new v-belt and tension (see

above).
Retighten screws (1), (2) and (3).
91 107
V-Belt coolant pump/fuel pump

Tensioning:
Push fuel pump (3) to direction of arrow until correct vbelt tension is attained.
Retighten screws (1) and (2).
A-008
Replacement:
Push fuel pump (3) to direction of arrow.
Slackening/tensioning of v-belt for cooling compressor

and ventilating wheel:
Disassemble half-flange (7) from driven shaft of

engine.
Remove v-belt and apply new v-belt.

Push fuel pump (3) against direction of arrow until
correct v-belt tension is attained.
Retighten screws (1) and (2).
Reattach half-flange (7).
A-009
7
A00175-2
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A 49
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Checking valve clearances, adjusting
valve clearances if necessary
Loosen venting valve and slew to the side.
Remove cylinder-head cover.
Position of crankshaft as per schematic.
Before adjusting valve clearance, allow engine to cool

down for at least 30 minutes: The oil temperature
should be below 80 C.
Check valve clearance 1 between rocker arm tappet

contact face 2 and valve stem 3 with feeler gauge 6
(there should only be a slight resistance when feeler
blade is inserted).
Permissible valve clearances:

Inlet IN
= 0,3+0,1 mm
Outlet EX
= 0,5+0,1 mm
If necessary, adjust valve clearances as follows:
19 961_2
- Loosen counter nut 4.

- Adjust set screw 5 by means of screw driver 7 in such
a manner that the correct valve clearance 1 is
attained after tightening of counter nut 4. Tightening
torque of counter nut 20 2 Nm.
Check the valve clearances at each of the cylinders

and adjust if necessary.
Remount the cylinder-head cover (use new seal if

necessary).
Slew venting valve back into position and attach.
Note: Increase the valve clearance by 0,1 mm upon each

replacement of the cylinder-head gasket.
Adjust the standard valve clearance after 50 150
operating hours.
26262_1
A 50
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Valve clearance adjustment schematic
Crankshaft position 1:
Turn crankshaft until both valves of cylinder no. 1
overlap (exhaust valve not closed yet, inlet valve starts
opening).
Execute valve clearance adjustment according to
adjustment schematic, black marking. Check the
proper adjustment by means of marking each respective
rocker-arm with chalk.
Crankshaft position 2:
Turn the crankshaft one complete revolution (360).
Execute valve clearance adjustment according to
adjustment schematic, black marking.
26263_2_1
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A 51
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Determination of cylinder-head gasket
The thickness of the cylinder-head gasket is responsible

for the proper free gap of the piston ring. The gap of the
piston ring (0,9 1,1 mm) has a decisive influence on the
combustion and therefore on:
- the performance
- the fuel consumption
- the exhaust emission
The free gap of the piston ring must be adjusted after
determining the piston projection dimension by means of
the thickness of the cylinder-head gasket.
38-4-238
Measuring the piston projection

A dial gauge with an appliance is required in order to
measure the piston projection.
The appliance consists of:
Dial gauge
Bridge 100750
2 Distance plates (1)
Put the distance plates on the sealing surface of the

crankcase and set dial gauge to "0.
38-4-188
The piston to be measured must be standing in the T.D.C.
95
90
Place the dial gauge on the piston at the measuring

points and determine the biggest piston projection.
Note: All pistons must be measured.
Observe measuring points:

BFM 1013 95 mm
Axe de Piston
Eje de bul de piston
A 52
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
5650H 5690HTS
Determination of cylinder-head gasket
Compare highest value with the table and determine

the corresponding cylinder-head gasket.
BFM 1013
Piston projection
10-4.152
0,28 - < 0,54 mm

0,54 - < 0,64 mm
0,64 0,75 mm
Marking of
cylinder-head gasket
1 hole
2 holes
3 holes
28-4.36
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A 53
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Mounting of the cylinder head
Before mounting the cylinder head onto the crankcase the sealing surfaces for the cylinder-head gasket need to be clean
and oil-free. Take care of close-tolerance sleeves.
Slightly lubricate the cylinder head screws.
It is mandatory to observe the specified tightening order of the screws in opposite diagram.
Tightening specification 1013:
1. step: 50 Nm
2. step: 130 Nm
3. step 90
A 54
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Tightening of the cylinder head screws
Sequential order
Manifold side
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A 55
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Special Tools
V-belt tension gauge
Order no. 91107
All special tools can be ordered from:

WILBR
PO-box 14 05 80
D 42826 Remscheid
91 107
Adapter for compression gauge

Order no. 100 110
100 110
Extractor for fuel injection valve, to be used with 150800

Order no. 110 030
110 030
Extractor for fuel injection valve, to be used with drawing

device
Order no. 150 800
150 800
A 56
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
Mounting tool for coolant thermostat
Order no. 170 090
170 090
Pliers for hose-clamps

Order no. 8011
8011
Torx tool set

Order no. 8189
8189
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A 57
A
Service
Training
19,59
5650H 5690HTS
Charge cooling
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Pipe from charging air cooler to cylinder head

Inlet from charging air cooler to cylinder head
Inlet side turbosupercharger from air filter
Outlet to charging air cooler
Charging air cooler
Outlet from charging air cooler to cylinder head
Inlet charging air cooler from turbosupercharger
Drain plug for condensate
3
4
19,55
6
5
7
2004514-2
A-010
A 58
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Cooling fan drive, radiator
1
2
Hydraulic oil cooler
Condenser for cooling system
Fuel Cooler
V-belt pulley on driven shaft of engine
Tensioning pulley
5.1 Tension spring with adjusting plate (5.2)
35510
11
12
Charging air cooler
Cooler for engine coolant
Ventilating wheel
V-belt pulley
10
V-belt exhauster drive
11
Sieve pan covering
12
Locking device of sieve pan covering
19,13
6
7
5.2
5.1
4
5
8
9
10
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A 59
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Exhauster drive
Charging air cooler
Radiator
V-belt pulleys
V-belt exhauster drive
Exhauster drive
Flexible suction tube to cooling air duct
Counter support for exhauster (for tensioning of the v-belt loosen nut and push exhauster housing downwards)
Rotating sieve pan
A 60
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
1,2
8
3
4
6
5
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
13_mot.tif
A 61
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Rotating sieve pan drive
Rotating sieve pan
Driving belt
2.1 Guide pulley

3
Tensioning pulley, spring-loaded
Driven shaft of engine
Sealing brush: Mount with initial tension. The bristles line up at the sealing surface when the mounting position is
correct.
Bedding of sieve pan and air intake louver
Connecting branch exhauster hose
Air intake louver in sieve pan (locked witch headless screw (11) on bearing shaft)
Fume hood
10
Stripping brush
11
Headless screw
Do not start the engine when the sieve pan is in swung out position, as otherwise the V-belt (2) will be
damaged. Check whether the V-belt properly lies in the guide pulley (2.1) subsequent to swinging in the sieve
pan.
A 62
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
2.1
2
3
3
19,59
2004514-2
9
5
1
1
6
8
10
11
9
9
2004514-1
16053690
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A 63
A
Service
Training
5670
1
Vibration damper: Check for cracks in the rubber coating.
Screws
3
4
Set collar (threaded pin unsrewed from the groove)

Gap 1+1 mm to seal ring
Grease outlet
Screw
Screw
Nut
Screws (2, 6, 7) and nut (8) locked with screw retention agent.
Apply grease before mounting.
5650H 5690HTS
1
Vibration damper
Screws M10x110, 10.9
Assembly dimension [mm] of V-belt pulleys
2.1 Distance ring

3
V-belt pulley cooling compressor drive
V-belt pulley cooling fan drive
5
6
Set collar (threaded pin unscrewed from the groove)

Gap 1+1 mm to seal ring
Bearing cover: Remove before mounting
Bearing housing: Center while mounting
Grease outlet
Type
5650/60
36
174
227
5680/90
136
201
378
Lock screws with screw retention agent Loctite 243

Apply grease before mounting.
5650H 5690HTS
Observe proper sequential order when mounting:
Flange driven shaft to engine.
Align bearing housing (8) to bearing shell.
Mount bearing cover (7).
Place set collars (5) left and right with a clearance of 1 mm to the seal ring.
Fasten the v-belt pulleys by wedges before attaching them to the engine.
A 64
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
5670
6
A00158-1
5650H 5690HTS
Mta =
Mta =
70 Nm
Mta =
Mta =
25 Nm
250 Nm
50 Nm
2,1
3
+1
22310 CC/C3
A
B
C
1
Mta =
210 Nm
8
56-110
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A 65
A
Service
Training
A00174-1
7
3
4
2
A00175
A 66
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Bedding
Aligning of driven shaft of engine (required upon replacement of the engine or the engine supporting frame)
1
Remove stop prior to alignment and weld again subsequently (bearing housing must rest against stop).
Compensating cams
Mount 3 aligning sleeves instead of the flexible disk and bolt firmly.
Mount with strong washer
Mount bearing and align shaft laterally and vertically (without belt pulley)
5.1 Turn the engine and check once more, reassemble the flexible disk.
6
Half-flange (not 5670)

Dismantle in order to replace the v-belt.
Fill locating bearing with EP long-time grease prior to mounting.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A 67
A
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Mounting of hydraulic pumps
Apply new o-ring seal (1).
Place new gasket (2) with mounting flange on

hydraulic pump.
Mount gearwheel (3).
28-3.51
3
Note: Observe whether the feather key is existing.
28-3.52
Tighten self-locking nut with a tightening torque of

80 Nm.
Note: Always use new self-locking nut.
28-3.53
Attaching the hydraulic pumps:

In the case of balance hydraulics 2 washers of 2
mm thickness must be applied at the tie rod
head.
For standard hydraulics: 2x tie rod (4), M10x275 10.9

For balance hydraulics: 2x tie rod (4), M10x285 10.9
Tightening torque: 50 + 10 Nm.
56-076
A 68
Clean tie rod threads and screw in with sealing

compound (sealing of thread hole in the flange to the
engine).
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
B
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Drive axle, Gearbox, Steering Axle
Table of Contents
5650H
5680H
5660HTS 5690HTS
Maintenance and inspection

Safety instructions, tyres, screwed fixings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .02
Safety instructions, brakes, brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .02
Drive axle / Steering Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .03
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04
Final drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .05
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .06 12
Tyres and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Drive axle / steering axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 15
Balance Drive axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 17
Shift Gear SBK 419, gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 21
5670
Shift Gear, gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 25
Shift Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 27
Final drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 29
Steering axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 31
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
B1
B
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
General
Safety instructions
Tyres, screwed fixings:
1.
When working on the wheels, make sure that the

combine harvester is safely parked and secured
against rolling (wheel chocks).
2.
When working underneath the jacked combine

harvester, make sure that nobody is allowed on the
combine.
3.
Make sure that the jack or lifting device has sufficient

load-bearing capacity.
4.
Tyre removal and fitting require specialised

knowledge and regulatory fitting tools.
5.
Check the tyre pressures at regular intervals.

If the pressure is too high, the tyre(s) may burst.
6.
Tighten all fixing screws and nuts of the front and

rear wheels and the track adjusting components in
conformity with the manufacturer's specifications.
B-8
Brakes, brake fluid:
B2
1.
Always check the brakes before setting out.
2.
The brake systems must be thoroughly tested at

regular intervals.
3.
Brake system settings and repairs may only be

carried out by specialised workshops or recognised
brake services.
4.
When driving on public roads, the independent wheel

braking system must be disabled (engage the pedal
interlock).
5.
Check the brake fluid level at regular intervals. Only

use authorised brake fluid and replace it as specified.
6.
Take care when handling brake fluid (toxic and

corrosive). Do not spill or pour brake fluid into the
environment.
7.
Dispose of brake fluid in conformity with

environmental regulations.
8.
During all repairs to the brakes, make sure that no

impurities enter the system.
9.
After all servicing, maintenance or repairs of the

brake system, carry out a final test of leakproofing,
operation and efficiency.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
B
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Drive axle
Maintenance / inspection
Service interval
Oil change
Manual gearbox
After 50 operating hours, and then every 500 operating hours

but at least once a year
Oil change
Side gears
After 50 operating hours, and then every 500 operating hours

but at least once a year
Check oil level

Manual gearbox / side gears
On handover, every 250 operating hours,
Check the gearshift

and reset if necessary
On handover, after 50 operating hours,

and then every 500 operating hours
Capacities and oil grades

For filling quantities and oil qualities see section "General"
Drive axle / steering axle

Maintenance / Inspection
Service interval
Inspect
brake system

and then every 500 operating hours, but at least once a year
Check brake fluid level,
On handover, and then every 50 operating hours, every 250 operating hours
Change brake fluid
At least every 2 years
Check parking brake, readjust if necessary
On handover, after 50 operating hours, every 250 operating hours
Retighten
screw fixings
After 20 operating hours, after 50 operating hours,

Retighten
wheel nuts as specified
On handover, after 5, 20, 50 operating hours,

and then every after 250 operating hours
Check toe-in of the guide wheels
On handover, and then every after 500 operating hours
Check or set the wheel bearing play

of the steered wheels

Check tyre pressure
On handover, daily
Visual inspection for oil leaks at gears and

Brake system
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
daily
B3
B
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Manual gearbox
Checking the oil level

The oil inspection screw (1) is located on top of the
manual gearbox.
Check the oil using the dipstick attached to the screw.
35485
Changing oil
The gearbox must be warmed up to operating temperature to change the oil.
Unscrew the oil drain plug (2).
After draining the oil, screw the oil drain plug (2)
back into place.
Pour fresh oil into (1), up to the marking on the oil
dipstick.
35486
For the oil change intervals please refer to

the lubrication plan, but in all cases the oil
must be changed at least after the harvest
season in the course of the winter storage
preparations.
Final drives
Check the oil level at the screw plug (3). Bleed the
side gears using the venting valve (5). Keep the valve
clean at all times.
33802
Oil change
The gearbox must be warmed up to operating temperature to change the oil.
Unscrew the oil drain plug (4).
After draining the oil, screw the oil drain plug (4)
back into place.
Pour fresh oil into (5), up to the bottom edge of the

threaded hole at (3).
Screw in the oil inspection screw (3).
33820
B4
For the oil change intervals please refer to

the lubrication plan, but in all cases the oil
must be changed at least after the harvest
season in the course of the winter storage
preparations.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
B
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Final drive Balance
The gear case is vented through the venting valve (1).

Oil level checking
Place the machine in neutral position (the front gear
cover must be perpendicular 90 to the ground).
Oil level shall be checked at the control screw (2).
3
35626
Oil change
Remove control screw (2).
Remove oil drain plug (3), drain oil.
Reinstall oil drain plug (3).
Replenish new oil through the opening of the control
screw (2) until oil level has reached the opening.
Screw in control screw (2).
Check oil drain plug (3) and control screw (2) for leakage.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
B5
B
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Brake system
General
The combine harvesters are fitted with hydraulic disc
brakes.
(double calliper disc brakes as from Type: 4040).
Checking the brake fluid / brake pads

Important!
B-1
For reasons of traffic safety, it is indispensable that the

brake systems are thoroughly inspected at regular
intervals. This work must be performed in a specialised
workshop.
Checking the brake fluid:
Check the level on the reservoir (B). Wipe the screw cap
clean of any dirt deposits before opening.
Replacing the brake pads:
When the brake pad has worn down to a thickness

of 2 mm
If the brake pads are unevenly worn.
Always replace the brake pads on all callipers of an axle

at the same time.
Only use brake pad sets approved by the vehicle
manufacturer or brake manufacturer.
B-7
B6
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
B
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Maintenance and inspection:
Brake system
Changing the brake pads on the
fixed calliper
General:
When changing the brake pads, clean the guide surfaces
or the seat in the housing slot. Do not use solvents
containing mineral oils or any metal, sharp-edged tools.
Check that the protective boots and clamping rings fit
perfectly. Damaged, hard or brittle boots must be
replaced.
Siphon off the brake fluid to prevent the reservoir from
overflowing when the pistons are retracted. The bleeder
valve of the relevant disc brake can also be opened, so
that the brake fluid displaced by the piston can be
discharged via a bleed hose into a collecting container.
When the pistons are returned to their starting position,
the bleeder valve must be reclosed before releasing the
piston retracting tool.
Remove the rust scale from the outer edge of the brake
disc.
Determine the brake disc wear with the aid of a disc
brake gauge.
B-6
Fixed calliper
Repair set
Brake pad assembly
Fit bolt
Hexagon-head bolt
Bleeder valve
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
B7
B
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Brake system
Changing the brake pads on the
fixed calliper
After removing the brake pads:
Insert a 20 piston gauge in the housing slot and check
that the piston face recess angle matches the slant of the
piston gauge.
B-13
Using piston-rotating pliers, rotate the piston to the correct

position against the gauge.
Direction of rotation of the disc brake during

forward travel
2b Lower contact surface in the calliper slot

3
Piston gauge with 20 measuring edge
Piston face recess angle
Hole for applying the piston-rotating pliers
Insert new brake pads in the pad slot. Fix the brake pads
with new spreader springs and pad retainer pins.
B-17
Note:
On installing the retainer pins, make sure that the outer
bearing surface of the clamping sleeve completely
disappears into the hole. Do not hammer the rivet-head in
front of the clamping sleeve.
Finishing operations:
Operate the brake pedals several times so that the brake
pads come into contact with the disc.
Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir and top up if
necessary.
Test the leakproofing, operation and effectiveness of the
overall brake system.
Special tool:
For mounting the retaining pins
Brake pin punch:

C4
Sliding shank sleeve: Make as per drawing
B-14
Works photos
Fa. Alfred Teves GmbH
6000 Frankfurt/Main 90
B-15
B8
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
B
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Brake system
Changing the brake pads

Special tools
1 Brake pad remover
Part No. 03.93141400.2/011)
B-22
2 Piston retracting tool

Part No. 03.93144950.3/01
B-18
Piston-rotating pliers for setting the

20 piston face recess angle
Part No. 03.93145700.3/01
20 piston gauge for checking the setting of the

20 piston face recess angle
for piston- 42 48 mm
Part No. 03.93140900.1/02
for piston- 5257 mm
Part No. 03.93140600.1/02
for combine harvester types
4030, 4035, 4040, 4045H
B-20
5 Gauge for measuring brake pad wear

Part No. 03.93146170.3/01
B-21
Works photos
Firma Alfred Teves GmbH
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
B-19
B9
B
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Brake system
Checking the brake discs
Brake wear must be checked with a brake pad gauge.
Wear is measured with the brakes installed. After
removing the brake pads and retracting the piston,
measure the piston through the pad slots.
Only max. 0.5 mm may be reworked on each friction
surface side.
B-25
Always change both brake discs on an axle at the same

time.
Reworking dimensions
5650H 5690HTS
Disc thickness
original
Minimum thickness
reworked
22 mm
21 mm
Condition:
a)
Brake disc can be reworked if necessary.
b)
Severe scoring and ridging of the outer

circumference. The possibility of reworking depends
on the depth of wear. The wear depth must not
exceed the maximum reworking dimension.
c)
Wedge-shaped wear of the brake disc. The brake

disc must be replaced, because fracture of the
housing between the sealing ring groove and the boot
seat on the calliper is likely (Figure B-24).
B-.23
B-24
B 10
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
B
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Brake system
Procedure for bleeding the brakes and changing brake fluid
General:
If devices, fittings, hoses or pipes are repaired or replaced in the brake system, the brake fluid must be topped up and the
entire system must be bled. A filling and bleeding tool must be used.
When bleeding the brakes or changing the brake fluid, the system must be bled and/or brake fluid must be drained at
each bleeder valve in the system.
Procedure
Bleeding (topping up) using a workshop brake bleeder
Wipe any dirt from the screwed joint of the brake fluid reservoir, bleeder nipple and surrounding parts.
Connect the brake bleeder prepared according to the relevant manufacturer's specifications for a system pressure of
2 bar - to the screwed joint of the brake fluid reservoir and open the shut-off valve on the filler hose. The system is now
pressurised.
Connect transparent hoses (approx. 1.3 m long) to the bleeder valves.
Place the free hose ends in containers at approximately the same height as the relevant bleeder valve.
Keep the bleeder valves open until the brake fluid is discharged without bubbles.
During the bleeding process, operate the pedals several time to release air from the primary chamber of the master
cylinder.
After bleeding the system or changing the brake fluid, the dust caps must be replaced on the bleeder valves.
Bleeding without brake bleeder
Fill the system, so that the fluid level in the reservoir is at the maximum mark.
Connect a transparent hose (approx. 1.3 m long) to the bleeder valve.
Place the free hose end in a container at roughly the same height as the bleeder valve.
Open the bleeder valve.
Slowly and smoothly press the pedal down as far as it will go and then allow it to return slowly and fully to the rest
position. Repeat the procedure until the brake fluid pours out continuously without bubbles.
Close the bleeder valves after pressing the pedal.
Note:
Due to the built-in pilot pressure valves in the master cylinder, the bleeder valves do not have to be closed after each
pedal activation.
If the brake pedal travel is too long or the brake pressure is too "soft" after bleeding the system, the bleeding
process must be repeated after activating the brakes vigorously several times.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
B 11
B
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Brake system
Handbrake: repair
The handbrake is mounted on the right-hand side of the
gearbox.
Dismantle the brake as shown in Figure B-26.
Check individual parts for wear and replace if necessary.
Setting:
When the handbrake is applied, the brake lever must
engage with the first third of the ratchet segment. To
adjust, use the yokes on the link-rods or pull-cable:
see Operating Instructions.
B 12
Brake lever
O ring
Brake plate
Shaft
Brake shoe with brake pad
19
Thrust washer
17
Flange
18
Brake drum
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
B
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Tyres and wheels
Wheel offset = E
In case of wheels for single mounting the tread is determined by the wheel offset of the rims and by the clearance
between outside edges of wheel hubs. The wheel offset
must therefore be determined by the vehicle design. In
case of a wheel offset of zero the tread is equal to the
clearance between outside edges of wheel hubs
Generally common configuration:

Positive offset
E
Offset
Rim centre line
Inner attachment face
Pitch circle
Hub bore
B-40
Special design:
Negative offset
E
Offset
Rim centre line
Inner attachment face
Pitch circle
Hub bore
B-37
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
B 13
B
Service
Training
M20x1.5 300 Nm
740 Nm
M24
750 Nm
210 Nm
1
A
4.1
A
5
210 Nm
B-38
B 14
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
B
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Drive axle
1
End play of the side shafts, max. 3 mm
Parking brake
Brake calliper
Profilmuffe
4.1 Bolt M10x85

5
Fitting bolt M14 x M1,5, 10.9 secured with Loctite 243
Hydrostatic motor
HMF 105: 5650 - 5660

HMF 135:
5650 - 5660 Balance

5680 - 5690
A cover plate is mounted onto the lining groove at the upper brake callipers in order to prevent penetration of dust and
chaff.
Fire hazard!
Daily remove deposits of crop residuals from the brake callipers.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
B 15
B
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Balance
Drive axle
1
Axle
Final drive
Drive plate
Bolt M20, 10.9 secured with Loctite 243
Washer Disc
Thrust ring
Spacer discs
Retaining plate
Bearing sleeve, cemented in place with Loctite 648
10 Spacing sleeve between profile sleeves

11 Grease pipe for outer profile sleeves
12 Bolt M10x85, 10.9
13 Connecting rod
14 Lifting cylinder
15 Spacer discs as required
16 Intermediate Shaft
17 Grease pipe for outer bearing sleeve
18 Grease pipe for inner bearing sleeve
Assembly / dismantling
Removing the tilt cylinders
Jack the combine and mount it on supports (tilt cylinders must be fully extended).
Disconnect the hydraulic connections. Detach the front tilt cylinder by removing bolt and pull the rear tilt cylinder off bolt
(after removing the locking screw).
Note:
Tighten connecting rod (13) in unloaded condition of the driving axle (supported) with 20 Nm and secure with lock
washer.
Axial play of intermediate shafts (16): max 3 mm
Cement in place bearing sleeves (9) with Loctite 648: Clean axle tube and bearing sleeves and apply Loctite on
contact surfaces.
Draw in outer bearing sleeves with butt joint at the bottom, inner bearing sleeves with butt joint on top. Observe that
the lubrication hole of axle tube and bearing sleeve is aligned. Remove Loctite from lubrication hole, fill grease pipes (17,
18) with grease.
Adjust axial play of the final drives in the axle tube to 0.2 - 0.7 mm by means of spacer discs (7).
Grease axle tube after assembly of the final drives until grease comes out.
Clean and degrease contact surface between drive plate (3) and final drive (2).
Note:
For dismounting and mounting of the shift gear the retaining plates (8) must be removed and the final drives need to
be pulled outward a little in order to release the profile sleeves.
B 16
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
B
Service
Training
3
4
300 Nm
5, 7, 8
17
1
9
B-50
16
18
10
12
11
210 Nm
6
2
15
14
13
20 Nm
B-49
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
B 17
B
Service
Training
5670
Shift Gear SBK 419 (1604 0899)
1
Drive Shaft
Countershaft
Slotted nut, caulked on the drive shaft
Shifter collar, 1st and 2nd gear
Shifter collar, 3rd and 4th gear
Hand Brake
Differential Gear
Output Shaft with Brake Disc
Disc
Mounting instruction:
Cover and flanges are sealed up to the gear box housing by means of sealing compound.
Insert bolts in through borings in the housing by means of sealing compound.
B 18
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
200-250 Nm 3
46-54 Nm
46-54 Nm
0-0,6
64 Nm
25-28 Nm
25-28 Nm
80-94 Nm
46-54 Nm
Service
Training
B005
B 19
B
Service
Training
1
13
13
200-250 Nm
B006
30-35 Nm
BB
3
35-41 Nm
54-69 Nm
69-83 Nm
10
4
10
9
B007
B 20
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
B
Service
Training
5670
Shift Gear SBK 419 (1604 0899), gear change
1
Housing cover
Shifter rail for shift finger
Shift finger
Shift lock
Guide pin for shift lock
Ball, pressure spring for locking of the shifter rails
Shifter rails for shift-forks
Shift-fork, 1st and 2nd gear
Shift-fork, 3rd and 4th gear
10
Threaded pin with counter nut, secured with Loctite 262
Adjustment of the shift-forks (8, 9):

Shift-forks (7) are in neutral position, see cross-section B-B.
When threaded pins (10) are loosened, adjust shift-forks such that the clearance A, B between shifter collars and gear
wheels is equal (difference between measurement A and B max. 0,5 mm, see previous page).
Equally tighten threaded pins alternately to 30-35 Nm. By doing this, the shift-fork must not move anymore along the
shifter rail (7).
Secure threaded pins with counter nuts, 35-41 Nm. While securing the nut, the threaded pin must not be twisted anymore.
Shift into the gears and check whether the shifter collars (8, 9) are tensed axially (correct the adjustment of the shiftforks if necessary)
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
B 21
B
Service
Training
5680, 5690
Shift Gear (1604 0895)
1
Drive Shaft
Countershaft
Shifter collar, 1st and 2nd gear
Shifter collar, 3rd and 4th gear
Hand Brake
Output Shaft with Brake Disc
Differential lock, actuation not coupled
Differential Gear
Shim ring for adjustment of the axial bearing play 0,3 0,8 mm
Cover and flanges are sealed up to the gear box housing by means of sealing compound.
Insert bolts in through borings in the housing by means of sealing compound.
B 22
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
90-106 Nm
46-54 Nm
46-54 Nm
80-94 Nm
0,3-0,8
80-94 Nm
46-54 Nm
24-28 Nm
116 Nm
80-94 Nm
25-28 Nm
80-94 Nm
25-28 Nm
90-106 Nm
Service
Training
B001
B 23
B
Service
Training
1
9
2
5
10
11
B002
4
1
CC
AA
55-65 Nm
30-40 Nm
4
B004
12
7
EE
30-40 Nm
55-65 Nm
8
9
FF
9
10
11
10, 11
B010
FF
B003
9
B 24
B011
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
B
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Shift Gear (1604 0895), gear change
1
Gear Shift Cover
Housing cover
Shaft for shift finger
Shift finger
Dowel Pin, two pieces
Threaded plug, tap depth in housing cover: 0,5 mm
Ball, pressure spring for locking of the shifter rails
Balls for shift lock
Shifter rails for shift-forks
10
Shift-fork, 1st and 2nd gear
11
Shift-fork, 3rd and 4th gear
12
Threaded pin with counter nut, secured with Loctite 262
Adjustment of the shift-forks (10, 11):

Shift-forks (9) are in neutral position, see cross-section A - A.
When threaded pins (12) are loosened, adjust shift-forks such that the clearance A, B between shifter collars and gear
wheels is equal (difference between measurement A and B max. 0.5 mm, see previous page).
Equally tighten threaded pins alternately to 30-40 Nm. By doing this, the shift-fork must not move anymore along the
shifter rail (9).
Secure threaded pins with counter nuts, 55-65 Nm. While securing the nut, the threaded pin must not be twisted any
more.
Shift into the gears and check whether the shifter collars (10, 11) are tensed axially (correct the adjustment of the shiftforks if necessary)
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
B 25
B
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Gear Shift
Gearshift Lever
Gear shift bracket (Selection of gear shift gate)
Star wheel with guide finger (engaging of gears)
Steering rod star wheel bellcrank
Bellcrank gears
Shifting Gate
Feed rods gear shift gate
Feed rods Gears
Bellcrank for shift gate at gear box
10
Gear Shift Head
11
Shifter rail in gear cover
Gear shift bracket fulcrum (2) - Selection of shift gate
Star wheel fulcrum (3) - Engaging of gears
Position of shift gates

A
5670
3 and 4
1 and 2
5650, 5660 1 and 2
3 and 4
5680, 5690
The depicted feed rod linkage (7) at the bellcrank (9) corresponds to 5650/60, 5680/90. In case of 5670 the feed rod (7) is
located in front of the fulcrum of the bellcrank (9).
B 26
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
B
Service
Training
4
6
5
7
8
11
10
A
B
9
8
1,3
2,4
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
56-116
B 27
B
Service
Training
4
6
8
2
6
6
1
2
3
4
1
B 28
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
B
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Final Drive (1604 0897)
1
Drive Shaft, Initial tension of the bearing 0 0,05 mm
Intermediate Shaft, initial tension of the bearing 0,03 0,05 mm
Gear Wheel Shaft
Shrunk-on intermediate ring
Slotted nut, caulked on the gear wheel shaft, tightening torques 450 Nm
Shim Rings
Thrust Washer
Shaft Seal Ring
Lubricate shaft seal ring (8) and taper roller bearing. Pretension the taper roller bearing of the gear wheel shaft (3) with
dismantled spur gear such that the moment of friction amounts to 15 - 17 Nm. Turn the gear wheel shaft back and forth
several times on this occasion.
Determine the thickness of the required shim rings (6) between thrust washer (7) and shaft shoulder. Mount gear wheel
shaft with shim rings and securely tighten slotted nut (5). Check moment of friction again, correct thickness of shim rings if
necessary. Mount gear wheel shaft with spur gear, tighten slotted nut (5) with 450 Nm and stake into the grooves of the
gear wheel shaft.
Fill shaft seal ring (8) between the sealing lips with grease.
X Detail Final Drive (1604 1806) for Balance Axle

1
Drive Shaft
Shaft Seal Ring
Retaining Ring
Shim Rings
Washer Disc
Gear Box Housing with Bearing Tube
For oil level check move Balance axle into neutral position (housing cover of final drive is in vertical position).
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
B 29
B
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Steering Axle
1
Steering Axle Support
Hinged Stop
Steering knuckle
Steering tie rod
Steering cylinder
Ball joints, tightening torque of castle nut M20x1.5: 230 Nm
Stop Screw
Steering Stop Limit
Hub of the Wheel
10
Seal Washer
11
Supporting Disc
12
Castle nut, secured with cotter pin
13
Washer Disc
14
Thrust Washer
15
Cover disc with spring dowel (anti-rotation pin)
16
Washer disc, shim ring
Adjustments at the steering axle:

1. Toe-in approx. 3 mm, measured at beads of rim at hub centre level.
2. Piston rods of steering cylinders (5) must hit the limit positions simultaneously.
3. Adjustment of stop screw (7) at steering stub axle: Set the stop screw in the steering cylinder limit positions until the
steering stop limit (8) is reached.
4. Axial play of steering knuckles (3) inside of axle casing: 0,2 0,4 mm
5. Axial play of wheel bearings max. 0.1 mm
Observe mounting position of thrust washer and washer disc (14, 13): Chamfer (a) of thrust washer (14) and lubrication
groove (b) of washer disc (13) must face each other (ground faces).
Fill hub of the wheel (9) and bearing with grease.
If the steering axle is pivoted in the lower borehole (1.1) of the steering axle support, the hinged stop (2) must be
mounted at the steering axle support.
B 30
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
B
Service
Training
1
1,1
6
3
15
16
8
14
10
12
11
13
b
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
B 31
B
Service
Training
Notes
B 32
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
C
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Belt drive clutches, Lubrication System
Table of Contents
5650H
5680H
5660HTS 5690HTS
Electric actuation of belt couplings, Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .02 03
Integrated clutch control power unit (CCP2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04 05
Straw chopper clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .06 07
Grain tank discharging clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .06 07
Threshing mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .08 09
Feed passage clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .08 09
Installation Diagram Lubrication distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 11
Installation Diagram Central lubrication system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 13
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
C1
C
Service
Training
B40
15
S22
S23
15
30
31
F34
F39
30506-1
H35
X505
X515
S40
A30
X510
X507
2
A8
26
13
14
H1b H2b
H3b H4b
F2
F1
35402
X5
X1
H1a
X505
X508
X509
X508
X2
H2a
4
F3
F4
R1 R2
X4
H4a
X3
H3a
G3
D+
X1
X3
X4
+12V
X6
GND-
R3 R4
C0105
K50 K71
G
W
X16
M5
X142
X143
B39
M4
M6
B38
B19
C2
M7
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
C
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Electric actuation of the belt couplings
Overview
A8
Clutch Control Power Unit
A30
Commander Control
B19
Speed sensor chopper
B38
Sensor for chopper flap position
B39
Sensor grain tank tube
B40
Central Indicator
Fuses
G3
Generator
H35
Indicator light chopper flap
K50, K71
Relay swivel grain tank tube
M4
Servomotor threshing mechanism clutch
M5
Servomotor for feed passage clutch
M6
Servo motor grain tank clutch
M7
Servomotor chopper clutch
S22
Foot switch cutting mechanism stop
S23
Foot switch grain tank clutch
S40
X....
Connector
Note:
The cutting table clutch is also referred to as the feed passage clutch.
The long straw discharge flap is also termed the straw chopper flap or (straw) distributor flap.
Prerequisites for proper function of the belt couplings:
Engine is running with low idle speed (charge control light off)
Working master switch S40 on
Grain tank clutch can only be activated after swivelling of the grain tank tube. Sensor B39 must be functioning.
Engaging belt couplings at engine stop:

Press key
on Commander Control 2000 while turning Starting key in position I.
Working master switch must be ON.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
C3
C
Service
Training
34939-4
MED_ACAD*11/24/10 11:01 AM Rev:12.23
SOLARI 1.she
56-000
A8
26
13
14
H1b H2b
H3b H4b
F2
F1
X5
X1
H1a
3
4
F3
X2
H2a
+12V
X6
GND-
F4
X3
H3a
30
31
R1 R2
X4
H4a
R3 R4
C0105
C4
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
C
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Electric actuation of the belt couplings
Integrated clutch control power unit (CCP2)
14
Load relay
1
Threshing mechanism
Feed passage
Grain tank discharging
Straw chopper
F1 F4
Fuses 30 A
F1 F5
Fuse 60 A
X1 X6
Plug-in connectors
H1b H4b
LEDs, control input
H1a H4a
LEDs, load output
R1 R4
Potentiometers
Description:
Indicators (LEDs):
Red: disengage
Green: engage
H1b H4b:
LEDs for indicating the switch status at the control input

(signals from the control unit) for belt clutches 1 4
H1a H4a:
LEDs for indicating the switch status at the load output

(connectors X1 X4) for belt clutches 1 4
Setting the load switching point:

R1 R4:
Potentiometer for adjustment of the cut-off current of the servo motors

(spring-loading of the relevant belt clutch)
Turn clockwise:
increase load current (spring-loading)
Turn counter-clockwise:
reduce load current (spring-loading)
1 turn = approx. 2.8 A change in load current
Note:
Use a screwdriver with 1.2 mm blade
The potentiometers do not have a mechanical end-stop.
Observe the proper polarity while connecting the power supply
Control unit
Pin
A8
A8
A8
A8
A8
A8
A8
A8
X5
X5
X5
X5
X5
X5
X5
X5
Pin No. Function

6
2
9
8
19
18
22
21
Cutting mechanism on
Cutting mechanism off
Threshing mechanism on
Threshing mechanism off
Chopper on
Chopper off
Grain tank discharge on
Grain tank discharge off
Foot switch grain tank
Sensor chopper flap
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Cable colour
Pin
Pin No.
black-brown
white
grey
blue-yellow
violet
yellow
green-pink
green-blue
violet-yellow
orange-green
white-blue
green-black
X 507
X 507
X 507
X 507
X 507
X 507
X 507
X 507
X 515
X 515
X 509
X 508
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
1
5
11
Com.
Control
Pin
A 30
A 30
A 30
A 30
A 30
A 30
A 30
A 30
A 30
A 30
A 30
A 30
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
52
20
53
34
C5
C
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Belt drive clutches
Straw chopper clutch
Basic setting:
Spring-loading when engaged (dimension A):
110 mm
The spring-loading is set on the potentiometer of the relevant load relay in the switch box.
Servomotor stroke (dimension B):
60 mm
The stroke is adjusted with setscrew (C).
Reference dimension D must be at least 115 mm in the engaged state.
If dimension D is less than 115 mm, adjust the transmission shaft and check the servomotor stroke.
Grain tank discharging clutch

Basic setting:
135 mm
The spring-loading is set on the potentiometer of the relevant load relay in the switch box.
60 mm
C6
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
C
Service
Training
C0110
C0111
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
C7
C
Service
Training
C0112
C0113
C8
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
C
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Belt drive clutches
Threshing mechanism
Basic setting:
Spring-loading engaged (dimension A):
140 mm
The spring-loading is set on the potentiometer of the relevant load relay in the switch box
72 mm
Feed passage clutch

Basic setting:
145 mm
The spring-loading is set on the potentiometer of the relevant load relay in the switch box
Servomotor stroke (dimension B): 60 mm
The stroke is set by adjusting the spring assembly on the threaded rod (G).
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
C9
C
Service
Training
Lubrication distributor
left side
Installation Diagram
Bent pipe discharge pipe
Slewing rim bent tube
Slewing rim bent tube
Angular gear grain tank discharge
Turbo separator
Impeller
Threshing drum
Shaft of sieve pitman arm
Bearing feed passage
11 Bearing feed passage shaft
C 10
For more information about lubrication

distributor blocks refer to section "lubrication
distributor right side.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
C
Service
Training
right side
10h
1. Bearing feed passage

2. Bearing feed passage shaft
35618
3. Elevator head
4. Threshing drum
5. Impeller
6. Turbo separator
7. Engine bearing
8. Shaft of sieve pitman arm
Installation diagrams of lubrication distributor

blocks
Instructions for trouble shooting

ATTENTION!
It is not admissible to obturate
individual lines from the distributor block to
the point of lubrication (e.g. a ruptured hose
line) as thereby the remaining points of
lubrication of the corresponding distributor
block will be also blocked.
In the installation diagrams, the allocation and

assignment of the points of lubrication to the
corresponding distributor block is shown.
If lines are replaced, they must be

connected according to the installation
diagram as the amount of grease for each
point of lubrication is metered individually by
the corresponding distributor block valve!
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
If the distributor block cannot be lubricated, identify the

clogging point of lubrication and clear.
Call on a specialised workshop if necessary.
C 11
C
Service
Training
Balance
1+2
Journal bearing
3+4
Journal bearing
5+6
Hydraulic cylinder rear
7+8
Hydraulic cylinder front
35618
For more information about lubrication

divider blocks refer to section
"lubrication distributor right side.
Installation Diagram Central lubrication system

Block
No
Designation
Pump unit of centralised lubrication system
Distributor block right
Distributor block
Distributor block
Distributor block
Distributor block
Distributor block above front axle
Instructions for trouble shooting

ATTENTION!
It is not admissible to obturate
individual lines from the distributor block to
the point of lubrication (e.g. a ruptured hose
line) as thereby the remaining points of
lubrication of the corresponding distributor
block will be also blocked.
(only with Balance)

8
10
C 12
Distributor block left

Distributor block feed passage
If the distributer block cannot be lubricated, identify

the clogging point of lubrication and clear.
Call on a specialised workshop if necessary.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Tensioning pulley
Chaff spreader
Chaff spreader
Chaff spreader
Rear axle
Rear axle
Chopper
Right side
VPKM-4-520
Lubrication aid
Chopper
Chopper
Tensioning pulley
Tensioning pulley
Sieve pitman arm
Sieve pitman arm
Sieve pitman arm
Rear axle
VPBM-4-209
Lubrication aid
Feeder front right
Pivoting cutting
mechanism
Feed passage
Sieve pitman arm

Sieve pitman arm
Sieve pitman arm
Tensioning pulley
Left side
Angular gear
Tensioning pulley for fan
Tensioning pulley for fan
Tensioning pulley
Tensioning pulley
Tensioning pulley
Tensioning pulley
Tensioning pulley
Tensioning pulley
Tensioning pulley
Speed setting
Pivoting cutting
mechanism
Tensioning pulley
Feeder front left
Revolvingg turret
Tensioning pulley
Tensioning pulley
Tensioning pulley
Chopper
VPKM-5-404
Lubrication aid
Service
Training
C 13
C
Service
Training
Notes
C 14
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Hydraulic
Table of contents
Combine Harvester Types
5650H
5680H
5660HTS 5690HTS
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .03
Circuit symbols in the hydraulic circuit diagram conforming to ISO 1219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04 09
Circuit diagram working hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 11
Circuit diagram working hydraulics in case of Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 13
Layout plan working hydraulics in case of Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 15
Control valve block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 17
Subplate for control valve block:

Flow control valve with integral pressure-limiting valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 19
Control valve, single-acting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 21
Control valve, double acting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 23
Pressure accumulator switching valve with pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 25
EMR-D control valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 29
Balance
Hydraulic circuit diagram of the Balance self-levelling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 31
Pilot control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 33
"Balance" control valve block with integral non-return valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 35
Tilt control cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 37
Cutting table automatic lateral float (field tracker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 39
Hydraulic cutting angle adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 39
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Working hydraulic
Actuating cylinders cutting table (feed passage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 41
Actuating cylinders Steering axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 43
Hydraulic cylinders repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 47
X
X
X
X
X
X
Hydraulic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Danfoss Lenkorbitrol Type OSPC 160 ON
Inspecting the steering system . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
x
X
x
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 49
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 51
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 54
Hydrostatic ground drive

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Basic construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 57
Fitting the hydrostatic pump to the engine
BoWex coupling between hydrostatic pump and engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 59
Drive control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 61
Swashplate pump HPV 105/135 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 65
Swashplate pump HPV 135 measuring and testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 67
Hydrostatic motor type HMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 71
New refilling and bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 73
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 77
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D1
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Hydraulic
Table of contents
5650H
5680H
5660HTS 5690HTS
Drive hydraulics
Steering axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 79
Hydraulic block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 81
Hydraulic circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 81
Double valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 83
Hydraulic switching valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 83
Pressure maintaining valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 83
Operating principle of the radial piston motors, traction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 85
Installation position of sensors and valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 87
Setting - Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Troubleshooting - Traction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
D2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
Hydraulic system
General
Safety instructions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The hydraulic system is under high pressure.

When searching for leaks always use suitable aids
(e.g. piece of cardboard) to shield against injury.
Hydraulic oil forced out under pressure can cut the
skin and cause severe injury. In such cases, call a
doctor immediately, since otherwise serious infection
may result.
Before working on the hydraulic system, depressurise
the system and lower all front attachments.
When working on the hydraulic system, always switch
off the engine and remove the ignition key. Also,
secure the combine harvester against unintentional
movement (handbrake, wheel chocks).
Maintenance
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
When connecting hydraulic equipment, make sure

that the hydraulic hoses are connected as specified.
If the hoses are connected incorrectly, the functions
may be inverted (e.g. raising/lowering).
The hydraulic accumulator contains compressed gas.
Do not drop the accumulator or expose it to
temperatures above 150 C.
Check the hydraulic hoses at regular intervals and
replace them if damaged or worn. The replacement
hoses must comply with the technical requirements of
the combine harvester manufacturer.
Hydraulic oils and filters must be correctly disposed
of in accordance with environmental regulations.
Before opening hydraulic equipment, thoroughly
clean the surrounding area. Maintain scrupulous
cleanness while working.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D3
D
Service
Training
Hydraulic system
General
Circuit symbols in the hydraulic circuit diagram conforming to ISO 1219
Basic symbols
Designation
Meaning
Lines
Working line
Energy conversion
Symbol
Designation
Meaning
Constant
Hydraulic pump
displacement with almost constant
pump
displacement per
revolution or per
double stroke
Control line
Leak line
Double line
Shaft, lever, rod
with 1 delivery direction
Circle
Differentiated by
size of symbol:
Pump, compressor,
motor
with 2 delivery
directions
Constant
Hydraulic motor
displacement with almost constant
motor
displacement
per revolution
Measuring device
Check valve,
rotary connection
with 1 direction of flow
Joint, contact roller
with 2 directions of flow
Square,
Rectangle
Example: valves,
cylinders, actuators
Square
on tip
Filter, lubricator,
heat exchanger
Various
symbols
Spring
Symbol
Variable
Hydraulic motor
displacement with variable
motor
displacement per
revolution
with 1 direction of flow
Restrictor
with 2 directions of flow
Measuring orifice
Function symbols
Designation
Meaning
Function
symbols
Delta
Direction of flow
with indication
of pressure medium
hydraulic
pneumatic
Arrow
Direction of flow
Rotatability
Oblique
arrow
An oblique arrow
drawn through the
complete symbol
the device is variable
Thin dotted
border
Frame around parts

belonging to a single
block or subassembly
D4
Symbol
Pump
motors
Hydraulic devices that

can operate as both
pump and motor
Constant
Hydraulic device with
displacement almost constant
pump
displacement per
revolution, acting as
a pump in 1 direction
of flow and as a motor
in the opposite
direction
acting as both pump
and motor in 1 direction
of flow
acting as both pump
jand motor in
2 directions of flow
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
Hydraulic system
General
Cylinders
Pressure valves
Designation
Meaning
Singleacting
cylinders
The force applied by the

pressure medium moves
the piston in only
1 direction
Symbol
Designation
Return movement by
built-in return spring
The force applied by
the pressure medium
moves the piston in
2 directions
with single piston rod
with double piston
rod
Differential
cylinders
Double-acting cylinder
with single piston rod,
if particular emphasis
should be placed on
hedifferential effect
with supply through the
piston rod
Telescopic
cylinders
Cylinder with a number

of telescoping pistons
adding their strokes
together
singleacting
Return movement
only by external force
doubleacting
Forward and return

movement by hydraulic
liquid or compressed air
Symbol
Valves that mainly

influence pressure.
With 2 end-positions
and infinitely variable
intermediate position.
Represented with only
one box (neutral position)
Return movement
by external force
Doubleacting
cylinders
Meaning
with 2 controlled
connections and closed
neutral position
PressureValve for limiting
limiting valve the inlet pressure by
opening the outlet
against return force
(spring)
Pressurelimiting valve,
remote
controlled
Valve with a remote

control influencing
the return force
The remote control
cancels the return force
(opposite direction)
The remote control
amplifies the return force
(same direction)
Cylinder with Double-acting cylinder,

end-damping e.g. with non-variable
damping at the
piston end
Double-acting cylinder,
e.g. with non-variable
damping at both ends
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D5
D
Service
Training
Hydraulic system
General
Flow control valves
Designation
Meaning
Check valves
Symbol
Designation
Valves that mainly

influence the flow rate
Orifice valve
2-way
flow control
valve
Flow valve with

constant restriction built
into a line. Flow and
pressure drop are
determined by
viscosity.
2-way
adjustable
flow control
valve
Flow valve that

maintains a constant
outlet flow by closing
automatically; the
desired outlet flow
setting can be adjusted.
3-way
flow control
valve
Flow valve that

maintains the outlet
flow constant by
automatically opening
a drain (bypass valve)
3-way
adjustable
flow control
valve
Non-return
valve
Flow valve with

constant short
restriction. Flow and
pressure drop are
mainly determined by
viscosity.
Flow valve that
maintains a constant
outlet flow by closing
automatically
Flow valve that

maintains the outlet
flow constant by
automatically opening
a drain; the desired
drain flow setting can
be adjusted.
Symbol
Valves that block the

flow in one direction
and allow flow in the
opposite direction.
The pressure on the
outflow side loads the
checking component,
thereby reinforcing the
closing of the valve.
Flow control
valves with
constant
restriction
Restrictor
valve
Meaning
Check valve that closes

due to a force acting
on the checking part.
Blocks the flow when the
outlet pressure is higher
than the inlet pressure.
With counter-pressure,
e.g. spring; blocks the flow
when the outlet pressure
is greater than or equal
to the inlet pressure.
Remotecontrolled
non-return
valve
Non-return valve with

actuator, e.g. hydraulic,
to cancel the blocking
or passing action.
Blocks the flow if the
outlet pressure is greater
than the inlet pressure,
but the blocking action
can be deactivated by
the remote control.
Allows flow when the
outlet pressure is greater
than or equal to the inlet
pressure, but the flow
can be deactivated by
the remote control.
Switch
positions
Circulating
position
Supply is connected
to return, and the
load ports are closed.
Floating
position
All ports are connected.
Blocking
position
All ports are closed.
D6
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
Hydraulic system
General
Directional control valves are essentially characterised by:
Designation
Meaning
Valves with several
defined switch positions,
each represented
by 1 box.
The ports (supply and
outlet connections) are
drawn in the neutral
position box, or, if neutral
is unavailable, in the
outlet position. The other
positions are obtained
by shifting the boxes until
the ports are lined up
with the internal lines
(channels) of the relevant
box.
Symbol
Actuators
Designation
Actuators
with
operatorsupplied
control force
Forward
position
Reverse
position
Connections are
switched o generate a
flow that causes the
connected devices to
perform their specified
functions.
Each connection points
is connected to its
opposite connection
point (the flow arrows
are parallel).
The connection points
are connected to their
diagonally opposite
connections (flow arrows
cross over diagonally).
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
by pushbutton
Mechanically by momentaryoperated
contact switch
actuators
by spring
by contact roller
by contact roller with
no-load return
e.g. device is operated
mechanically by contact
roller with automatic
no-load return
Channel shut-offs are

indicated by transverse
dashes inside the boxes.
Flow
positions
General
by pedal
Connections between
channels inside a valve
are indicated by a dot.
The designation
"-way valve" is preceded
by the number of
controlled ports and
switching positions, e.g.
a directional control
valve with 3 controlled
connections and
2 positions is termed a
"3/2-way valve"
(a three-two-way valve).
Symbol
by lever
Inside the boxes, the

lines represent the
channels and the arrows
the directions of flow.
Abbreviated
designation
Meaning
Electrically
operated
actuators
by solenoid
with 1 effective
winding
by solenoid with
several windings acting
in the same direction,
e.g. 2 windings
with 2 opposed
windings
by electric motor
Directly
operated
actuators
by applied pressure
Filters
Designation
Meaning
Filter
Device for separating

dirt particles
Symbol
D7
D
Service
Training
Hydraulic system
General
Coolers
Pipes/Lines
Designation
Meaning
Cooler
Device for cooling the

hydraulic fluid or air.
The arrows pointing
outwards indicate that
heat is discharged,
but the coolant circuit is
not shown.
Symbol
Meaning
Hydraulic
accumulator
Device for storing

hydraulic energy.
The fluid is pressurised
by a spring, weight or
gas (e.g. air, nitrogen
etc.). The energy is then
transmitted by the flow
of this pressurised fluid.
Symbol
Meaning
Containers
Ventilated, with pipes

above the level of the
liquid
Symbol
Control
line
Line for transmitting

the control energy,
including settings and
adjustments
Leakage
line
Line for draining

any leaking liquid
or for venting
Flexible
line
Line that can flex

during operation,
e.g. rubber hose,
corrugated tube, spiral
tube, mainly connected
to moving parts
Connection
between
lines
Fixed connection,
e.g. welded, soldered
or screwed.
Pressurised connections
Designation
Meaning
Pressurised
connections
Ventilated, with supply

to pump
Pressure coupling on
devices and pipes to
tap energy or for
measurements
Pressurised
with stopper
Ventilated, with pipes

below the level of the
liquid
Meaning
Electric
motor
with quasi-constant
speed (for further
details, see DIN 40715).
Combustion
motor
Symbol
with connecting line
Energy sources
Designation
Symbol
Electric
line
Containers/Tanks
Designation
Meaning
Working line, Line for transferring

return line
energy
and supply
(feed) line
Accumulators
Designation
Designation
Symbol
Quick-release coupling
M
Designation
Meaning
Quickrelease
coupling
Line connector that

can be joined and
separated without tools
Symbol
Coupled
Decoupled, with
mechanically opened
check valves
Decoupled, line open
Decoupled, line
closed by check valve
D8
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
Hydraulic system
General
Pressure
regulating
Pressure-limiting valve
Pressure-reducing valve
Pressure
switching
Pressure
valves
Pressure control
Connecting valve
with fixed switching

positions
without fixed
switching positions
pressuredependent
pressureindependent
Flow control
valves
3/2-way valve
4/2-way valve
4/3-way valve
5/3-way valve
Shut-off
valves
Check
valves
Flow control
Directional
control valves
VALVE FUNCTIONS
2/2-way valve
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Plunger valve
Servovalve
Restrictor
Orifice
2-way flow control valve

3-way flow control valve
Non-return valve
Releasable
non-return valve
Shut-off valve
D9
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Circuit diagram working hydraulics
Circuit logic working hydraulics:

Adjustment function
Magnet
Cutting table
Raise
Lower
Reel, vertical adjustment
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M9 M10 M11 M12 M14 M15 M16 M17
Raise
Lower
Grain tank discharge tube
Slew outboard
Slew inboard
Reel, horizontal adjustment
Forward
Back
Grain tank extension
Extend
Retract
Cutting angle
Forward
Back
Cutting table tilting
Left down
Right down
Hydraulic pumps
1.1
Geared pump for lifting - lowering cutting mechanism (14 ccm/rev)
1.2
Geared pump for control block small consumers (4 ccm/rev)
1.3
Geared pump for steering gear (8 ccm/rev)
Pressure-control valve for cutting mechanism, 180 bar
Control valve for cutting mechanism
Sequence valve for accumulator, with pressure sensor
Two accumulators, filling pressure 45 bar and 70 bar
Control block for small consumers
Steering hydraulics
Oil cooler for work hydraulics (not with 5650 or 5660 standard)
D 10
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
1.1
1.2
1.3
2
4
5
3
A00242-1
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 11
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Circuit diagram for work hydraulics in case of Balance
Hydraulic pumps:
1.1
1.2
Lift/lower cutting table (14 cm3/rev)

Small consumers (8 cm3/rev)
1.3
Steering (8 cm3/rev)
Pressure relief valve 200 bar
Flow divider
Control block
4.1
Reel vertical
4.2
Grain tank tube
4.3
Reel horizontal
4.4
Grain tank extension
4.5
Cutting angle adjustment
Control block for automatic pitch compensation of cutting table
5.1
Control valve, lateral tilt of cutting table (proportional valve)
5.2
Pressure control valve
Pressure relief valve 150 bar for banking cylinder of cutting table
Control valve for cutting table
7.1
Sequence valve for accumulator, with pressure sensor
7.2
Two accumulators, filling pressure 45 bar and 70 bar
Pressure relief valve 180 bar for control valve of cutting table
Oil cooler
10
Oil reservoir with return filter
Hydraulic system of Balance
Steering
D 12
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
1.2
1.3
1.1
7.1
7.2
10
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
5.2
4.5
5.1
Service
Training
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D55
D 13
D
Service
Training
D56-1
D 14
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Layout plan
Working hydraulic in case of Balance
Hydraulic pumps:
1.1 Lift/lower cutting table (14 cm3/rev)

1.2 Small consumers (8 cm3/rev)
1.3 Steering (8 cm3/rev)
2
Flow divider
Control block
Control block for automatic pitch compensation of cutting table
5.1 Control valve, lateral tilt of cutting table (proportional valve)

5.2 Pressure control valve
5.3 Baseplate with pressure-control valve 170 + 5 bar
5.4 End plate
5.5 Orifice 2,5 mm in the pipe for oil under pressure
5.6 Changeover valve
6
Pressure relief valve 150 bar for banking cylinder of cutting table
Control valve for cutting table
Pressure relief valve 180 bar for control valve of cutting table
Oil cooler
10 Oil reservoir:
The feed line of the oil cooler is connected to connection N of the control valve (7) for cutting table.
Hydraulic system of Balance
Steering
Banking cylinder of cutting table
Tightening torque values for nuts and adjustable bolts

a =
b =
c =
25+8 Nm
25+8 Nm
13,5+4,5 Nm
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 15
D
Service
Training
D 16
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Working hydraulics
Control valve block
Note:
Common oil tank for working hydraulics and ground drive hydraulics.
Tank capacity/filling volume:
Capacity of overall working/ground drive hydraulic system:
approx. 70 ... 75 litres (depending on variant)
Depending on the equipment variant, some models may not have the control valves for the grain tank extension,
field tracker and/or cutting angle adjustment.
Warning:
The control valves must not be confused with one another.
The control valves are identified by the Bosch Type Number on the nameplate on the back of the valve.
Bosch Type No.
Function
1 525 503 524
Connection subplate (flow control valve) with pressure-limiting valve

Control valve single-acting, reel vertical adjustment
0 521 608 851

Control valve, double-acting, slew grain tank discharge tube inboard/outboard
0 521 608 852
Control valve, double-acting, reel horizontal adjustment
0 521 608 854
Control valve, double-acting, extend/retract grain tank extension
0 521 608 848
Control valve, double-acting, cutting table adjustment
0 521 608 854
0 521 608 825
0 521 608 853
Control valve (proportional valve), double-acting, field tracker control

(located in a separate valve block in case of balance)
Adhere to the sequence a b c and the specified tightening torque of the tie rods.
Otherwise the control spools may stick.
Solenoid coils:
UNenn 12 V, Umax 14 V, Umin 11.5 V
0 521 608 851 ... 0 521 608 854)
Solenoid coils: Field tracker
0 ... 12 V
(0 521 608 853) proportional magnet
Repair work on the solenoid valves is limited to sealing and cleaning.
The individual control spools cannot be replaced.
Replace the complete control valve.
Note:
The control valve functions (lower/retract) can only be activated with the engine running
(pressurised oil supply required to open the check valves).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Control valve block

Manual operation right and left
Changeover valve (in each control unit)
Factory punch-marks for control spool relief
Restrictor plate (only mounted in the subplate)
EMR-D control valve
Pressure-limiting valve
3x hydraulic pump
Bleed valve, filler orifice
Return filter
Hydraulic oil tank for working / ground drive hydraulic system
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
bl/rt
br
br/ge
ge/rt
gn
gn/ge
gn/rt
or
rt
sw
ws
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
blue/red
brown
brown/yellow
yellow/red
green
green/yellow
green/red
orange
red
black
white
D 17
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Working hydraulics
Subplate for control valve block:
Flow control valve with integral pressure-limiting valve
Function:
The subplate is the basic element of the load-dependent control system of the control valve block.
Neutral circulation
If no control valve is activated, the load-dependent control port (4) is connected via the end-plate to the return (R)
(i.e. unpressurised).
If the pressure at port (P) exceeds the spring pressure [P = 3 bar (3)], the pressure-balancing piston (1) opens to the
neutral circuit (R) in proportion to the pump delivery rate.
Activation of a control valve
When a control valve is activated (causing the control spool to connect the load-dependent control port to the P channel),
the pressure (P) applied via the control port (4) acts in support of the spring pressure [P = 3 bar (3)], thereby causing the
pressure-balancing piston (1) to close the neutral circuit. The pressure (P) increases up to the load pressure, so that the
oil can flow to the load (A/B).
In the event of overload or if the maximum operating pressure is attained (via the load-dependent control port 4), the
pressure limiting valve (170 + 5 bar) is opened. The pressure-balancing piston (1) therefore acts as the main stage of the
pressure limiting valve (2).
Pressure limiting valve setting: 170
+5
bar
Warning:
The pressure limiting valve must only be inspected and set with a test pressure gauge connected to the appropriate
measuring port.
A
Port
Port
Pump (Supply)
Return
Pressure balancing piston
Pressure limiting valve
P 3 bar spring
Load-dependent control port
LS Load-dependent control system
D 18
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
A00234
A00238
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 19
D
Service
Training
A00232
A00236
D 20
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Working hydraulics
Control valve, single-acting
Reel, vertical adjustment
Function:
Neutral circulation
For neutral circulating flow, the control spool is in neutral position 0. The load-dependent control port (4) is connected to
the return (R) in the end-plate via the change-over valve (3). The oil supply pressure (P) is blocked by the control spool
(1). The check valve (2) is closed.
Position 1: Raise
On energising the solenoid coil (1.1), the control spool (1) is pushed to the left and therefore brought into position 1.
The pressurised oil (P) is now connected to the load-dependent control port (4) (control port (4) closes the neutral circuit in
the subplate) and to channel B. On reaching the load pressure (B), the check valve (2) opens. The pressurised oil (P) can
now flow to the load port (B).
Position 2: Lower
On energising solenoid coil (1.2), the control spool (1) is pushed to the right and therefore brought into position 2.
The pressurised oil (P) is now in channel A and forces the floating piston (5) to the left, thereby mechanically opening the
check valve (2). The return oil flow is now channelled from port (B) to the return (R).
Note:
In all single-acting control valves, except for the control valve for raising/lowering the cutting table (Powerliner),
the 2nd opening stage of the check valve (2) is blocked by copper washers (2.3).
Please take this into account when assembling/dismantling.
The control spool (1) can only be removed in the direction shown by the arrow.
Port
Port
Pump (supply)
Return
Control spool
1.1
Solenoid coil
1.2
Solenoid coil
Check valve
2.3
Copper washers
Change-over valve
Floating piston
LS
load-dependent control system
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 21
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Working hydraulics
Control valve, double-acting
Grain tank discharge tube, slew inboard/outboard

Reel, horizontal adjustment
Grain tank extension, extend/retract
(if fitted)
Cutting table tilt (field tracker)
(if fitted)
Cutting angle adjustment
(if fitted)
Function:
Neutral circulation
For neutral circulating flow, the control spool is in neutral position 0. The load-dependent control port (4) is connected via
the change-over valve (3) to the return (R) in the end-plate. The oil supply pressure (P) is blocked by the control spool (1).
The check valves (2.1) and (2.2) are closed.
Position 1: (Oil pressure supply to A)
On energising the solenoid coil (1.1), the control spool (1) is pushed to the left and therefore brought into position 1.
The pressurised oil supply (P) is now connected to the load-dependent control port (4) (control port (4) closes the neutral
circuit in the subplate) and to channel (B). On reaching the load pressure (A), the check valve (2.1) opens, and at the
same time check valve (2.2) is mechanically opened by the floating piston (5). The pressurised oil (P) can now flow to the
load port (A), and the return oil can flow from port (B) back to the return (R).
Position 2: (Oil pressure supply to B)
On energising solenoid coil (1.2), the control spool (1) is pushed to the right and therefore brought into position 2.
The pressurised oil supply (P) is now connected to the load-dependent control port (4) (control port (4) closes the neutral
circuit in the subplate) and to channel (B). On reaching the load pressure (B), the check valve (2.2) opens, and at the
same time check valve (2.1) is mechanically opened by the floating piston (5). The pressurised oil (P) can now flow to the
load port (B), and the return oil can flow from port (A) back to the return (R).
Note:
In all double-acting control valves, the 2nd opening stage of the check valves (2.1), (2.2) is blocked by copper
washers (2.3).
Please take this into account when assembling/dismantling.
The control spool (1) can only be removed in the direction shown by the arrow.
Port
Port
Pump (supply)
Return
Control spool
1.1
Solenoid coil
1.2
Solenoid coil
2.1
Check valve
2.2
Check valve
2.3
Copper washers
Change-over valve
Floating piston
LS
load-dependent control system
D 22
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
A00231
A00237
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 23
D
Service
Training
A00233
A00212
D 24
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Working hydraulics
Pressure accumulator switching valve with pressure sensor
The pressure accumulator and the switching valve with pressure sensor are mounted on the front right-hand side of the
front axle.
Function of the switching valve: connecting/disconnecting the pressure accumulators (3)
In switch position 0, the solenoid coil (1.1) is not activated. Only a very limited amount of oil can flow to the pressure
accumulators (3) through the restrictor port (1.2) of the control spool (1) (pressure accumulator cut-off function).
On activating the solenoid coil (1.1), the control spool (1) moves leftwards into switch position 1 and provides a connection
from A to B via the control edge (1.3) of the spool. In other words, the pressure accumulators (3) are now connected to the
cutting table cylinders (4).
Switching logic of the pressure accumulator switching valve
The pressure accumulators are always active (connected to the cylinders) except in the following modes:
1. Raise/lower cutting table with manual control:
The pressure accumulators are cut off for approx. 3 seconds from the start of the control signal.
2. Clearance adjustment mode
When the ground contact sensors (skids) of the cutting table are activated, the pressure accumulators are cut off.
Specification:
Pressure:
Volume:
P = 45 bar
+ P = 70 bar
V = 0.5 Liter
V = 0.5 Liter
Pressure sensor:
The pressure sensor (2) detects the pressure in the cutting table cylinders and sends the corresponding signal to the
electronic control box of the EMR-D control for further processing.
Specification:
Supply voltage:
Signal:
Pressure:
9.5 V
2.4 ... 7.1 V
0 ... 160 bar
Control spool
1.1
Solenoid coil
1.2
Restrictor port
1.3
Control edge
Pressure sensor
Pressure accumulator
Cutting table cylinders
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 25
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Working hydraulics
EMR-D control valve
Neutral position
Neutral circulation from (P) (pump) to (N) (oil tank) is enabled as follows in the flow control valve (1): after overcoming the
spring load (P 3 bar, spring chamber connected to (R) by means of the control spool), the control spool (2) of the flow
control valve (1) moves to the right until the corresponding volume of oil can flow to (N) (oil tank).
A minimum oil flow of approx. 4 l/min is guaranteed by the control edges (1.1) of the control valve (1) under all conditions.
The check valve (6) protects the load on port (A) (cutting table cylinder).
Peak pressures are absorbed by means of the shock valve (4) (200 bar) and channelled to the return (R).
The proportional solenoids (7), (8) of the EMR-D control valve are electrically energised by pulse-width frequency signals
from the electronic control box. These signals are controlled as a function of the actual/setpoint values.
Warning:
Never transmit 12 V continuous voltage to the solenoid coils, because otherwise they would be destroyed. A
maximum of 7 V continuous voltage is permitted.
The solenoid coils (7), (8) must not be confused or interchanged.
In the event of electronic failure, the EMR-D control valve can also be operated manually by pressing in the solenoid coils
from the front.
Working cylinder
Neutral circulation
Pump
Return
Flow control valve (pressure balancing valve)
Control spool (proportional valve)
Adjusting restrictor, lowering
Pressure limiting valve (200 bar, cylinder safety valve)
Lowering valve with load compensation
Check valve
Proportional solenoid lower
Proportional solenoid raise
Neutral circulation or return

Control oil flow
Lowering or raising oil flow
Flow direction
Residual oil flow
D 26
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
A00230
A00215
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
A00216
D 27
D
Service
Training
A00213
A00216
A00214
D 28
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Working hydraulics
EMR-D control valve
Raise cutting table
In the "raise" position, the proportional solenoid (8) moves the control spool (2) to the left, thereby cutting off the flow of
("unpressurised") oil from the spring chamber of the flow control valve (1) to the return (R) of control spool (2), so that the
combined action of (P) and P (3 bar spring pressure) forces the control spool of the flow control valve (1) to the left,
thereby cutting off the neutral circulation.
A minimum flow of approx. 4 l/min. is permanently guaranteed to (N) via the recessed control edges (1.1).
The pressure (P) continues to rise until the load pressure (A) is reached and the check valve (6) is opened.
Due to the control port (2.1) in the control spool (2), the load pressure is also applied in the spring chamber of the flow
control valve (1). As soon as the pressure (P) attains the load pressure plus P (3 bar spring pressure), the spool of the
flow control valve slides to the right and releases the corresponding oil flow to the neutral circuit (N).
The "raise" oil flow varies according to the opening cross-section at the control edge (2.3) of the control spool (2), i.e. it is
proportional to the control current at the solenoid coil (8).
Lower cutting table

The proportional solenoid (7) drives the control spool (2) to the lowering position. A control oil flow is channelled via the
spring chamber of the flow control valve (1) to the lowering valve (5), thereby opening the check valve (6) mechanically by
means of a pin.
The lowering oil flow is channelled from port (A) to the return (R) via the open control edge (2.2) of the control spool (2).
Variations in the load at (A) are compensated by the lowering valve (5) in combination with the check valve (6).
The lowering speed is determined by the adjusting restrictor (3) and by the travel of the control spool (2).
Warning:
The adjusting restrictor (3) is factory-set and must not be adjusted.
A
N
P
R
Working cylinder
Neutral circulation
Pump
Return
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Flow control valve (pressure balancing valve)

Control spool (proportional valve)
Adjusting restrictor, lowering
Pressure limiting valve (200 bar, cylinder safety valve)
Lowering valve with load compensation
Check valve
Proportional solenoid lower
Proportional solenoid raise
Neutral circulation or return

Control oil flow
Lowering or raising oil flow
Flow direction
Residual oil flow
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 29
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Working hydraulics
Balance
Hydraulic circuit diagram of the Balance self-levelling system
1
Oil tank for working hydraulics and ground drive hydraulics
Hydraulic pump: capacity 19 cm3 / Udr.
The hydraulic pump for self-levelling control is flanged to the feed pump of the hydrostatic ground drive.
3
Pilot control unit:

Neutral circuit check valve M0 with pressure limiting valve (175 bar)
Control valve block "Balance left
Control valve block Balance right
Check valve pipe break safety device (built into hydraulic cylinder)
External flow control valves + SR2.

Observe the mounting position
A1.1 - A2.2 Cylinder connections at control valve block
Arrow points in forward direction.
Circuit logic for self-levelling control:

Adjustment function
M0
M1
Extend left and right actuators

Raise front of machine
Retract left and right actuators

Lower front of machine
Extend left / Retract right actuator

Tilt machine from mid-position to right
Extend right / Retract left actuator

Tilt machine from mid-position to left
D 30
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
M1
A1.1
A2.2
A1.2
A1.2
ERV
RV2
M3
M6
M4
M1
A1.1
A2.2
ERV
RV2
M2
A2.1
A2.1
M2
M1
M2
M5
RV1
RV1
SR1
-SR1
7
+SR2
+SR2
max. 29 l/min
max. 29 l/min
M
P1
M0
175 bar
T
T
T1
A1.2
5
A2.2
6
7
1
6
A2.1
4
2
A1.1
3
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 31
D
Service
Training
D 32
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Working hydraulics
Electromagnetic control valves
Balance pilot control
Description
1
Valve block pilot control
Pilot control valve (M0)
2.1 Solenoid coil

2.2 Pilot control cone (tapered plug)
2.3 Opening spring
2.4 Pilot control port
2.5 Valve piston
2.6 Non-return valve
2.7 Armature
2.8 Valve seat
3
Pressure limiting valve 175 bar
3.1 Pressure adjusting device

3.2 Valve body
3.3 Compression spring
3.4 Spring cup with hydrodynamic stroke assist system
3.5 Closing plug with damping piston
3.6 Valve seat
4
O-ring seal
G1/8" measuring port for pressure measurement
Neutral
In neutral circulating mode, the solenoid coil (2.1) is deenergised. The pilot control plug (2.2) is lifted by spring
pressure (2.3), thereby hydraulically opening the valve piston (2.5) so that the oil can flow from P to T.
Working position
If voltage (12 V) is applied to the solenoid coil (2.1), the pilot control plug (2.2) closes against spring pressure (2.3), so that
the valve piston (2.5) remains closed.
Pressure (P) builds up until the pressure limiting valve (3) has reached the preset opening pressure (175 bar, set with 3.1).
Dismantling / Assembling
The valve bodies (2.2 ... 2.8), (3.1 ... 3.6) cannot be dismantled (adhesive-bonded and brazed).
Warning:
When dismantling the pressure limiting valve (3) or pilot control valve (2), the O-ring (4) will inevitably be damaged.
Fit a new O-ring when reassembling.
Magnetspule (2.1) has an integral anti-surge diode.
UNenn:
12 V
R:
8
P:
18 W
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 33
D
Service
Training
M2 / M5
M3 / M6
M1 / M4
25+5 Nm
3
7
25+5 Nm
30 Nm
25+5 Nm
RV2
A1.1
T
A2.1
6
SR1
40 Nm
30 Nm
RV1
A1.2 A2.2
10
M1
40 Nm
10
M2
30 Nm
8
ERV
M1
A1.1
A2.2
A1.2
M4
A1.2
ERV
M6
M1
A1.1
A2.2
ERV
RV2
M2
A2.1
A2.1
M2
RV2
M3
M1
M2
M5
RV1
RV1
SR1
-SR1
11
D 34
11
+SR2
+SR2
max. 29 l/min
max. 29 l/min
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Working hydraulics
Electromagnetic control valves
Balance
"Balance" control valve block with integral non-return valve
Description
1
Balance valve block
Solenoid coils
2/2-way valves (M1, M2, M4, M5)
3/2-way valves (M3, M6)
O-ring seal
Flow control valve (SR1, +SR2)
Non-return valve (RV1, RV2)
Hydraulically releasable non-return valve (ERV)
Machined hole (no function)
10 Measurement port M1, M2, (M14 x 1,5)

11 Flow control valve + SR2 externally in return line
Observe the mounting position
Functional description
Extend cylinder (lift)
When solenoid M1 (M4) is activated, compressed oil is flowing to the cylinder connection via check valve RV2
A1.1 and A1.2. resp.
The pressure increase causes the hydraulically releasable non-return valve (8) to open, thereby opening the return to
the tank.
After reaching the load pressure, the oil flow to the tilt actuating cylinder is maintained constant by the flow control
valve (SR1).
Retract (lower)
If voltage (12 V) is applied to M2 (M5) and M3 (M6), solenoid valve M2 (M5) opens, thereby channelling the oil flow to the
return via the flow control valve (+SR2). At the same time, pressurised oil (P) is channelled from solenoid valve M3 (M6)
through the piston (4.2) to port A2. In the course of this the external flow control valve (+SR2) is maintaining the return oil
flow on a constant level..
Dismantling / Assembly
The valve bodies themselves (3.4), (4.1) cannot be dismantled (adhesive-bonded and brazed).
Warning:
When dismantling the solenoid valves M1 M6, the O-ring seal (5) will inevitably be damaged.
Fit a new O-ring when reassembling.
The flow control valves (SR1, +SR2) are not fitted in the same direction (see figure). Please take this into account when
assembling/reassembling.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 35
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Working hydraulics
Balance
Balance tilt control cylinder
Pipe break safety valve
1
Piston rod
Pipe break safety valve
D 36
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
T = 1,5
Service
Training
1
2
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 37
D
Service
Training
S62
b
a
1,0 mm
A
1
D 38
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Working hydraulics
Cutting table automatic pitch compensation (field tracker)
2
Pressure retaining valve (35 bar)
Shock valves 150 bar
Make sure that the basic setting of the cutting table pitch compensation control is correct, i.e. the maximum tilt angle for
lateral tilting must be the same on both left and right-hand sides.
The two piston rods must therefore reach their respective end-stops simultaneously in both directions.
The max. tilt angle is set on the adjusting thread of the actuating cylinders (by turning the swivel-heads).
Basic setting of the cylinder in the retracted position.
Dimension B 514 mm
Balance
Hydraulic cutting angle adjustment
Description
Basic setting of the cutting angle adjustment cylinder in the retracted position:
515 mm, stroke approx. 200 mm

The swivel frame must not rest on the feed passage connection.
Note:
A restrictor valve is mounted at port (1) (ensure correct installation position).
Make sure that the piston rod (a) is screwed to a minimum screw-in depth of 24 mm into the rod eye (b) (swivelhead).
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 39
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Working hydraulics
Hydraulic cylinders
Actuating cylinders cutting table (feed passage)
Repair
Clamp the cylinder tube firmly in the vice.
Insert a screwdriver through the oil port opening.
Press the screwdriver into the spring end of the snap ring (1) and strip the snap ring (1) from the piston by turning the piston.
The piston can now be gently pulled out of the hydraulic cylinder.
Push the scraper ring (2) and grooved ring (3) out of the cylinder with the screwdriver.
When repairing hydraulic cylinders, make sure all parts are kept perfectly clean.
When reassembling, always fit new seals. Use the repair set.
1
Snap ring
Scraper ring
Grooved ring
D 40
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
D-36
;;;; ;;;;;;
;;;;;;
;;;;;;
;;;;;;
;;;;;
;;;; ;;;;;;
;;;;;;
;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;;;;
;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
D 41
D
Service
Training
D-38
;;;;;;
;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;
;;;;;;
;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;
;;;;;
;;;;;
;;;;;
;;;;;
;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
D-39
D 42
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Working hydraulics
Hydraulic cylinders
Actuating cylinders Steering axle
Repair
Clamp the guide bushing (1) in the vice.
Lift the locking wire (2) in the bore off the pressure cylinder.
Push the locking wire (2) out of the bore by turning the piston rod guide (1) counter-clockwise.
The piston rod guide (1) can now be pulled out of the hydraulic cylinder complete with the piston rod and piston.
The scraper ring (4) and sealing rings (5) can be replaced after unscrewing the cap nut (3).
1
Guide bushing
Locking wire
Cap nut
Scraper ring
Sealing ring
A Version: Hengstler
B Version: Pacoma
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 43
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Working hydraulics
Hydraulic cylinders repair
A Reel vertical (4.2 7.2 m cutting table width)
1
Scraper ring
Sealing ring
Locking wire
O-Ring
Piston seal
B Reel horizontal left

1
Scraper ring
Grooved ring
Locking wire
O-Ring
Piston seal
Leakage oil compensation
C Grain tank discharge tube

1
Scraper ring
Sealing ring
Locking wire
O-Ring
Piston seal
D Grain tank discharge tube-locking

1
Snap ring
Grooved ring
Scraper ring
D 44
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
A
1
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;
;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;; ;;;
;;;; ;;;
;;;;
;;;; ;;;
;;;
;;;; ;;;
;;;; ;;;
;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
D-1
B
1
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; ;;;;
;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;;
;;;
;;;;
;;;
;;;;
;;;
;;;;
;;;
;;;;
;;;
;;;;
;;;
;;;;
;;;; ;;;
;;;
;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
D-3
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;
;
;
;
;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;
;
;
;
;
;
;;;;;;;;;
;;;;; ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
D-4
D
1
2
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;;
;;
;;;;
;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;
;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;
D-5
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 45
D
Service
Training
S70
D 46
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Working hydraulics
Hydraulic cylinders repair
Reel cylinder vertical
single-acting
Reel cylinders horizontal (synchronised cylinders)
double-acting
1
Port P or R
Bleeder
A1 A2 Reel horizontal
A1 B
Reel vertical
Hydraulic actuator for grain tank extension

A
0.6 mm baffle plate. Dismantle to bleed.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 47
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Working hydraulics
Hydraulic steering
Description
The fully hydraulic steering system is a steering system in which the steering movement is transmitted hydraulically.
There is no mechanical link between the steering wheel and the steered wheels.
Version
ON = Opencenter Non-reaction
In the Opencenter Lenkorbitrol, there is an open connection between pump and tank when the Lenkorbitrol is in the
neutral position.
In the Non-reaction Lenkorbitrol, external forces acting on the wheels are prevented from having any turning effect on
the steering wheel when the Lenkorbitrol is in neutral position.
Function
In neutral position, oil flows freely through the Lenkorbitrol from P to T. When the steering wheel is turned in one direction,
this movement causes the valve spools (5, 6) to rotate relative to each other. When turned through 1.5, the channels to
the chambers start to open. At 4, the neutral position channels are fully closed. At 6, the channels to the chambers are
fully open. The rotation of the spools (5, 6) relative to each other is limited to 8.
The supply of pressurised oil to the rotor assembly (8, 9) has the following effects:
The rotor (9) starts to revolve.
A volumetric oil flow proportional to the revolution of the rotor is supplied to the steering cylinders, causing the steered
wheels to turn.
Internal mechanical feedback from the rotor to the outer spool, so that the channels in the valve close when the rotor
has turned through the same angle as the steering wheel.
Emergency steering (manual)
In the event of failure of the oil pressure from the pump, when the steering wheel is turned the inner spool drives the outer
spool by means of the transverse bolt, thereby causing the universally jointed shaft (7) to turn the rotor (9) in the rotor
ring (8). The rotor assembly therefore acts as a hand pump and pumps oil into the steering cylinder. The open non-return
valve (ball valve) (4) between T and P draws oil from the rotor assembly return line. In this case, the steering system is
stiffer and requires greater effort but remains fully controllable.
Steering column
Neutral position springs
Housing
Non-return valve (short-circuit valve)
Inner spool
Outer spool
Universally jointed shaft
Toothed ring (rotor ring)
Gear wheel (rotor)
10
Shock valves
11
Refill valves
12
Non-return valve (TV valve)
13
Pressure limiting valve
D 48
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
A00221
A00225
A00227
A00224
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 49
D
Service
Training
A00210
A00227
A00220
D 50
A00222
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Working hydraulics
Hydraulic steering
Danfoss Lenkorbitrol Type OSPC 160 ON
1
Shock valves (205 bar)
Pressure limiting valve (150 bar)
Housing
Non-return valve (short-circuit valve)
Inner spool
Outer spool
Universally jointed shaft
Toothed ring (rotor ring)
Gear wheel (rotor)
10
Refill valve
11
Non-return valve (TV valve)
12
O-rings
13
Axial needle bearing
14
Ring
15
Neutral position springs
16
Distributor plate
17
Cover
18
Washers
19
Screws (tighten in diagonally opposite sequence)
20
Nameplate
21
Pressure setting screw
Repairs / General overhaul of the Lenkorbitrol

For safety reasons, we recommend that you have the Lenkorbitrol repaired/overhauled only by an authorised Danfoss
service workshop.
Assembly instructions
A special tool is required to assemble the Lenkorbitrol (sealing ring mounting tool available from Danfoss dealers).
Pressure measurement
Only check the pressure when the system has warmed up to operating temperature (oil temperature approx. 60).
Connect an oil pressure gauge (200 bar) to the measuring port (pressure line between the pump and the Lenkorbitrol).
Start the diesel engine.
Turn the steering wheel as far as it will go and hold it in the end-position. Read the pressure on the pressure gauge.
Pressure limiting valve setting (OSPC 160 ON):
150 bar + measured circulating oil pressure, i.e. if the neutral circulating pressure (steering system in neutral position) is e.g.
6 bar, the pressure limiting valve must be set to
150 + 6 = 156 bar.
Shock valve setting: 205 bar
A shock valve pressure test is only possible on a test bench after dismantling the Lenkorbitrol.
Note:
Before dismantling the shock valves, note the insertion depth of the pressure setting screw and make sure that it is
screwed to the correct depth after reassembling.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 51
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Working hydraulics
Hydraulic steering
Inspecting the steering system
Checking the internal leakage of the steering cylinder:
For this inspection, fully retract the piston rod and unscrew the hose on the right-hand side of the cylinder. Start the diesel
engine (running at nominal revs) and apply the full working pressure to the left-hand port. No oil may flow out of the open
right-hand port. Repeat the test on the other side.
Locating internal oil leakage in the steering system:
Remove one connecting hose from the steering cylinder. Plug the hose connector and steering cylinder port with stoppers
and try to turn the steering wheel. If the steering wheel is impossible to turn, the leak is in the steering cylinder; otherwise,
the leak is in the Lenkorbitrol.
Turn the steering wheel with a torque of 25 Nm towards the end-stop. If the steering wheel can continue to be turned
at a rate of more than 4 revolutions per minute (in both directions):
a) the shock valve is leaky,
b) the rotor or control spool is worn.
Connect a pressure gauge to the test port and measure the pressure. If the pressure is too low:
a) correct the pressure setting.
b) inspect the pressure limiting valve (possible leak).
Check the pump using the flow meter.
Check that the piston rod is straight.
Check that the steering knuckle moves smoothly and easily.
Check the steering column:
The steering column must have approx. 1 mm clearance from the base of the inner spool of the Danfoss Lenkorbitrol.
(Adjust the clearance with spacer washers between the retaining ring and the steering column).
Steering column height clearance = 0.1 0.3 mm
After turning, the steering wheel must return automatically to the 0 position (check with the diesel engine off).
Warning!
Bleed the hydraulic steering system after any assembly operation.
D 52
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Working hydraulics
Hydraulic steering type OSPC 160 ON
Troubleshooting
Fault
Possible cause
Remedy
The steering wheel is hard to turn.
1. No or insufficient oil pressure.

a) Pump not running.
b) Pump faulty.
c) Pump rotating the wrong way.
1.
d) Pump worn.
Constant steering corrections are

required with the steering wheel
(cornering).
The steering wheel does not return to

the neutral position.
The steering wheel continues turning

after it is turned.
Steering wheel play.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
a) Start pump.
b) Repair or replace pump.
c) Correct the pump direction or
change pump.
d) Replace pump.
2. The pressure limiting valve sticks

in the open position, or the set
pressure is too low.
2. Repair or clean the pressure

limiting valve. Adjust the valve to
the correct pressure.
3. Excessive friction of the

mechanical parts of the steering
system.
3. Lubricate the bearings and links

of the steering system, and repair
if necessary. Check the steering
column assembly.
1. Leaf springs lacking tensional

force or broken.
1. Change the leaf springs.
2. Spring in double shock valve

broken.
2. Replace the shock valve.
3. Gear set worn.
3. Replace the gear set.
4. Cylinder cracked or piston seals

worn.
4. Replace the defective parts.
1. Steering column and steering unit

not centred.
1. Centre the steering column in

alignment with the steering unit.
2. Insufficient or no clearance
between the steering column and
the drive shaft of the steering unit.
2. Adjust the clearance. If necessary,

shorten the multiple-spline shaft.
3. Seizing between the inner and

outer spool.
3. Contact your nearest Danfoss

service agent.

force or broken.
1. Replace the leaf springs.
2. Inner and outer spools seizing,

possibly due to dirt.
2. Clean the steering unit or contact

your nearest Danfoss service
agent.
1. Yoke of universally jointed shaft

worn or broken.
1. Replace the universally jointed

shaft.

force or broken.
2. Replace the leaf springs.
3. Splines of steering column worn.
3. Replace the steering column.
D 53
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Working hydraulics
Hydraulic steering type OSPC 160 ON
Troubleshooting
Fault
Possible cause
Remedy
Steered wheels vibrate.

(coarse tyre tread causes vibrations).
1. Air in the steering cylinder.
1. Bleed the cylinder. Identify and

remedy the cause of the air
build-up.
2. Piston seal of the steering

cylinder faulty.
2. Replace or repair the cylinder.
3. Gear set worn.
3. Replace the gear set.
4. Spacer missing above the

universally jointed shaft.
4. Fit the spacer.
The steering wheel can be turned

slowly in one direction, and possibly
both directions, without turning the
steered wheels.
1. One refill valve, or possibly both,

leaky or missing.
1. Replace the defective valves.
2. One shock valve, or possibly

both, leaky or missing.
2. Clean/replace defective valves or

fit missing valves.
The steering responds too slowly and

is too hard to turn when you try to
steer rapidly.
1. Steering unit is not receiving

enough oil; pump defective or
running too slowly.
1. Replace pump or increase its

speed.
2. Pressure limiting valve "sticking"

due to dirt.
2. Clean the valve and adjust to the

correct pressure.
"Kick-back" from the system to the

steering wheel.
1. Fault in system.
1. Contact Danfoss service.
Jolts from the wheels.
1. Incorrect setting of universally

jointed shaft and gear set.
1. Correct the setting or contact

Danfoss service.
Steering wheel jerks forcefully to both

sides.
When the steering wheel is turned,
the steered wheels turn the wrong
way.
1. Mismatched connection between

the steering unit and the steering
cylinder.
1. Replace the hoses.
Insufficient steering force

(possibly on one side only).
1. Pump pressure too low.
1. Correct the pump pressure.
2. Steering cylinder too small.
2. Fit a larger cylinder.
3. Area of the piston rod in the

differential cylinder too large in
relation to the piston diameter.
3. Install a cylinder with a thinner

piston rod, or fit 2 differential
cylinders.
1. Seal faulty.
1. Replace seal, or contact Danfoss

service.
2. Screws loose.
2. Tighten screws.
Torque 3 5 daNm.
3. Washers or O-rings faulty.
3. Replace washers or O-ring.
Leakage at the drive shaft or endcover, gear set, housing or top part.
D 54
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
General
Only shift the gears while the vehicle is stationary and the drive lever is in neutral.
Only apply load to the ground drive hydraulic system after the engine is revved to a speed of at least 1000 rpm
(manoeuvring).
Regularly clean the oil cooler.
Keep all parts scrupulously clean after topping up or changing the oil, changing the filter or carrying out repairs.
After changing the filter, run the engine briefly at low idling speed with the drive lever in neutral in order to expel air
from the supply circuit.
In the event of any damage to the hydrostatic pump or hydrostatic motor, check the pipes and hoses for dirt due to
metal abrasion. In case of doubt, always purge the cooling circuit, high-pressure hoses and return line thoroughly
before installing a new or repaired system (remove the oil cooler if necessary).
When replacing the hydrostatic motor, drain the oil from the gearbox and refill.
Strictly follow the safety instructions!
Combine harvesters equipped with hydrostatic units

Hydrostatic pump
Hydrostatic motor
5650, 5660 HTS
HPV 105-02
HMF 105-02
5650, 5660 HTS - Balance
HPV 135-02
HMF 135-02
HPV 135-02
HMF 135-02
5680, 5690 HTS

Standard and Balance
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 55
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Basic construction:
Wiring diagram
Circuit diagram
Hydrostatic pump (swashplate pump)
Bypass valve integrated in the change-over filter
Feed pump
Block-type oil cooler in the air duct
Replaceable filter
High-pressure valve
High-pressure valve
Axial piston pump
Supply pressure valve opening pressure:
10 Cold-starting valve
11 Hydrostatic motor
12 Servo adjustment
13 Drive lever with Bowden cable
14 Oil tank
15 Purge line
16 High-pressure circuit
17 Switch-over valve
18 Purge valve
19 Return filter
Observe mounting position
Function description of the hydrostatic system

The swashplate pump (1) is directly driven by the diesel engine. In the neutral position (zero position), the swashplate has
no axial movement, and therefore no oil is delivered.
The internal gear pump (feed pump) (3), which is flanged as a complete unit to the swashplate pump, draws oil from the
pump housing and delivers it to the axial piston pump (8) via the oil cooler (4), replaceable filter (5) and the supply valves
integrated in the high-pressure valves (6 and 7).
The cold-starting valve (10) protects the oil cooler (4) and is activated in response to a high resistance to flow (e.g.
starting at low outside temperatures).
All the oil that is not needed to cover leakage and hydraulic pump adjustments (servo adjustment) is returned via the
supply pressure valve (9), which at the same time maintains the supply pressure and therefore the high-pressure circuit on
the return side.
Depending on the swivel direction of the swashplate pump (8), i.e. "forwards" or "reverse", the oil is supplied to the
appropriate port of the hydraulic motor (11), thereby building up high pressure, which simultaneously closes the supply
valve integrated in the relevant high-pressure valve (6 or 7) on the low-pressure side.
If the high pressure at the combined supply and high pressure valve (6 or 7) exceeds 420 bar, the oil overflows to the low
pressure side via the connecting channel and the opposite supply valve (6 or 7).
The switchover valve (17) built into the hydrostatic motor (11) connects the low-pressure side to the purge valve (18),
which is set to 10 bar. A metered amount of oil is conducted to the crank case via the purge valve for cooling and purging
purpose and fed back to the oil reservoir via the scavenging conduit (15) and the return filter (19).
D 56
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
13
14
kor22/18-l
11
1
19
16
15
15
HY003-1
14
L2
19
L1
10
10
2
15
11
P
18
420
16
10
17
Ma
M
420
A
L
10
7
Ms
S
U
L
12
B
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
HPV7-2
D 57
D
Service
Training
2.1
1
210
49
D 58
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Fitting the hydrostatic pump to the engine
BoWex coupling between hydrostatic pump and engine
1.
Flange for mounting of hydrostatic pump
2.
Clutch disc
2.1
Bolt M10 x 35, cemented in place
3.
Clamping hub with retaining ring
4.
Diesel engine flywheel
The clamping hub (3) must not press axially on the engine flywheel.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 59
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Drive control
1
Adjusting nut
Holder
Drive lever
Rack mechanism
Ball joint
Neutral detent
Testing or adjusting the neutral position of the drive control system (testing is necessary if the combine rolls slowly forward
or back when in neutral on a flat surface, or if grinding noises can be heard when selecting a gear).
Jack up the left-hand side of the combine harvester, and secure with chocks against rolling.
Release the handbrake.
With the engine idling slowly and in 1st gear, activate the forward control on the drive lever and return to neutral.
Set the drive lever to reverse and back to neutral.

In each case, the drive wheel must remain stationary when the drive lever is set to the neutral position. If not, adjust
the Bowden cable in the holder (2) using the nut (1). Then repeat the test procedure.
If neutral cannot be set, check the Bowden cable or activating mechanism for excessive free travel:
Backlash in the connection between the drive lever (3) and the rack mechanism (4).
Backlash in the rack mechanism (4)
Play in the ball joint (5)
Excessive play in the neutral detent (6) of the drive lever.
Rack mechanism
1
Engaging fork
Rack
Guide sleeve
Take care to reassemble correctly when replacing the Bowden cable or repairing the rack mechanism.
In the illustrated position of the drive lever engaging fork (1), the rack (2) must be flush with the guide sleeve (3) see "X".
D 60
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 61
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Swashplate pump HPV 105/135
Basic construction:
1
Cam adjustment
Replaceable filter
Pressure limiting valve (cold-starting valve)
Gear pump (feed pump)
Pressure limiting valve (Boost pressure)
Pressure limiting valves (combined supply valves and high-pressure limiting valves)
Pressure outlet, gear pump (A)
Shaft
Cradle (hydrostatic swashplate bearing)
10 Working piston (quantity: 9)

11 Cylinder block
12 Control head
13 Intake strainer for feed pump
Tightening torques for valves

Valve
HPV 105
HPV 135
Cold start valve 3
30 Nm
40 Nm
Boost pressure valve 5
30 Nm
40 Nm
High pressure valves 6
140 Nm
170 Nm
D 62
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
1
2
HPV1-1
6
HPV4
4
7
1
10 11
12
13
HPV3
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 63
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Swashplate pump HPV 105, HPV 135
Cam-type adjustment
Construction
Operation
Inspection
1
Adjustment
Cam
Operating lever
Stop screws
Nozzles
Pilot housing (hollow screw)
Marking
Pilot
Feed pump
10
Adjusting piston
11
Adjusting piston
12
Compression spring (mechanical neutral position)
13
Retaining plate
14
Cradle
Drive direction: right, (view X)

Compressed oil discharge at P by turning the adjusting lever from 0 in direction I.
Compressed oil discharge at S by turning the adjusting lever from 0 in direction II.
a. Mechanical neutral position centring
The swashplate is centred in its neutral position by means of the two return springs (12) on the adjusting
pistons (10, 11). This setting is factory-set during pump assembly and cannot be changed from outside.
b. Setting the maximum pump delivery rate
The maximum pump delivery rate is factory-set on the test bench using the grub screws (4) and must not be reset.
c. Inspecting and setting the hydraulic neutral position
Set the adjusting lever (cam) to the neutral position, i.e. the marking (7) on the cam must be roughly parallel to the pilot
housing (6). The hydraulic neutral position can be corrected by turning the pilot housing (hollow screw) (6).
Warning:
These settings have already been verified on the test bench and should not be adjusted.
D 64
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
3
2
1
1
8
9
4
10
11
12
12
14
13
6
6
4
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 65
D
Service
Training
4
F
1
3
L2
L1
10
10
2
2
1
P
Ma
420
M
420
10
Ms
U
L
D 66
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Swashplate pump HPV 105, HPV 135
Measuring and testing
Overview of connections and measuring points
Circuit diagram
P, S
High-pressure port
Pressure port, feed pump
Intake port, feed pump
Control pressure supply,

Pressure supply, filter inlet
Measuring port, supply pressure, M14x1,5
Ms, Mp
Measuring ports, high pressure, M14x1,5
L, U
Leakage oil connections

Oil drain, optional leakage oil and
purge oil return from hydrostatic motor
L1, L2
Bleed connections
Pos Part
1
Setting:
2
19 bar
20 bar
25 bar
25 bar
420 bar
420 bar
Combined supply/high-pressure limiting valves

Setting:
HPV 135
Cold-starting pressure limiting valve

Setting:
HPV 105
Supply pressure limiting valve
Change filter
Arrow points in forward direction.
General instructions for pressure measurement:
Check hydraulic oil level.
Warming up hydostatic system, oil temperatures approx. 60 C.
Even under load the boost pressure must not fall below 10 bar.
In case of uncertainty whether a too low boost pressure is caused by the pump or by the hydro motor, obturate the
high pressure connections at the pump and measure again.
High pressure measurements must only be performed for a short time; danger of valve overheating.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 67
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Hydrostatic motor, type HMF
Hydrostatic motor HMF 105, HMF 135
HMF-type hydrostatic motors are swashplate axial-piston motors.
1
Drive shaft
Bearing
Working piston with sho
Cylinder block
High-pressure ports
Discharge
6.1 Purge valve (10 bar)

6.2 Switchover valve
7
Leakage oil / purge oil, max. housing pressure: 1.5 bar
Control head
Swashplate
D 68
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
HMF
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 69
D
Service
Training
4
5
10
D 70
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Hydrostatic motor HMF
Circuit diagram
Radial shaft seal
Discharge device
Retaining ring
Radial shaft seal
Shaft seal holder
Switchover valve
4.1 Plug screw M 22 x 1.5 V80

4.2 O-ring 23.52 x 1.8 V80
4.4 Washer
4.5 Valve piston
4.6 Valve sleeve
5
Purge valve 10 bar
5.1 Plug screw

5.2 Spacing washer
5.4 Ball
5.5 Valve sleeve (adhesive-mounted)
5.6 O-ring 11 x 2 V80
6
Purge oil / leakage oil port
Dismantling/Assembly of radial sealing ring (2)
Release the retaining ring (1)

Force out the shaft sealing ring holder (3), including the shaft sealing ring (2) by blowing compressed air through the
leakage oil port (6).
Note:
Fix the washer and screw to the shaft end, in order to prevent the cover (3) being blown off.
The discharge system is used for purging the circuit and the housing.
Discharge flow rate: 12 l/min.
Purge valve opening pressure: 10 bar
Note:
The valve sleeve (4.6) of the switchover valve (4) is secured with adhesive.
Assemble/dismantle accordingly (dismantling: heat to approx. 200 C).
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 71
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
New refilling and bleeding
1
Drain screw
Plug screw
Measuring port supply pressure
Measuring port high pressure
1.
Fill the system from the oil tank
2.
Remove the drain screw (1) from the hydrostatic motor.

If oil escapes from the drain hole when filling the system, refit the drain screw.
Note: If the high-pressure circuit is opened, check that the high-pressure hoses are filled with oil.
Keep all parts scrupulously clean.
3.
Unscrew the plug screw (2) to allow air to escape.

When oil starts escaping at the plug screw, retighten the plug screw.
Now fill the oil tank up to the "MAX" mark.
4.
Screw a transparent hose to the measuring point (3), and place the other end of the hose in the tank.
Turn the pump with the starter motor until oil is discharged without air bubbles (drive lever in neutral position).
un the engine at low idling speed (approx. 2 to 3 minutes), and monitor the transparent hose to the oil tank to make
sure that the return oil is free of bubbles.
Caution:
The drive lever must be in neutral position.
Check the oil level in the oil tank.
Repeat this procedure several times.
Remove the transparent hose.
Plug the measuring point (3).
Check the oil level in the oil tank and top up if necessary.
5.
Fit a transparent hose to the high-pressure measuring port (4), and place the other end of the hose in the tank.
Set the manual gearbox to idling mode (neutral).
Start the engine and run at low idling speed.
Move the drive lever gently forward and back until bubble-free oil is discharged from the transparent hose.
Repeat this procedure several times.
Monitor the oil level constantly, and top up if necessary.
Additionally: for machines with steering axle drive (all-wheel drive)

Secure the vehicle, i.e. apply the handbrake and block the drive axle wheels with safety chocks.
Jack up the steering axle, so that the wheels can turn freely.
Select 1st gear.
Repeat the bleeding procedure described in Step 5 (high pressure).
Tools required for bleeding:

Screw nipple x GE 8 SM M14x1.5
0110 1368
Cap nut M8 S
0111 6660
Cutting ring M8 L
0111 6635
Steel pipe 8x1 St 35.4 NBK Zn approx. 50 mm long
Hose clip S 12 8 Zy
Plastic hose, transparent, approx. 1500 mm long
D 72
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Mp
Ms
D 73
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Troubleshooting
1. Loud cavitation noises on starting up the system
The flow delivered by the feed pump is not sufficient to replace the leakage. The supply pressure collapses.
Check the supply pressure with the system under load.
Lines between pump and hydrostatic motor leaky
yes
Seal the lines, top up with oil,

bleed system
yes
Replace the feed pump,

clean the filter
yes
Replace the cold-starting valve
yes
Repair or replace the hydrostatic motor
no
Delivery capacity of pump too low
no
Cold-starting valve set too low
no
Excessive oil leakage in hydrostatic motor
Linde Repair Manual

no
Excessive oil leakage in pump
yes
If leakage identified, replace or repair

the pump.
2. Insufficient system traction with normal supply pressure and without cavitation noise
Slipping (internal connection) from the high-pressure side to the low-pressure side
High-pressure valve is leaky at the cutting edge
and valve seat
yes
Tighten high-pressure valve

as specified
yes
Replace high-pressure valve
yes
Replace pump and hydrostatic motor
no
High-pressure valve is set too low
no
Running surfaces of cylinder block and
control head worn
General
You can determine whether the control head of the pump or hydrostatic motor is worn (scored) by dismantling the feed
pump from the main pump and checking the filter behind it for metal shavings.
D 74
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Troubleshooting
3. System seized
Motor piston seized
yes
Replace motor
yes
Adjust the linkage or Bowden cable

to the pump so that the end-stop
of the drive lever matches the end-stop
in the pump
4. Machine fails to reach top speed

Linkage or Bowden cable
incorrectly set
Check whether the adjusting lever
on the pump is moved to its end position
by link-rods or Bowden cable.
5. Machine does not move forward or back when the drive lever is actuated
Not enough oil in tank
yes
Top up with oil
yes
Repair or replace
yes
Replace Centaflex coupling
yes
Check the supply circuit

(feed pump, supply pressure valve,
cold-starting valve)
yes
Clean nozzles
Linde Repair Manual
no
Linkage or Bowden cable sticking
no
Centaflex coupling between engine and
pump worn.
no
No supply pressure
no
Nozzles of servo adjusting system dirty
Testing
Remove the pump cover and adjusting lever
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 75
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Troubleshooting
6. Excessive oil temperature Max. 95 C
Oil cooler fouled
yes
Clean oil cooler. Seal the leak

in the air shaft or cyclone
(prevent dirt ingress)
yes
Make sure of correct air supply
yes
Replace temperature sensor
yes
Select a lower gear
yes
Replace cooler and pipes
yes
Replace cold-starting valve
yes
yes
Replace pump and motor
yes
Set the linkage or Bowden cable so that

the drive lever and pump adjusting lever
reach the neutral position (0 position)
simultaneously
no
Insufficient cooling supply
no
Temperature sensor defective
no
Selected gear too high for working
at high load
no
Cooler back-pressure too high.
Cooler and pipes crushed.
no
no
High-pressure valve set too low
no
Excessive leakage oil from hydrostatic motor and pump
7. Neutral position unattainable

Linkage or Bowden cable incorrectly set.
D 76
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Troubleshooting
8. No supply pressure
Not enough oil in tank
yes
Top up with oil
yes
Replace the feed pump
yes
Replace the cold-starting valve
yes
Replace the supply pressure valve
yes
Repair or replace the hydrostatic motor
yes
If leakage is detected, repair or replace

the pump
yes
Repair or replace
yes
yes
Clean nozzle
yes
Repair or replace pump
no
Feed pump capacity too low
no
no
Feed pump set too low
no
Excessive leakage in hydrostatic motor
no
Excessive leakage from pump to outside
9. Machine only runs in one direction

Linkage or Bowden cable seized
no
Check high-pressure valve
(seized, fouled or faulty)
no
Nozzle of servo adjusting system clogged
no
Piston of servo adjusting system damaged
or leaky
10. In one direction, the speed fluctuates irregularly or traction is reduced
A spring in the switchover valve of the

hydrostatic motor is broken, or the valve piston
does not close fully
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
yes
Repair the switchover valve
D 77
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Drive Hydraulics
Steering axle drive
1. Description / Function
The hydrostatic drive for the steering axle supports the ground drive under difficult working conditions.
2 slow-running wheel hub motors of the radial piston type are built into the steering axle to transmit the drive torque.
These motors are switched into the hydrostatic oil circuit by an electrohydraulic valve.
An electronic traction control system (ASR) prevents single-sided wheel spin when the traction conditions are different
on the two sides ("differential lock" effect).
2. Operation
The steering axle drive is engaged by the electric switch for 4-wheel drive in the driver's cab.
The integral warning lamp in the switch comes on to indicate that 4-wheel drive is activated.
Warning:
The steering axle drive can only be engaged when the machine is stationary (hydrostatic drive lever in neutral position).
The steering axle drive can only be disengaged when the machine is stationary, since otherwise the vehicle would
suddenly accelerate.
The steering axle drive cannot be activated in 4th gear.
On very steep downhill slopes with low load on the steering axle drive, the vehicle may accelerate due to loss of traction
on the driven steering axle.
Under these conditions, it is advisable to switch off the all-wheel drive.
The driver is informed that the steering axle drive is engaged by the green warning lamp with the 4-wheel drive symbol.
Traction control
If one of the drive wheels on the steering axle starts to spin, the traction control can be activated by pressing the
foot-switch. The red warning lamp confirms to the driver that traction control is activated.
When cornering with a steering angle of more than 10, the ASR control function is automatically suspended until the
steering angle is again less than 10 C.
D 78
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Drive Hydraulics
Steering axle drive Operation
Operating instructions
Activating 4-wheel drive
1.
Start the engine, or stop the combine harvester and

leave the engine running.
2.
Make sure that the Commander Stick is in neutral

position.
3.
Select the desired gear (not 4th).
4.
Press the "4-wheel drive" push-button.
5.
The "4-wheel drive" indicator lamp comes on.
If you select 4th gear in this mode, the steering axle

drive will be switched off, and will be immediately
switched on again when you select another gear.
5
31395-1
ASR Traction Control

1.
4-wheel drive is on.

The "4-wheel drive on" indicator lamp is lit.
2.
The steering angle to the left or right is no more

than 10.
3.
Press the ASR foot-switch.
4.
The "ASR on" indicator lamp comes on.
ASR traction control only remains activated while the

foot-switch is depressed.
2
10
31396
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 79
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Drive Hydraulics
Steering axle drive Hydraulic block diagram
1
High-torque radial piston motors
Pressure maintaining valve (1.5 bar)
Leakage oil return
Double valve (ASR)
Oil reservoir
Forwards high pressure
Hydrostatic pump.
Switching valve, steering axle drive
Arrow shows direction of travel
10 High pressure when driving forwards

11 Hydrostatic motor. Type: HMF
12 Forwards high pressure
Steering axle drive Hydraulic circuit diagram

1
High-torque radial piston motors
Pressure maintaining valve (1.5 bar)
Leakage oil return
Double valve (ASR)
Oil reservoir
Forwards high pressure
Hydrostatic pump.
Switching valve, steering axle drive
Arrow shows direction of travel
10 High pressure when driving forwards

11 Hydrostatic motor. Type: HMF
12 Forwards high pressure
D 80
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 81
D
Service
Training
D 82
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Drive Hydraulics
Steering wheel drive, double valve (ASR Traction Control)
Steering wheel drive, hydraulic switching valve (without pilot control valve)
1 Tightening torque 65
+/ 6,5
Nm
+/ 6,5
Nm
+/ 2
Nm
+/ 3
Nm
+/ 1
Nm
Steering wheel drive, pressure maintaining valve (1.5 bar)

+/ 6
Nm
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 83
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Drive Hydraulics
Steering axle drive
Operating principle of the radial piston motors
Movement stages of the piston in relation to the cams:
Piston position 1
The oil is channelled under pressure to the distributor, passes through the distributor and presses against the piston.
This stage is the start of the oil supply stroke.
The pressure of the piston causes the roller to roll along the cam, thereby turning the cylinder block.
Piston position 2
The oil supply is opened to its maximum and now starts closing again as the piston continues its travel.
Piston position 3
When the piston reaches the bottom of the cam, oil supply is stopped. There is no further driving force. This point is the
bottom dead centre. Another piston must drive, so that the next cam brings the first piston back.
Piston position 4
The dead centre is overcome by the drive from another piston. The oil can return to the tank.
This stage is the start of the oil return stroke.
Piston position 5
The oil return reaches its maximum, and then the outlet port gradually starts reclosing. When the piston reaches the top
point of the cam (top dead centre), a new working cycle can start.
The direction of rotation of the motor depends on the setting of the distributor. If the direction of oil flow is reversed,
the direction of rotation is automatically changed.
Piston position 1
Piston position 2
Piston position 3
Piston position 4
Piston position 5
Steering wheel drive

Traction control (ASR)
The traction control system operates on the principle of rotary speed compensation, i.e. the speeds of the individual
wheels are measured and compared in the central electronic control unit.
If a faster speed (wheelslip, spinning) is measured on one or both wheels of the steering axle, a corresponding control
signal is sent to the control valve to reduce the oil flow to this wheel or wheels.
Double valve (proportional control valve)
Wheel drive
Speed (rotary speed tolerance range1)
Wheelslip
1)
Permissible speed difference without requiring control adjustment
D 84
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 85
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Drive Hydraulics
Steering axle drive
Installation position of sensors and
valves
Switching valve (Fig. 31329)
The steering axle drive is engaged by the solenoid valve
mounted on the left-hand side of the machine.
31329
Inductive sensor for hydrostatic pump

The inductive pickup (1) at the hand throttle prevents
engaging of the steering drive axle while driving. To
activate the steering axle drive, the commander stick
must be in neutral position.
0
V
R
1+
0,
1
,5
Nulls
tellu
ng
1+
56-072de
4th gear switch

The switch (2) on the shift linkage prevents the steering
axle drive from being activated. When 4th gear is
engaged, the steering axle drive is switched off.
D-65
Pressure maintaining valve, 1.5 bar

The pressure maintaining valve (3) under the hydraulic
fluid tank maintains the pressure (1.5 bar) in the leakage
collecting line of the radial piston motors.
31332
D 86
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Drive Hydraulics
Steering axle drive
Installation position of sensors and
valves
Speed sensor for wheel hub motors (Fig. 31333 /
Fig. 31334)
The two sensors on the rear wheels, Fig. 31333 (1) and
the wheel sensor on the front right wheel, Fig. 31334 (1),
record the number of wheel revolutions. The ASR
electronic control unit calculates the distances each wheel
has travelled, taking into account the tyre size, and
compares these distances.
31333
Front axle speed sensor (Fig. 31334)
31334
Double valve (Fig. 31335)

If the values deviate from one another, the electronic
control unit actuates the double valve (1) under the
steering drive axle in order to adjust the volumetric flow in
the two radial piston motors accordingly, thereby
preventing the rear wheels from spinning.
31335
Steering angle sensor (Fig. 31382)

The steering angle sensor (1), mounted on the right
of the driven steering axle, monitors the steering angle.
When cornering with a steering angle of more than
10 to the left or right, the ASR traction control function is
suspended until the steering angle is again reduced to
less than 10.
The "ASR on" warning lamp goes out while the ASR
control function is suspended.
31382
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D 87
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Drive Hydraulics
Steering axle drive
Setting Inspection
1. Before inspecting, make sure that the hydrostatic system,
including the steering axle drive (wheel motors) is properly bled.
Jack up the combine harvester (all 4 wheels).
Set the steered wheels to the "straight ahead" position.
2. Test the supply pressure of the BPV hydrostatic pump.
The pressure at nominal speed is 21 bar (system at operating temperature).
When the ASR traction control is activated, the pressure must not drop below 19 bar.
3. Inspecting the wheel speed sensors and steering angle sensor
Ignition on (engine off).
Engage the steering axle drive (green lamp comes on in the instrument panel).
Rotate the front wheel:
Sensor flashes ready for operation
Sensor constantly lit gap too small
Sensor unlit gap too wide
Follow the same procedure for inspecting the rear wheels.
Air gap of wheel sensors and steering angle sensor: 1
+0,5/0,3
mm
Test the steering angle sensor:

Sensor constantly lit ready for operation.
Caution: observe gap setting!
Sensor unlit sensor gap too wide
or steering angle > 10
Steering angle coverage: +10 / 10
Check the gap of the inductive sensor on the hydrostatic pump:
Gap size: 4 +/2 mm (hydrostatic drive lever in neutral position).
Check the switching function of the electrical 4th gear switch:
Engage 4th gear switch open (normally closed) no pass
4th gear not engaged switch closed pass
After successful inspection / setting, the machine can be let down again.
D 88
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
D
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Drive Hydraulics
Troubleshooting Traction control (ASR)
Problem
Possible cause
Remedy
One or both steered drive

wheels spinning very
excessively
Double valve sticking/blocked
Replace the valve if the blockage

cannot be cleared
Check the electrical connections
Electrical connections of double valve broken
One or both steered drive

wheels tending to brake
Speed sensor defective or wiring broken
Replace the sensor

Check the wiring

not working
Electrical supply
Steering angle sensor faulty or air
gap too wide
Fuse in central electronic control box defective
Programming error in central electronic
control bo
Check the supply voltage

Check the wiring
Supply pressure too low
Measure the supply pressure

(> 19 bar)
Check/replace double valve
Check the supply voltage

working with considerable
delay
Wheels "chatter"
when driving in one direction
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Double valve blocked

Supply voltage too low or too high
Control spool of double valve sticking
Restrictor hole fouled
Check/replace fuse
Replace electronic control box
Dismantle the valve

Clean the restrictor hole
Test the control spool
D 89
D
Service
Training
Notes
D 90
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
E
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Feed passage
Table of Contents
5650H
5680H
5660HTS 5690HTS
Feed passage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .02 03
Feed passage, Feed passage slip clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04 05
Feed passage, Stabilising shaft for intake chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .06 07
Feed passage clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .08 09
Anti-wrapping device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 11
Anti-wrapping device between the chain sprockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 11
Reversing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 13
Feed passage floating frame, tilt adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 15
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
E1
E
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Feed passage
The cutting table can be positioned parallel to the ground by tensioning or loosening the diagonal struts (1) with the nuts (2).
Before retightening a diagonal strut, loosen the screws (3) on the left and right and loosen the opposite diagonal strut.
1
Diagonal struts
Nuts
Screws
Floating bearing
E2
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
E
Service
Training
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
E3
E
Service
Training
E0002
E0003
E4
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
E
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Feed passage
M10 screws
Spacer washer
Lubricate the sliding surface of the bearing housing and the bearing half shell on the left and on the right side.
5650H 5690HTS
Feed passage
Feed passage slip clutch
Before each harvest season, air the slip clutch and make it slide through its complete adjustment range.
1
2
3
Metal surfaces must be degreased and coated with anti-corrosion agent "i RC 123 V" (Fuchs),
part No. 0 9097 123 400 40, before assembly (drying time: approx. 4 hours at 20 C).
Greased with Molykote BR2 0 9097 127 544 50
Slipping torque 450 Nm
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
E5
E
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Feed passage
Feed passage
1
2
3
4
5
Tightening torque: 400 Nm (M24x1.5)

Upper end-stop for rocker arm
Lower end-stop for rocker arm (for maize threshing: turn 180)
Tightening torque for grooved nut: 56 Nm
Intake chain tensioner
5650H 5690HTS
Feed passage
Stabilising shaft (2) for intake chain

For threshing maize or sunflowers, lock the stabilising shaft (2) in the upper position or remove it.
1
Limit tube
Stabilising shaft
E6
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
E
Service
Training
E0004
E0005
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
E7
E
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Feed passage
Feed passage clutch
1
Reference dimension for the servomotor stroke (60 mm) during the clutch engaging process.
Spring-loading dimension for the engaged clutch

(set by means of the load relay potentiometer: see Chapter C ).
The servomotor stroke is set by adjusting the position of the spring assembly on the threaded rod (3).
E8
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
E
Service
Training
E0008
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
E9
E
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Feed passage
Anti-wrapping device
Item
Designation
Quantity
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Anti-wrapping device left

Anti-wrapping device right
U-piece
Screw M10x80
Screw M10x85
Stud bolt M10x90
Screw M10x100
Spring washer A10
Mushroom head screw M8x30
Washer 8.4x18x2
Spring washer A8
Nut M8
Washer 10.5x30x3
Lock nut M10
1
1
2
6
6
1
1
10
4
4
4
4
4
2
5650H 5690HTS
Anti-wrapping device between the chain sprockets
(Extra attachment for linseed threshing)
1
Plastic slider
E 10
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
E
Service
Training
E0018
E0020
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
E 11
E
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Feed passage
Reversing device
Plate
Relay for magnet-operated switch
Insulators
Connector for thermal protection switch (see wiring diagram)
Plate
Self-tapping screws M10x35
Detail Z1:
5.5 mm clearance between the ring gear and the armature spindle.
This clearance is set by adjusting the plate (1) in the oblong hole.
Detail Z2:
3 mm axial clearance between the ring gear and the pinion.
This clearance is set by adjusting the position of the flywheel on the transmission shaft.
E 12
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
E
Service
Training
E0023
E0024
E0025
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
E0026
E 13
E
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Feed passage
Floating frame
Tilt adapter for cutting table (without hydraulic cutting angle adjustment)
The cutting angle of the cutting table must be adapted to the tyre size by adjusting the turnbuckles (1).
1
Turnbuckles
Sealing plate
5650H 5690HTS
Feed passage
Floating frame
Tilt adapter for cutting table with hydraulic cutting angle adjustment
When the piston rods of the hydraulic cylinders are fully retracted, the tilt adapter must not strike the feed passage.
If necessary, adjust the piston rods in the rod-end swivel joints.
The piston rod (1) must be screwed at least 24 mm into the swivel joint (2). The reference dimension between the
piston rod and the lock nut is max. 26 mm.
E 14
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
E
Service
Training
E0028
E0029
E0030-1
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
E 15
E
Service
Training
Notes
E 16
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
G
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS
Cabin, Driver's stand
Table of Contents
5650H
5680H
5660HTS 5690HTS
Drivers Stand, Control consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .02 03
Commander Control 2000, EMR-D control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04 05
Drivers Stand, Commander Stick, Control consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .06
Drivers Stand, Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .07
Cabin, Foot-operated controls, Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .08
Cabin, Operating Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09
Cabin, Operating Controls, Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 11
Cabin Operating Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Cabin, Operating Controls, Emergency exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Cabin, Rear-view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
On-board computer (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 - 17
Cabin suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 - 19
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
G1
G
Service
Training
1.1
1.2
1.3
6
33892
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
13
12
11
21
10
9
22
7
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
33899
G2
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
G
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS
Driver's stand
Control consoles
25
Instrument panel
Indicator lights, spreader plates left
1.1 Central instrument cluster
25.1 Indicator light, spreader plates half-left
1.2 Hydraulic temperature display
25.2 Indicator light, spreader plates full left
1.3 Coolant temperature gauge
26
Indicator light, differential lock, on/off
Shift lever
27
Switch, 4-wheel drive on/off
28
Indicator light, automatic fan inclination control on/off
EMR-D control panel
29
Fault indicator light, engine management (EMR)
Control console
30
Engine speed switch with three positions:
Commander Stick
lower idling
Starter switch
increased idling speed
Hazard warning lights on/off switch
nominal engine speed
Indicator light, straw chopper on/off
10
Indicator light, one-point lubrication system
11
Automatic cutting angle control
12
Grain tank extension extend/retract
13
Grain tank lamp on/off switch
14
Indicator light, 4-wheel drive on/off
15
Rocker switch, reversing system on
16
Rocker switch, side cutting table on/off
17
Width segment switch (TCS only)
18
Switch, spreader plate adjustment left/right
18.1 Key: spreader plates to right

18.2 Key: spreader plates to left
19
Indicator lights, spreader plates right
19.1 Indicator light, spreader plates half-right

19.2 Indicator light, spreader plates full right
20
Operating hour counter
21
Socket, 12 Volt
22
Cigar lighter
23
Switch, straw guide plate, short/long straw
24
Work master switch
25.1
18.1
19.1
19.2
25.2
18.2
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
35379
G3
G
Service
Training
33898
1.4
1.3
1.2
1.1
1
6
5
2
G4
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
G
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS

General
The Commander Control is operated by a membrane keypad with 14 keys.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Screen
Swing grain tank discharge pipe inboard/outboard
Threshing section on/off
Cutting table on/off
Adjust concave clearances
Adjust speeds alarm
Fan speed adjustment/Setup menu*
Threshing drum speed adjustment/Diagnosis menu*
Pick-up reel speed adjustment/Calibration menu*
* Press + and keys at the same time
For detailed information and instructions on the function and operation, see section H.
5650H 5690HTS
EMR-D control panel
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
2
3
4
5
6
Mode selector switch

Transport mode, calibration
Cutting height preselection mode
Ground pressure mode
Cutting height control mode
Overstroke button
Ground pressure preselection
Cutting height preselection
Diagnosis indicator (red LED)
Status indicator (green LED)
For detailed information and instructions on the function and operation, see section H.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
G5
G
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS
Driver's stand
Commander Stick
Control Consoles
2
1
Shift lever
Gearshift positions
33900
33901-1
All gears must only be shifted during standstill!
7
5
Commander Stick
Cutting angle adjustment forward/back
Pick up reel, raise/lower
Front attachment, tilt right down/left down
Front attachment, raise/lower
Pick-up reel forward/back
EMR-D automatic mode button
32504/1
9
10
12
11
17
15
16
14
13
33895
Air conditioner control panel
10
Rotary control knob for heater
11
Blower control knob
12
Cab cooling system control knob
13
Cab cooling system on/off switch
14
Fault indicator light, cab cooling
15
Unused
16
Digital clock
17
Loudspeaker
18
Warning beacon
19
Windscreen wiper
20
Control panel
21
Work lights:
Off
4 front work lights
All work lights
19
18
G6
22
Headlights top/bottom
23
Headlights:
Off
Parking lights
20
23
22
Driving lights
21
33894
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
G
Service
Training
2
1
5650H - 5690HTS
Driver's stand
Steering wheel
Spindle-shaped button for steering wheel adjuster
Drop-arm switch
comprising the following switch functions:
Position
33708
3
2
2
1
4
5
6
33748
Function
Press
Horn
Push forward
Indicator, right
Raise
Main beam (only at engine running)
Pull back
Indicator, left
Down
Dipped beam (only at engine running)
Fully down
Headlight flasher
Grain loss monitor
Ignition switch
with following switching functions:
4
0
0
I
II
Zero position
Operating position (the warning lights for
the battery charge and oil pressure are lit
if the engine is off).
Start
II
The servomotors of the belt clutches may
move on switching on the ignition and
starting the engine. The clutches will be
driven to the disengaged position.
33946
After switching off the engine, always

remove the key from the ignition on leaving the cab.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
The engine can and may only be started when

the Commander Stick is in the Neutral position.
G7
G
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS
Cabin
Foot-operated controls
Parking brake (Handbrake)
Cover for switch (3)
Cutting table emergency stop, red
Grain tank discharge, yellow
Pedal for braking the right wheel
Interlock plate
Pedal for braking the left wheel
Locking button
Handbrake lever
33910
32567
8
7
33911
G8
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
G
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS
Cabin
Operating Controls
Lamp for interior lighting
Switch for interior lighting
Spotlight
Spotlight switch
Flap for access to air conditioning system evaporator
Recirculating air filters
Fresh air filters
33902
33948
6
33903
33925
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
G9
G
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS
Cabin
Operating Controls
Seats
Drawer
Pocket
Crank handle
2
33909
- Height adjust of seat (seat unloaded)

- Weight adaption mechanism (seat unloaded)
Weight display
Seat forward/back
Backrest inclination adjustment
Armrest angle adjustment
Foldable armrest
Passenger seat
6
4
33907
33908
G 10
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
G
Service
Training
1
8
2
7
10
3
6
4
1
5
Aero Fit seat (air sprung) (optional)
32863-1
5
Combined weight/height adjuster (infinitely variable)

Weight setting:
Never adjust the seat while driving.
Raise or push the handle slightly until the green

marking on the weight and height display is visible.
Headrest, height adjustable and removable
Height setting:
Lumbar support
Fully raise or press the handle until the desired position is obtained (the green marking must be visible).
Backrest inclination = backrest adjustment
Weight and height display
The weight and height adjuster can only

be operated when the ignition is on.
The adjuster should not be operated continuously for longer than 1 minute.
6
Longitudinal adjustment
Safety belt fixing
Armrest, folding
Height adjustment, armrest
10 Armrest inclination
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
G 11
G
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS
Cabin
Operating Controls
1
1
Defroster/demister nozzles
Fresh air nozzles
Fresh air nozzles
Inspection window
Beverage holder
33904
2
3
33905
33906
G 12
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
G
Service
Training
A
1
5650H - 5690HTS
Cabin
Operating Controls
Emergency exit
1
Lever:
- Opening of knockout window
33912
- Emergency exit. For this purpose lift lever and
unhinge from interlock (2), push open window.
Interlock
Door handle
Knob (opening of drivers cabin door from outside)
2
33913
3
33914
33915
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
G 13
G
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS
Cabin
Rear-view mirrors
1
1
Hexagon bolts:
- Basic adjustment
Tighten the screws

- only sufficiently to hold the mirrors in position, but
allowing them to fold in without damage if they hit
33887
an obstacle
35607
Electrical adjustment of the right rear-view mirror
Switch
Press the edges of the knob to adjust the mirrors to the

desired position.
up
down
right
left
35608
The mirrors must be adjusted to the seat position and
driver's height.
G 14
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
G
Service
Training
Notes
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
G 15
G
Service
Training
4
7
30672
10
8
30768
G 16
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
G
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS
On-board computer (optional)
System description
The hectaremeter comprises the following units:
1. Control instrument:
For display and operation
2. Wheel sensor:
Transmits one impulse per wheel revolution to the control instrument to enable the
various functions to be controlled and calculated.
3. Solenoid switch:
Starts and stops the hectaremeter. If the hectaremeter is stopped, the letter "r" ("raised") is displayed on the left-hand side of the display next to the speed indicator.
The solenoid switch is located on the right-hand side of the feed channel bearing. The hectaremeter is started or stopped by raising or lowering the cutting table. The switching threshold is set to a cutting table height of about 40 50 cm
above the ground. The operation of this solenoid switch can be monitored by switching over from hectaremeter to speed
indicator.
Description of the function keys

1
Working time (hours and minutes)
Hectaremeter (partial count)
Hectaremeter (total count)
Speed (km/h)
Working width input
Wheel circumference input
Zero reset for all functions:
working time, partial area and total area

This key is also used to enter the figure 0.
Description of system connections

8
Connection to 12 V power supply
Connection for wheel sensor
10
Connection for solenoid switch
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
G 17
G
Service
Training
1, (2)
G 18
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
G
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS
Cabin suspension
1
front rubber suspension, marking 510 5 N S
rear rubber suspension, marking 510 3 N S, colour coding green - white
Marking at rubber suspension
Distance plate
Disc
Bolt M12x80
Observe upon assembly:

Do not interchange front and rear rubber suspensions, observe marking.
Observe mounting position of rubber suspensions.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
G 19
G
Service
Training
Notes
G 20
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Electrical System
Table of contents
5650H
5680H
5660HTS 5690HTS
General, Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .03
Index of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04
Cable colours and colour coding for connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .05
Electrical system, wiring diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .06 09
System overview of electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 11
Control console, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 13
Operating elements in cabin roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 13
Control console, switches and lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 15
Control elements Commander Control 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 15
Overview wiring diagram electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 17
Fuse assignment in control cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 19
Relay assignment in control cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 21
Funktion Diode arrays D1, D2, D3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 23
Cable harnesses, connector assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 27
Multiple contact strips in control cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 43
Multiple contact strips under the control console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 45
Connector plug configuration foot switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 45
Distributing connector engine frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 49
Pin configuration actuator connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Schematic diagram CAN bus Commander Control 2000 with combined

instrument gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 53
Schematic diagram CAN bus Commander Control 2000 with TERIS/TCS . . . . . . . . . . .54 55
Schematic diagram electrical deflector adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 57
Schematic diagram electrical straw guide plate adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 59
Schematic diagram electrical sieve adjustment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 61
Wiring diagram CAN bus system with combined instrument gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 63
Wiring diagram CAN bus system with Commander Control und TERIS/TCS . . . . . . . . .64 65
Function and programming of CAN modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 73
Connector pin assignment at job computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 79
Connector pin assignment CAN modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 81
Combined instrument gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 83
Combined instrument gauge and Commander Control 2000, overview monitoring

and control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 85
Diagram inputs/outputs Commander Control 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 87
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H1
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Electrical System
Table of contents
5650H
5680H
5660HTS 5690HTS
Connector pin assignment A30, Commander Control 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 89
Functional monitoring by the Commander Control 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 91
Switches and sensors for monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 95
Functional description inductive sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 97
Sensors, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 101
Multifunction lever, gear rack device/sensor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 103
Multifunction lever, connector pin assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 105
A13 logic module, connector pin assignment, function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 107
Control unit EEC, gas control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 109
Electronic cutting table control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 119
Control unit EMR-D, connector pin assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Throughput Monitor (Grain Loss Monitor) / On-board Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Appendix A: Wiring diagrams

Appendix B: Commander Control 2000, Operating Instructions
Appendix C: Commander Control 2000, Setup and Diagnosis
H2
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
5650H 5690HTS
Electrical System
General
Safety instructions
1.
When working on the electrical system, always

disconnect the cable from the negative terminal of the
battery.
2.
Always observe the correct connection procedure

first connect the positive terminal, then the negative.
3.
Beware of battery gases they are highly explosive!

Avoid generating any sparks or naked flame near the
battery!
4.
Only use original fuses. The electrical system will be

destroyed if fuses with too high ratings are used!
5.
Disconnect the cable from the generator and battery

when carrying out electric welding work on the
combine harvester!
6.
Take care when handling battery acid (toxic and

corrosive)!
7.
Only operate the starter for a limited time, since

otherwise the winding will overheat. Allow the starter
engine to cool!
8.
Do not place any tools on the battery!
A0009
Remark
The electrical system is described with full equipment,
which means that the combine harvester maintained by
you may not be equipped with particular components (e.g.
printer, PC keyboard, etc.), depending on the respective
equipment.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H3
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Index of Abbreviations
AHS
CCP
Clutch Control Power Unit (shift gear control device)
EEC
Engine control unit (electronic engine control)
EMR-D Electronic control of cutting mechanism

GPS
Global Positioning System
KT
Grain tank
KTS
Grain tank unloading auger
MF
Multifunction control lever (Commander Stick)
MV
Solenoid valve
MW
Cutting mechanism
TS
Turbo-separator
TCS
Terminal Control System (job computer)
SMPS
Constant voltage power supply 5V/12V
H4
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Cable colours and colour coding for connectors
Basic colours applied for cables:
Colour codes for connectors
Abbreviation
Colour
Abbreviation Colour
bl
blue
DBL
dark blue
br
brown
DBR
dark brown
ge
yellow
DGR
dark grey
gn
green
DGN
dark green
gr
grey
DRT
dark red
nat
nature
ELB
ivory
or
orange
GEL
yellow
pk
pink
HBL
light blue
rs
pink
HBR
light brown
rt
red
HGN
light green
sw
black
HGR
light grey
tr
transparent
HRT
light red
vi
violet
NAT
nature
ws
white
OR
SW
WS
orange
black
white
Fundamentally, the basic colour is always indicated first, followed by the indication colours. Therefore, rt/ws/bl is a cable
with red as basic colour and white/blue as indication colours.
Markings in the circuit diagram
A30.5
pin number
device number
X512.14
pin number
connector X512
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H5
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Electrical System
Wiring diagram
Layout of the wiring diagrams
The wiring diagrams are clearly broken down and their structure is easy to understand at a glance. The positive lines are
shown at the top edge:
30 = Permanent positive
15 = Switched positive
The negative lines are shown at the bottom:
31 = Vehicle earth
These three lines extend along the full length of the wiring diagram and are marked with 30, 15 and 31.
The individual circuits are all located between positive and negative and can therefore be clearly and comprehensibly
represented in "current paths" next to one another.
Each circuit contains:
Wire colour and cross-section,

Colour and number of the plug-in connector,
Serial number and current rating of the fuse.
The "inner life" of the individual components is also shown for better comprehension. Please note that, in conformity with
the DIN standard, all switches and relays have been drawn in the rest position, i.e. without the effect of voltage, pressure
or temperature etc.. You therefore have to imagine the working position when voltage, pressure or temperature is applied.
All components are identified by a circle containing a number (item number). You can then find the corresponding part
name in the parts list. In the course of the wiring diagram, the same components may have different numbers when used
in different sections.
Cable cross-sections used in the combine harvester:
Starter motor cable
Main cables
Load cables:
50 mm2 / 70 mm2
4 mm2 / 6 mm2
4 mm2 / 2.5 mm2 / 1.5 mm2 / 1 mm2 / 0.75 mm2.
Basic cable colours used:

Colour:
Abbreviation:
Use:
red
black
brown
grey
white
yellow
blue
green
mauve
orange
natural
rd
bk
br
gr
wt
yl
bu
gn
mv
or
nat
B + /30
15
31
58
56a
56b
monitoring
As a rule, the basic colour is specified first, followed by the identification colours. Therefore "rd/wt/bu" designates a cable
with the basic colour red and with white/blue as identification colours.
H6
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
Electrical System
Wiring diagram
Terminal Designations
Terminal
Designation
30
31
31b
30a
31a
50
50a
15
19
17
61
D+
D
DF
54
54f
56
56a
56b
58
58L
58R
53a
53
31b
52
54g
49
49a
C
C2
L
R
LB
RB
54f
86
85
88
88a
87
87a
87
87a
88a
Battery + (unswitched positive)

Battery (earth)
Switched negative to earth
Battery switchover relay, battery II input
Battery switchover relay, battery II return
Starter motor control (direct)
Starter motor control (indirect)
Switched positive
Preheating (upstream resistor input)
Preheating when starting (bridging over the resistor)
Battery charge warning lamp (D+)
Dynamo +
Dynamo
Dynamo field
Brake light
Output from brake light switch to dual circuit flasher switch
Supply cable to headlight dipper switch
Main beam, main beam indicator
Dipped beam
Parking light, sidelights, contour lights and instrument panel lamps
Rear light, left, number plate light
Rear light, right, number plate light
Windscreen wiper +
Windscreen wiper actuation (switched positive)
Switched negative for final switch-off
Tyre monitor or other signal from the trailer
Magnetventil fr Dauerbremse im Anhnger
Flasher + (input)
Flasher pulse (output)
Flasher warning light for tractor vehicle
Flasher warning light for trailer
Turn signal lights, left
Turn signal lights, right
Dual-circuit flasher switch, left
Dual-circuit flasher switch, right
Input from brake light switch (dual circuit system)
Relay coil (+)
Relay coil ()
Relay input contact for make relay
Relay output contact for make relay
Relay input contact for break relay
Relay output contact for break relay
Relay input contact for change-over relay
Relay output contact for break side
Relay output contact for make side
The terminal designations are not cable designations and are therefore not marked on the cables.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H7
H
Service
Training
Electrical System
Wiring diagram
Key to Wiring Diagram
Permanent positive
from the battery, always energised
Switched positive
behind the battery, switched by the ignition switch
From the alternator
only energised when the engine is running
Fuse
specifying the fuse strip (GN = green) and
number (3, input), C: output to load,
current rating (7.5 A)
Cable colour
Connector
with receptacle assignments and connector colour
Component positioning
Description and designation in the key
Cross-reference
To the section (module/group) to which the cable leads
Terminal designation
on the component
Switch symbol
here diode
Vehicle earth
Section designation (group)
for delimiting the section in the wiring diagram
H8
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
Electrical System
Terminal designations of the 8-pin
connectors
Coloured connectors with anti-torsion protection are used.
The position of the terminals is shown in the sketch
below. The simplified diagram shows which pins the cable
cores are connected to at the inlet and outlet of the
connector.
Example:
If a cable core enters the connector at pin 8, the cable
core on the other side leaves from pin 5.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H9
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
System Overview of Electrical System
The electrical system consists of the following main components:
Connector X140 X147, AMP connector grain loss sensory system
A1, A2 electronic engine controller EEC
Control cabinet
A4 control unit EMR-D
A30 Commander Control 2000
A24 control unit balance II
A31 or A22, LH 1000 area meter or printer (with TERIS/TCS)
Control unit air condition/heating/ventilation
A32 grain loss monitor LH 865 or display unit A21 (with TERIS/TCS)
9.1
Distribution box grain loss sensory system
10
B40 or A17, combined instrument gauge or terminal (with TERIS/TCS)
11
Control console
12
A19 control unit balance II
13
G1 battery, S1 battery main switch
14
K101 hazard flasher relay
15
A8 powershift device for actuators of belt couplings
16
A10 control unit all-wheel drive (optional)
17
Fuses
18
Relays
18.1 Diode array D1, D2, D3

19
A3 control unit EMR-D
20
A11 job computer (TERIS/TCS)
21
A12 control unit autocontrol
22
A13 logic module: starter blocking/reversing horn/all-wheel drive/differential lock
23
A25 CAN module deflector adjustment
24
A26 CAN module straw guide plate adjustment
25
A16 inclinometer (fan control TERIS/TCS)
26
A27 CAN module sieve adjustment
27
A14 constant voltage power supply 5V, 12V (only TERIS/TCS) for:
Observe the proper mounting position!
Job computer
Inclinometer
Field data printer
PC keyboard
28 Insulated ground connector strip for potentiometer ground of servo motors for chopper deflectors, chopper flap and
sieve adjustment.
H 10
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
9
10
11
34939-2
13
9.1
12
28
14
MED_ACAD*11/24/10 11:01 AM Rev:12.23
15
16
23
24
25
26
27
SOLARI 1.she
18.1
22
21
20
19
H001
17
H002
18
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 11
H
Service
Training
1.2
1.1
1.3
6
33892
6
33923
H 12
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Control console, overview
Standard design
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
2
3
4
5
6
Instrument panel
Combined Instrument Gauge
Indication hydraulic system temperature
Indication coolant temperature
Gear-shift lever
EMR-D operating device
Control console
Commander stick
TERIS/TCS design
7
8
TERIS/TCS terminal (optional)

Keyboard (only TCS)
Operating elements in cabin roof

Control panel air condition
10
13
14
12
15
11
Control button for heating (type 5680/5690 only)
Rotary switch for ventilation
10
Control button for cooling system
11
Switch cooling system on/off
12
Indicator light cooling system malfunction
13
Empty field
14
digital clock
15
Loudspeaker
33895
Control panel lighting
17
16
18
16
Revolving lights
17
Windscreen wipers
18
Control panel
19
Work light:
off
4 front projectors
all projectors
21
20
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
19
20
Projectors on top/ at the bottom
21
Projector:
off
parking light
33894
dipped beam
H 13
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Control console, switches and lamps
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Switch hazard warning signal flasher on/off
Indicator light straw guide plate in position chopper operation
Indicator light central lubrication system
Indicator light Automatic cutting angle control
Retract/extend grain tank extension
Switch grain tank illumination on/off
Indicator light all-wheel drive on/off
Rocker button reversing on
Switch side cutter bar on/off
Partial width activation (only TCS/TERIS)
Switch deflector adjustment left right
Indicator lights deflector position
Operating-hours counter
Plug-socket 12 Volt
Cigarette lighter
Switch straw guide plate, chopping or long straw shedding
not applicable
Indicator light slip control active
Switch all-wheel drive on/off
Indicator light automatic slope blower control on/off (only TCS/TERIS)
Indicator light engine controller (EEC) malfunction (only 5680/90)
Switch engine speed (only 5680/90) with three positions:
lower idle speed
increased idle speed
nominal speed
Buzzer
Control elements Commander Control 2000

The Commander Control 2000 is operated by means of a touch key board with 14 keys.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Display
Retract/extend grain tank tube
Threshing mechanism on/off (chopper)
Cutting mechanism on/off
Menu key for adjustment of concave clearance and TS clearance resp. concave quick opening
Menu key for adjustment of speed warning thresholds
Special function of menu key:
Hold key pressed down while turning start switch into pos. I. When buzzer resounds, belt couplings can be
activated while the engine is stopped. Working master switch (18) must be switched on.
Adjustment of blower speed
setup menu*
Adjustment of threshing drum speed
diagnosis menu*
Adjustment of reel speed resp. activation of automatic speed control*
calibration menu*
* Plus and minus key pressed simultaneously (see instructions)
H 14
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
10
11
12
13
14
7
6
15
5
4
3
16
2
25
1
24
23
22
21
13
20
18
17
33898
33898
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 15
H
Service
Training
II
III
H 16
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Overview wiring diagram electrical system
A1
A2
A3
A8
A13
A19
A23
A30
B7
B40
B45
B46
B48
F..
G3
K0
K11
K12
K13
K22
K48
K34
K51
K55
K98
M1
M19
S2
S5
S40
S42
S43
S44
S49
S55
S66
S67
Y11, Y12
Control unit EEC (electronic controller Diesel engine)

Gas control unit for control unit EEC (A1)
Control unit EMR-D
Clutch control power unit couplings CCP II
Logic module
Control unit Balance II
Distribution box grain loss sensory system (supply from F44 with TERIS/TCS)
Buzzer
sensor multifunction handle neutral (start interlock)
sensor multifunction handle reverse (reversing horn)
Reverse gear horn
Fuses
Generator
70 Relay for terminal 15
Relay release threshing mechanism on, terminal 15b
Relay release EMR automatic system
Relay multifunction handle release reel (relay was dropped as of year of construction 2001)
Relay starter
Relay power supply EEC
Relay multifunction handle release channel
Relay rape ripping knife
Relay multifunction handle release EMR
Relay reversing motor (attached at feed passage)
Starter
Reversing motor
Switch engine speed
Switch rape ripping knife
Switch reversing device
Switch grain tank interior light
Switch deflector adjustment, chopper
Hand break switch
Switch straw guide plate adjustment
Switch grain tank extension lift/lower
Solenoid valves cutting angle
Relay sets:
K8, K29 Extend/retract grain tank extension
K7, K28, K49, K70
Relay reel hydraulics
K50, K71 Swing out/swing in grain tank tube
K59, K80 Relay cutting angle up/down
Must not be inserted with balance model!
Speed adjustment KX, KY:

K14, K35 Relay set reel variator
K15, K36 Relay set blower variator
K56, K77 Relay set threshing drum variator
Concave clearances KV, KW:
K18, K39 Relay set concave front
K19, K40 Relay set turbo separator up/down
K60, K81 Relay set concave rear
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 17
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Fuse assignment in control cabinet
Left row
Middle row
Right row
revolving lights
right
grain tank tube
flasher system
cooling system, heating

blower
control cooling syst.,
heating
treshing drum variator
controls
AHS term. 15 a
controls
threshing on term. 15b
cabin roof
H 18
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
MED_ACAD*11/24/10 11:01 AM Rev:12.23
SOLARI 1.she
56-000
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 19
H
Service
Training
MED_ACAD*11/24/10 11:01 AM Rev:12.23
SOLARI 1.she
D1-D3
K64
K0
K1
K73
K74
K10
K11
K83
K20
56-000
H 20
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Relay assignment in control cabinet
S55
display steering column
Multifunction handle
release reel
chopper flap
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 21
H
Service
Training
D+
K44, Kl.2
K45, Kl.2
K65, Kl.2
K66, Kl.2
K2, Kl.2
K25, Kl.2
D1
87
30
86
87a
K64, Kl.2
85
K43, Kl.2
K67
D2
87
30
K75, Kl.2
86
87a
85
D3
87
30
Comm.Control PIN 48 X509.1
86
P
87a
X503.4
85
S55
K76, Kl.2
Handbremschalter
hand brake switch
H57
86
87a
30
87
85
56-073
H 22
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Function diode arrays D1, D2, D3
D1
D2
D3
Connection to ground of the relays for lighting via relay K67 (ground at D+)
Connection to ground of relay K75 (power supply Balance) via relay K67
Connection to ground via hand brake switch S55 for:
Relay K76 (Balance)
Hand brake switch monitoring of Commander Control
Indicator light hand brake H57 with TERIS/TCS
K67 Ground at D+
S55 Switch hand brake
Function:
Prevention of return current between the relays which are connected in series with K67 or with the hand brake switch.
Current load max. 1A per diode.
1
2
View on male connectors, position of terminals.

Backside view, marking with yellow label.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 23
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Cable harnesses, plug-in connections between
cabin and control cabinet
control cabinet and tail
1
1.1
Control console
Connector inside of control console:
- X170, X171 for combined instrument gauge
- connector for terminal TERIS/TCS
- X308 for keyboard
- X514 programming plug for Commander Control 2000
2
2.1
Multifunction handle
sensors for start interlock and reverse gear horn
Electric system steering column
Foot switch grain tank clutch
Foot switch all-wheel slip control
Switch hand brake
Drivers cabin
8.1
9
Distributing connector in cabin roof right

Control cabinet
9.1
Multiple contact strip, 8-pole connector below in control cabinet
9.2
Multiple contact strip, 21-pole connector in control cabinet
10
Distribution box grain loss sensory system
11
Electronic control system engine controller
12
Distributing connector engine frame
13
Ground - collecting terminal
H 24
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
8.1
X135
X136
X134
X115
X182
1.1
1
8
6
2.1
7
X1
X1 90
91
92
ge
X515
X190
X191
X192
X5
15
X1
hebl
hegn
hert
9
E
40
21
20
9.2
9.1
D
X513
X512
X510
X509
X508
X507
X511
X506
X505
X504
X503
B
A
C
X502
X501
11
EEC
10
F
X146
X145
X144
X147
X143
X142
12
G
13
X141
X140
56-018
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 25
H
Service
Training
X135
X136
X134
X115
X182
X515
X190
X191
X192
X5
X1
X1 90
91
92
15
X1
ge
hebl
hegn
hert
E
40
21
20
X513
X512
X510
X509
X508
X507
X511
X506
X505
X504
X503
B
A
C
X502
X501
EEC
X146
X145
X144
X147
X143
X142
X141
X140
56-018
H 26
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Cable harnesses, plug-in connections between
cabin and control cabinet
control cabinet and tail
21-pole connector in control cabinet
X504
X505
X506
X512
Connector in control console

switches, indicator lights in control console
control unit cutting mechanism control
X190
X191
X192
X515
multifunction handle
sensor start interlock
sensor reverse gear horn
foot switch grain tank clutch
foot switch cutting mechanism stop
footswitch all-wheel
hand brake switch
X507
X508
X509
X510
X511
Commander-Control
X514 programming plug
X170 ZI I ws
X171 ZI II sw
monitor TERIS/TCS
X308 keyboard
X503
steering column
Connectors in cabin roof
X501
X502
X513
X115 dark brown sensor brightness, power supply data printer

X182 dark green
LH 1000
switch illumination
control unit balance
data line for printer
8-pole connectors below at control cabinet

X34 yellow
X134 yellow, term. 30 cabin roof, air condition

X135 light green, working lights
X14 light red
X136 ivory, dipped beam projector at the top

ground cabin roof, interior light, revolving light
Connectors in engine compartment

AMP connectors 5-pole for supply distribution box grain loss sensory system
X140-X147
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Power supply for consumers and sensors at engine and combine

harvester tail
Junction box grain loss sensor
H 27
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Multiple contact strips in control cabinet
Upper multiple contact strip (A), 21-pole connector
front
Note: Push the unlock pin (2) in order to separate the connector housing. Pull the brown interlocking strip (1) out of the
connector housing and unlock the snap-in pin of the contacts in order to remove the plug contacts.
Connector 21-pole, view from cable side connector housing (fixed in control cabinet)
A1
Connector 21-pole, view from cable side female connector housing (plugged in from below)
A2
2
H 28
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
MED_ACAD*11/24/10 11:01 AM Rev:12.23
SOLARI 1.she
A1
A2
56-003
A1
1
A2
2
1,19
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 29
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Pin Assignment Connector X501 - X505
A1
56-020
H20
H 30
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
A1
H20
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 31
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
A1
56-020
H20
Note: At Connector X513 the colours of the lines change

from A1 to A2.
H 32
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
Notes
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 33
H
Service
Training
MED_ACAD*11/24/10 11:01 AM Rev:12.23
SOLARI 1.she
1
20
B
C
21
40
56-003
Only 5650 - 5690 with

combined instrument gauge:
Resistor 68 Ohm at
connector X1, pin 8 (input
temperature transducer
engine oil).
H 34
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
colour
32
33
34
30
31
function allocation
35
X20
GE
SW
NAT
GE
X40
SW
X19
NAT
20
X39
ELB
19
X18
X17
X13
X12
X16
X11
X14
X25
HBL HRT DBR
DRT DGN
OR
HBR HGN
38
39 40
36
37
B
connector connector
no.
design
1
X1
HRT HGN HBR
18
X38
29
HBL
17
X37
28
OR
16
X36
27
HGN DBL
15
X34
26
14
X33
25
24
13
X32
SW
12
X35
GE
11
X31
HGN
X30
X28
OR
X29
X27
HBL DRT HGR NAT DGR ELB
NAT DGR
23
10
X10
X9
X8
X7
X6
X15
X23
22
X26
X4
SW
X24
X3
DGN
HGR DBL
21
X2
GE
WS
X22
front
X1
X21
X5
5650H 5690HTS
Lower multistrip connector, rear (B) and front (C), pneutron connector
connector connector
no.
design
21
X21
colour
HGR
function allocation
Speed sensor elevator; rear outline marker
lamp; switch straw chamber; lighting sieve
pan, - tail
Grain loss sensors; wheel sensor LH 1000;
CAN bus
WS
Engine: Terminal W, D+; Starter;

sensors motor monitoring
Engine: Temperature transmitter hydraulic
oil, switch cooling fan, air filter
22
X22
DBL
Drum variator, sensor straw walker speed,

grain tank tube; switch air filter; cooling
compressor; rear working light
Flasher lamps; sensor, chopper flap,
chopper speed, fuel tank; reverse gear horn;
sensors returns elevator
Servo-motor chopper flap; key switch lower
sieve open - close
23
X23
NAT
not allocated
24
X24
DGR
not allocated
25
X26
OR
X2
GE
X3
DGN
X4
SW
X5
HBL
X6
DRT
EMR: Solenoid valve accumulator; pressure

sensor; transmitter feed passage
26
X15
HGN
X7
HGR
Cutting mechanism: reel variator;

potentiometer for touching skids
27
X27
GE
Cutting mechanism: Speed sensor reel;

solenoid valve colza cutter left
X8
NAT
Engine control EEC; CAN -BUS SAEJ1939
28
X28
SW
Electric system balance: Connection to EMR
X9
DGR
Solenoid valves working hydraulics
29
X29
HBL
Electric system balance
10
X10
ELB
Solenoid valves working hydraulics
30
X30
HRT
11
X25
HGN
EMR: Regulating valve cutting mechanism,

solenoid valve Autocontrol
31
X31
DBR
12
X11
DBL
Grain tank: Interior light, sensors, working

light
32
X35
ELB
Servo-motors concave open - close
13
X12
OR
Front lighting: flasher light, position lights
33
X32
NAT
Cabin: bugle, flasher-, position lights,

projectors, brake light switch
14
X17
HBL
Speed sensors: Threshing drum, blower,

sieve pan, ground sensors feed passage
34
X33
SW
Central lubrication; auxiliary heating
15
X14
HRT
Cabin roof - lighting
35
X34
GE
Cabin roof: Cooling system, wind screen

wipers, working lights
16
X16
HGN
Belt clutches
36
X36
DRT
Turbo separator: Servo-motor, speed sensor
17
X13
HBR
Adjustment rear-view mirror
37
X37
DGN
18
X18
SW
not allocated
38
X38
OR
Feed passage: sensor LH 1000, speed

sensor, relay K98; servo-motor wind variator;
inductive sensor gear-shift mechanism
Allwheel electric system
19
X19
NAT
not allocated
39
X39
HBR
Allwheel steering angle sensor
20
X20
GE
not allocated
40
X40
HGN
Allwheel speed sensor, -solenoid valve
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Servo-motor straw spreader; key switch

upper sieve open - close
Servo-motor upper-, lower sieve
H 35
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Lower rear multiple contact strip (B)
pin configuration connector 1 to 10

Inside of control cabinet
push-button
push-button
left rear and trailer
br ,
bl
switch
coolant level _
switch
coolant level +
5670: cylinderhead temperature
H 36
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training

Outside of control cabinet
5650H 5690HTS
extend/retract grain tank tube
push-button
push-button
reverse gear horn

left rear and trailer
sw
br
switch
coolant level _
switch
coolant level +
5670: cylinderhead temperature
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 37
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
H 38

307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training

307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
5650H 5690HTS
H 39
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Lower front multiple contact strip (C)
H 40

push-button switch
push-button switch
push-button switch
push-button switch
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training

push-button switch
5650H 5690HTS
push-button switch
supply
push-button switch
push-button switch
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 41
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS

gn-ge 1,0
to push-button switch
H 42
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training

5650H 5690HTS
sw-ge 2,5
to push-button switch
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 43
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Multiple contact strip under the control console
Connector plug configuration X190, X191, X192
multi-function handle
reverse gear sensor
neutral position sensor
Control cabinet
56-029
Connector plug configuration X515

Foot switch
pin configuration X515, from switches
GE
X515
bl
1 sw/rt
switch S55
hand brake
foot switch S28

foot switch S23
all-wheel anti-slip control grain tank clutch
5 br
sw
vio/ge
or/gn
foot switch S22

cutting mechanism stop
ground
ground
pin configuration X515, to control cabinet

or/gn
bl
sw/rt
GE
X515
foot switch S22

cutting mechanism stop
foot switch S23

grain tank clutch
switch S55
foot switch S28
all-wheel anti-slip control hand brake
br
ground
vio/ge
br
ground
56-070
H 44
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
MED_ACAD*11/24/10 11:01 AM Rev:12.23
SOLARI 1.she
X192 HRT
X191 HGN
X190 HBL
X515 GE
H003
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 45
H
Service
Training
34939-2
MED_ACAD*11/24/10 11:01 AM Rev:12.23
SOLARI 1.she
56-114
A
B
56-018-1
H 46
56-062
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Distributing connector engine frame
A Pneutron connector
Connector no. Connector id.
1
X140
Colour
WS
function allocation
Rear flasher light, tail- /brake lights
Returns elevator
X141
GE
Flasher, tail / brake lights trailer
X142
SW
Cooling system, Straw chamber warning flap,
X143
HRT
sensors grain tank tube / straw guide plate,
X147
HBR
push-button switch sieve operation
X144
HGN
sieve actuators
X145
OR
potentiometer / deflector drive, chopper
X146
HBL
potentiometer / straw guide plate drive
Speed sensor chopper, Lighting

hydraulic oil temperature sensor, Lighting sieve pan
B AMP grain loss sensory system connector

PIN
colour
rt
grain loss sensor sieve pan
function allocation
Cable harness junction box

gn/ge
ge
wheel sensor for LH 865 and LH 1000
sw 4
bl
grain loss sensor straw walker
sw 3
ws
power supply grain loss sensory system
sw 2
br
ground grain loss sensors
sw 1
returns sensor with TERIS/TCS
C trailer plug socket

PIN
colour
function allocation
1/L
sw/ws
flasher light left
2/54g
not used
3/31
br
ground
4/R
sw/gn
5/58R
gr/rt
tail light right
6/54
sw/rt
brake lights left/right
7/58L
gr/sw
tail light left
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
flasher light right
H 47
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
multiple contact strip at engine frame
engine cable harness side (coming from control cabinet)
left rear
H 48
push-button switch
push-button switch
push-button switch
push-button switch
right rear
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
multiple contact strip at engineframe
hood cable harness side
push-button
push-button
push-button
push-button
right rear
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
left rear
H 49
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
pin configuration actuator connectors
H 50
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
Notes
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 51
H
Service
Training
56-030
H 52
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Schematic diagram CAN bus Commander Control 2000 with combined instrument gauge
A25
CAN module deflector adjustment
A26
CAN module straw guide plate adjustment
A30
B40
combined instrument gauge
K16
relay chopping
K17
relay deflectors left
K37
relay long straw
K38
relay deflectors right
M12 deflector servo-motor

M13 straw guide plate servo-motor
1
120 load resistor: terminal connector (pin 7, 8) in control console
120 load resistor: connector X22 (pin 5, 6) at outside of control cabinet
The Commander Control 2000 is responsible for the following functions:

Operation
Monitoring (speeds)
Display (Commander Control 2000 and combined instrument gauge)
The display functions of the combined instrument gauge are controlled by the Commander Control 2000.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 53
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Schematic diagram CAN bus Commander Control 2000 with TERIS/TCS
A11
TCS job computer
A14
stabilized power supply unit (SMPS)
A15
keyboard
A16
inclinometer (fan control TERIS/TCS)
A17
terminal with load resistor 120 Ohm
A21
display unit steering column
A22
printer
A25
CAN module deflectors
A26
CAN module straw guide plate
A27
CAN module sieve adjustment
A30
X22
load resistor 120 in connector X22, outside of control cabinet
Observe proper mounting position!
connector pin assignment inclinometer A16

connection
cable colour
to SMPS
cable colour at
inclinometer
PIN
from A14.6
rt/sw
br
to job computer connector B.17

from A 14.2
signification
inclinometer power supply 5V
bl
bl
inclinometer signal
br/ws
sw
inclinometer ground
connector pin assignment SMPS A14 (stabilized power supply unit)

colour
PIN
signification
br/ws
ground stabilized for printer
br/ws
ground stabilized for PC-keyboard and inclinometer
br/ws
ground stabilized for job computer connector A.12
br
ground SMPS
rt/gr
5 V stabilized printer
rt/sw
power supply 5V for PC-keyboard and inclinometer
rt/ws
12 V stabilized job computer connector A.11
sw
power supply SMPS
pin configuration A14
fuse 10 AP
H 54
LEDs for output

Stabilised voltage
1 x 12 V, 2 x 5 V
LED for supply 12 V
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
A25
56-031
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 55
H
Service
Training
switch operation
deflectors left
CAN module
deflectors
A25
relay
K17
deflectors left
M12
light deflectors
left outside
light deflectors
left centre
actuator
deflectors with
potentiometer
light deflectors
right centre
relay
K38
deflectors right
light deflectors
right outside
switch operation
deflectors right
56-033
H 56
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Schematic diagram electrical deflector adjustment chopper
A25
A30
K17
relay deflectors left
K38
relay deflectors right
M12 actuator deflectors with potentiometer
pin configuration:
DI
DO
AI
AO
digital IN
digital OUT
analog IN
analog OUT
designation:
D O / 1 ( 11 )
pin no.
channel
digital OUT
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 57
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Schematic diagram electrical straw guide plate adjustment
A26
CAN module straw guide plate
A30
K16
relay chopping
K37
relay long straw
M13
actuator
pin configuration:
DI
DO
AI
AO
digital IN
digital OUT
analog IN
analog OUT
designation:
D O / 1 ( 11 )
pin no.
channel
digital OUT
H 58
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
operation of deflector
switch (S66) in position
"chopping
CAN Module
deflector
relay
K16
chopping
actuator M13
deflector
with
potentiometer
operation of deflector switch

(S66) in position "long
straw deposit
relay
K37
long straw
56-034
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 59
H
Service
Training
keyswitch upper sieve

open
S70
S70
CAN
module
CAN-Modul
sieve
adjustment
Siebverstellung
relay upper sieve

open
K41
K41
A27
A27
keyswitch upper sieve
close S69
S69
keyswitch lower sieve

open
S72
S72
keyswitch lower sieve

close
S71
S71
actuator
upper sieve with
potentiometer
M17
M17
relay upper sieve

close
K20
K20
relay lower sieve

open
K83
K83
actuator
lower sieve with
potentiometer
M18
M18
relay lower sieve

close K62
K62
56-032
H 60
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Schematic diagram electrical sieve adjustment control
A27
A30
K20
relay upper sieve close
K41
relay upper sieve open
K62
relay lower sieve close
K83
relay lower sieve open
M17 actuator upper sieve with potentiometer

M18 actuator lower sieve with potentiometer
S69
key switch upper sieve close (behind at the toolbox)
S70
key switch upper sieve open (behind at the toolbox)
S71
key switch lower sieve close (behind at the toolbox)
S72
key switch lower sieve open (behind at the toolbox)
pin configuration:
DI
DO
AI
AO
digital IN
digital OUT
analog IN
analog OUT
designation:
D O / 1 ( 11 )
pin no.
channel
digital OUT
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 61
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Wiring diagram CAN bus system Com. Contr. with combined instrument gauge
A25
UNIT 19
A26
UNIT 19
A27
UNIT 19
A30
UNIT 18
Terminating resistor 120 at terminal connector in the control console
Terminating resistor 120 at connector X22 control cabinet outside
Resistance CAN bus line with 2 terminating resistors 120 Ohm

CAN bus participant
Without A30, without CAN-Module
Measuring value
60 Ohm
With A30, without CAN modules
44 Ohm
With A30 and 1 CAN module
35 Ohm
With A30 and 2 CAN modules
29 Ohm
Internal resistance of CAN bus participants

Com. Control A30, pin 94 - 95
163 Ohm
CAN module, pin 4 - 12
H 62
163 Ohm
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
95
94
56-026
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 63
95
94
Service
Training
56-027
H 64
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Wiring diagram CAN bus system with Commander Control 2000 and TERIS/TCS
A11
job computer
UNIT 8-13
A17
terminal
UNIT 0-3
A21
throughput display steering column
UNIT 26
A25
UNIT 19
A26
UNIT 19
A27
UNIT 19
A30
UNIT 18
Terminating resistor 120 at connector X22 control cabinet outside
Resistance CAN bus line with 1 terminating resistor 120 Ohm

CAN bus participant
Measuring value
Without A17, without A30, without CAN modules
120 Ohm
With A17, without A30, without CAN modules
60 Ohm
With A17, A30, without CAN modules
44 Ohm
With A17, A30 and 1 CAN module
35 Ohm
With A17, A30 and 2 CAN modules
29 Ohm
With A17, A30 and 3 CAN modules
24 Ohm
Internal resitance of CAN-Bus partcipans

Terminal A17, pin 7 - 8
120 Ohm
Com. Control A30, pin 94 - 95
163 Ohm
CAN module, pin 4 - 12
163 Ohm
The internal resistance of job computer A11 and display unit A21
is in the kOhm range.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 65
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Function and programming of CAN modules
The CAN modules (part number: 16057402) for controlling of the deflectors, the straw guide plate and the sieves serve
for supporting of the Commander Control 2000. The modules are working in remote control mode, i.e. they cannot
perform any controlling actions without the master computer, which in this case means without the Commander Control
2000. The Software of the modules is only able to execute commands which are transmitted via CAN bus.
Example
The illustration opposite shows a flow chart as an example. The Commander Control 2000 (A30) is supposed to further
open the upper sieve (open 5 mm). The actuator is connected to CAN module A27. For this purpose the following
command sequence is necessary:
1.
2.
3.
4.
A30:
A27:
A30:
A27:
"A27,
"A30,
"A27,
"A30,
switch on connection DO/1 (relay upper sieve open).

connection DO/1 (relay upper sieve open) is switched on.
send voltage from connection AI/1 (potentiometer upper sieve).
voltage at connection AI/1 (potentiometer upper sieve) amounts to 3,6V.
A30 now performs the control and compares the actual voltage of A27.AI/1 with the nominal voltage. For this purpose
several requests for voltage measuring are sent to A27, and A27 continually communicates the actual voltage to A30. If
actual voltage and nominal voltage are identical the report is as follows:
5.
6.
A30: "A27, disconnect connection DO/1 (relay upper sieve open).

A27: "A30, connection DO/1 (relay upper sieve open) is disconnected.
H 66
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
Upper sieve open

5mm
A30: A27, activate

DO/1! (relay upper
sieve open)
A27: A30, DO/1 (relay

upper sieve open) is
activated.
A30: A27, send

voltage AI/1!
A27: A30, voltage

AI/1 = ... V
A30
U AI/1 = Usetp
?
no
yes
A30: A27, deactivate
DO/1! (relay upper
sieve open)
A27: A30, DO/1 (relay

upper sieve open) is
deactivated.
Upper sieve is open

5mm
56-036
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 67
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
All modules are physically identical and mutually exchangeable. All modules are equipped with the same software The
only difference is the CAN bus address the modules and thus also the functions can be accessed with. This operational
address is assigned from Commander Control 2000 by setup. For this purpose the Commander Control 2000 transmits
the future operational address with a special message to the programming address of the module. The programming
address is identical with all modules, for this reason observe that only one module is connected during this process. The
operational address can be reassigned anytime via the Commander Control 2000, it is therefore possible to mutually
exchange the modules of a machine.
Programming procedure (upon upgrading or exchange of a module):

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
only 5670: Switch off Diesel engine

Switch off ignition
Unplug the modules which are not to be programmed, only one remaining module is allowed to be connected to the
CAN bus (the slot position however does not matter for programming, as only the CAN bus and the power supply are
used)
Switch on ignition (Do not start Diesel engine!!)
Press the right push button <+> and the right push button <-> at Commander Control 2000 simultaneously, the
program enters the "setup
By means of these
push buttons:
By means of these
push buttons:
Both push buttons

pressed
simultaneously:
--> Select page
--> Select line
--> Call setup
--> Quit menu
By means of the
push buttons:
--> Confirm selection
H 68
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
The LC display now shows the following screen:
number of pages
in this menu
current page
Setup
1/3
Language:: english
Language
Front tires:
R adial 650/75R32
Turbo separator:
yes
LCD View angle;
screen 2
--> Switch over to page 3 by means of one of the left push buttons <+> or <->:
Setup
3/3
El.sieve adj.:
yes
El.straw guid:
yes
El.spre
a.
dp
.l
p.l:.:
El.spre
ad
no
Eng.sp.
factor:
3.32
Selected
line
screen 3
--> Change to the corresponding line by means of one of the centre push buttons <+> or <-> and confirm by means of
one of the right push buttons <+> or <->:
Setup
3/3
El.sieve adj.:
New address
Et
lraw
.sieve
adj.:
El.s
guid:
yes
El.spread.pl.:
Eng.sp.
factor:
yes
no
yesno
3.32
screen 4
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 69
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
For programming change over to "yes by means of one of the centre push buttons <+> or <-> and confirm by means of
one of the right push buttons <+> or <-> besttigen:
Setup
3/3
El.sieve adj.:
New address
Et
lraw
.sieve
adj.:
El.s
guid:
yes
El.spread.pl.:
Search
module
Eng.
sp.
factor:
yes
no
yesno
3.32
screen 5
--> If no module could be found the highlighted bar remains on "no as shown in screen 4. If the module logs in correctly
to the CAN bus the highlighted bar changes to "yes:
Setup
3/3
El.sieve adj.:
New address
Et
lraw
.sieve
adj.:
El.s
guid:
yes
El.spread.pl.:
Search
module
Eng.
sp.
factor:
yes
no
yesno
3.32
screen 6
--> Confirm with one of the right push buttons <+> or <->. The operational address is transmitted from the Commander
Control to the module and stored into a nonvolatile memory (EEPROM) of the module:
Setup
3/3
El.sieve adj.:
New address
Et
lraw
.sieve
adj.:
El.s
guid:
yes
El.spread.pl.:
yes
no
yesno
Send
Adresse
Eng.
sp.
factor:
3.32
screen 7
H 70
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
The setup can be quit by means of simultaneously pressing the left push buttons <+> and <>.
--> Switch off ignition
--> Reconnect all devices
The module is now logged on to the Commander Control and all the related functions and
diagnostic pages are ready to operate:
CAN diagnosis
1/4
El. adjustment:
Top sieve
Potentiomet.
Cal. min
Cal. max
Actual value
Extend button
R etract button
R el.:Extend "
R el.:Retract
screen 8
In case of a module failure a corresponding error message will be displayed by the
Commander Control 2000:
Error
Sieve adjusting
is not
addressable
screen 9
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 71
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Deactivation of a function with CAN module
If for some reason one of the modules cannot be accessed any more and no spare parts are available (or the machine
must be downgraded), the affected module must be logged out from the Commander Control. As a result, unsubstantial
error messages will be avoided.
Logging out of a CAN module:
--> Switch on ignition
--> Press the right push button <+> and the right push button <-> at the Commander Control 2000 simultaneously, the
program enters the "setup
Setup
1/3
Language: english
Front tires:
R adial 650/75R32
Turbo separator:
yes
LCD View angle;
screen 10
--> Switch over to page 3 with one of the left push buttons <+> or <->:
Setup
3/3
El.sieve adj.:
yes
El.straw guid:
yes
El.spreaadd..ppll..::
no
Eng.sp.
factor:
3.32
screen 11
H 72
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Change to the corresponding line by means of one of the centre push buttons <+> or <-> and confirm with one of the right
push buttons <+> or <->:
Setup
3/3
El.sieve adj.:
New address
Et
lraw
.sieve
adj.:
El.s
guid:
yes
El.spread.pl.:
Eng.sp.
factor:
yes
no
yesno
3.32
screen 12
--> Confirm by means of one of the right push buttons <+> or <-> in order to log out. Now the corresponding module is
not known any more by the Commander Control 2000 and the functions and diagnostic pages are not ready any
more, error monitoring is not activated any more for this module.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 73
H
Service
Training
56-001
H 74
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Connector pin assignment at job computer
signal
Connector Asignification
colour
signification
colour
signal
spreader drum speed*
gr-rt
inductive
12
ground stabilized
br-ws
0V
11
ignition stabilized
rt-ws
12V
CAN-GND
sw
0V
CAN-H
bl
data
GPS/printer TxD
gr
data
yield logger TxD
gn
data
screen power supply
ws
12V
Pin No.
18
35
17
34
16
12V/4V
br-ws
elevator speed
33
15
32
14
31
13
30
0V
br-ws
ground stabilized
29
28
10
27
9
26
8
25
7
24
6
23
data
data
data
0V
rt
ro
ge
CAN-L
GPS/printer RxD
yield logger RxD
br
screen ground
22
21
20
19
* only for 8XL
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 75
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Connector B
signal
colour
signification
signification
colour
signal
17
fan inclinometer
bl
0V...5V
16
engine oil temperature
sw-vi
0V...12V
15
ground drive hydr. temp. bl-vi
0V...12V
14
fuel tank level
vi-ws
0V...12V
turbo separator speed
ws-vi
12V/4V
conveyor auger speed* bl
12V/4V
sieve pan speed
ws-rt
12V/4V
partial width +
gn-vi
12V/0V
returns load
vi-sw
impulses
straw walker loss sensor bl
Pin No.
18
35
2,4-7,1V
0V.12V
2V...6V
sw-bl angle sensor feed passage

bl-gn
gn-ge
coolant temp. transmitter

cutting angle transmitter
34
33
32
31
13
30
12
29
11
28
10
27
26
25
7
24
12V/0V
gn-ge
partial width -
23
22
impulses
rt
sieve pan loss sensor
21
impulses
20
2
19
1
* only for 8XL
H 76
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
56-001
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 77
H
Service
Training
56-001
H 78
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
signal
colour
signification
Connector C
Pin No.
signification
colour
signal
18
signal MW skid centre or
2,4.7,1V
17
processing hydraulics temp.
bl-vi
35
0V.12V
gn-vi cutting mechanism hydr. temp.*
34
0V..12V
(Sensor not mounted)

16
33
15
32
14
impeller speed**
ws-rt
12V/4V
feed passage speed
ws-ge
inductive
31
13
30
12
29
11
28
10
27
9
12V/0V
rt-ws
indicator light fan control
26
8
25
7
24
6
23
5
22
4
21
3
20
2
19
1
* only for 8XL

** only with synchronous drive of impeller
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 79
H
Service
Training
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CAN-Modul
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
A25
A26
A27

relay lower sieve close (K62)
relay upper sieve close (K20)
key switch upper sieve open

key switch upper sieve close
key switch lower sieve open

key switch lower sieve close
H 80
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Connector pin assignment CAN modules
1
CAN module
Connector
Technical data CAN modules:

Power supply:
10...16V (computer works down to approx. 7Volt), approx. 90mA/13,8V (without loads). Reverse
battery protection, transient protection, optional 24-V operation.
Sensor supply:
8 Volt, 100mA
Internal diagnosis:
BV sensor supply can be read back
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 81
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Straw chopper speed

Grain tank unloading tube
Straw chamber (straw walker)
Returns elevator
Grain tank level display
Air filter engine
Cylinder head temperature engine, resp. engine oil temperature
Central warning light
Parking brake
Cooling fan belt engine 5670
Oil pressure engine
Main beam
Charge control
Direction-indicator transport trailer
direction-indicator combine harvester
Fuel tank level Diesel
Oil temperature engine (continually)
Ground speed
When switching on the ignition lock to pos. I all indicator lights (position 1-11 and 13) are lit for approx. 3 sec.,
simultaneously the acoustic warning signal (buzzer) is sounding.
During the operation a failure is indicated by activating the individual lights in the combined instrument gauge,
simultaneously the buzzer is sounding in conjunction with flashing of the central warning light (pos. 8). Additionally, a
warning message will appear in the Commander Control display.
Except for the temperature switches for cylinder head and engine oil, all transmitters (sensors) are equipped with normally
closed contacts to ground. In this way also a damage in the wire system (cable connections) will be indicated as a failure.
Connection diagram
connector pin assignment
Connector X171 (sw)
Connector X170 (ws)

pin
cable colour function
pin
cable colour function
ws
vi/ws
Fuel tank level Diesel (16)
Main beam (12)
bl
Charge control (13)
sw/vi
Oil temperature engine (17)
bl/ws
Direction-indicator
gn/sw
Straw chopper speed (1)
transport trailer (14)
ws/bl
Control grain tank unloading tube (2)
bl
Direction-indicator
ge/rt
Straw chamber (3)
combine harvester (15)
bl/gr
Returns elevator (4)
sw
Plus 12V
or
Grain tank level display (5)
ws/rt
Ground speed
gn
Air filter engine (6)
sw/ge
Central warning light (8)
bl/sw
Cylinder head temperature engine (7)
sw/rt
Parking brake (9)
10
br
Ground
bl/rt
Cooling fan engine (10)
11
br/rt
Terminal G
10
not used
12
gr
Lighting combined instrument gauge
11
bl/ge
Oil pressure engine (11)
12
not used
equipped with TERIS/TCS a cable

* When
jumper must be connected from pin 10 to
pin 11 at the connector X171 (connector II,
black) of the combined instrument gauge.
H 82
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
33892
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 83
H
Service
Training
Transmitters
sensors
Combined instrument
gauge
Commander Control
2000
engine oil temperature
Limit transmitters
(switches)
position
straw guide plate
buzzer
fuel tank level
straw chamber straw walker
AHS Page Working master switch

B40
B7
individual
light
central
warning light
A30
returns elevator
left/right
grain tank level
engine fan
v-belt
engine air filter
engine cylinder headtemperature, oil temp.
engine oil pressure
terminal D+, W
ground speed
parking brake
grain tank tube
coolant level
Threshing drum
Fan
Reel
56-068
H 84
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Combined instrument gauge and Commander Control 2000
Overview monitoring and operation functions
A8
Clutch control power unit CCP II for clutches
A30
AHS Working master switch S40

B7
Buzzer
B40
K98
Relay reversing motor
M19 Reversing motor

S43
Switch reversing device
relay sets:
K50, K71 Grain tank tube swing out/swing in
Speed adjustment:
K14, K35 Relay set reel variator
K15, K36 Relay set fan variator
K56, K77 Relay set threshing drum variator
Concave clearances:
K18, K39 Relay set concave front
K19, K40 Relay set turbo separator up/down
K60, K81 Relay set concave rear
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 85
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Diagram inputs/outputs Commander Control 2000
H 86
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
inductive sensors speed acquisition:

reel, threashing drum, blower
inductive sensor (speed monitoring):

straw walker, returns, filter auger, chopper
switch (condition monitoring):

cylinder head- /coolant temperature, -level, engine oil
excess temperature, engine oil pressure, cooling fan, air
filter, hand brake, straw chamber, returns
Service
Training
56-044
H 87
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Connector pin assignment A30, Commander Control 2000
34
45
51
56
46
52
63
67
72
64
68
466204
60
57
61
466203
40
35
41
466205
27
16
26
17
10
1
11
Connector view
seen from cable side
93
100
86
94
466206
80
85
73
81
IFM sensor filter auger speed
56-065-1
H 88
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Connector pin assignment A30, Commander Control 2000
34
45
51
56
46
52
63
67
64
68
93
100
466204
72
60
57
61
80
85
466203
40
35
41
466205
27
16
26
17
10
1
11
Connector view
seen from cable side
94
86
73
81
466206
Coolant level
Revolving light upon grain tank full
supply potentiometerservo motor turbo separator up/down
56-065-2
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 89
H
Service
Training
LED
LED
D
E
56-053
H 90
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Function monitoring with the Commander Control 2000
The Commander Control 2000 (4) monitors and acquires speeds and operating conditions of the combine harvester by
means of switches and sensors.
Speed monitoring: Evaluation of switching frequencies which are induced by a turning shaft inside of inductive sensor (B).
Operating conditions: Monitoring is done with closed circuit systems. Upon normal operation the circuit between
Commander Control 2000 and switch/sensor is closed. Upon interruption of this circuit either when the sensor has
responded or wire break is existing or a switch/sensor is defective, the Commander Control 2000 indicates a warning
message: Display (5), combined instrument gauge (1) or buzzer (3).
Exception: The temperature switch (E) for cylinderhead resp. for coolant and engine oil: Switch contacts close against
ground when exceeding the limit temperaturight
Function of terminal D+ und W of the generator:

terminal D+:
- Function monitoring of generator (charge control).

- Release of the belt clutches in connection with the working master switch (upon voltage drop at
terminal D+ all belt clutches will be disengaged).
terminal W:
- Monitoring, acquisition of engine speed.

- Release of the threshing mechanism clutch if engine speed is less than approx. 1500 min-1.
Legend:
1
Combined instrument gauge or monitor TERIS/TCS
Generator
Buzzer
Display
Pulse transmitter (mounted on shaft)
Inductive transmitter shift gear
Inductive sensor as speed sensor
Inductive sensor as monitoring switch
Mechanical monitoring switch
Temperature switch at engine
Capacitive transmitter for grain tank level
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 91
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Switches and sensors for monitoring
A
Inductive transmitter in the gear box cover for acquisition of the ground speed.
Control dimension upon mounting: air gap 10,5 mm between sensor and toothed wheel.
Internal impedance of the sensor: R = 1,05 k 100
Insulation against housing > 500k
In the case of TERIS/TCS the cutting mechanism drive is monitored with an inductive transmitter at the gear rim of the
reversing device.
Inductive sensor for monitoring and acquisition of speeds.

Control dimension upon mounting: air gap 4 mm between pulse transmitter (6) and head of sensor.
The LED is lit, when the pulse transmitter (6) covers the sensor head.
Speed sensors:
- Straw walker
- Elevator head
- Returns elevator
- Chopper
- Threshing drum
- Blower
- Reel drive
- sieve pan oscillating arm
- turbo separator
speed monitoring
by means of Commander Control 2000
speed display and control of speed adjustment

by means of Commander Control 2000
only with TERIS/TCS
Inductive sensor as monitoring switch

Control dimension upon mounting: air gap min. 4 mm between head of sensor and lever, grain tank tube etc.
Sensor grain tank tube:
LED is lit when grain tank tube is swung in.

- As long as the grain tank tube is not completely swung in, the indicator light no. 2 in the
combined instrument gauge is lighting.
- The grain tank clutch is automatically disengaged when the grain tank tube is swung in
(indicator light no. 2 is extinguishing).
Upon defective sensor or wire break the grain tank clutch function is blocked.
Sensor grain tank top:
LED is lit when the grain tank extension is lowered and the grain tank cover is closed.
- Warning message in display if: - grain tank top open
- Threshing mechanism and working master switch off
- Ground speed > 2 km/h
Sensor straw guide plate: LED is lit when the straw guide plate is adjusted to long straw.
In chop position the sensor is activating the following functions:
- Indicator light (3) at the control console is lit (see fig. control console).
- Actuation of the chopper clutch upon engaging and disengaging of the threshing
mechanism.
- Speed monitoring for the chopper.
H 92
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
LED
LED
D
E
56-053
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 93
H
Service
Training
LED
LED
D
E
56-053
H 94
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Switches and sensors for monitoring
D
Mechanical monitoring switches
Monitored function
type of switch*
Straw chamber straw walker 2 x

Cover returns elevator 2 x
Hand brake
cooling fan belt (engine BF6L.913 C)
Oil pressure switch engine
normally
normally
normally
normally
normally
normally
closed
opened
opened
closed
opened
closed
* Switching status of the switch when operated away from its neutral position.
Normally closed:
switch contacts are opening upon operation
Normally opened: switch contacts are closing upon operation
Temperature switch for cylinder head/coolant and engine oil (5650 - 5690)
Switch contacts are closing when temperature limits are exceeded (exception from closed circuit concept).
Capacitive transmitter for grain tank level

The capacitive transmitter is opening against ground (pin 2 to 3), when it is covered by the cone of grains.
Simultaneously the red LED on top of the transmitter is extinguishing and the Commander Control 2000 is initiating the
alarm message.
One or two transmitters may be mounted in the grain tank.
Design with one transmitter:
When the grain tank is full indicator light no. 5 in the combined instrument gauge is lit,
the buzzer and the revolving lights are activated.
Design with two transmitters:
1. transmitter: Warns if grain tank is 3/4 full, indicator light no. 5 is flashing, revolving
lights are operated in interval.
2. transmitter: Warns if grain tank is completely full, indicator light no. 5 is lit, buzzer
and revolving lights are activated.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 95
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Functional description inductive sensor
The inductive sensor (1) is an electronic switch which changes its switching status
when the distance Ds (switching distance) between a metal body (2) and the sensor head exceeds or falls below approx.
8mm. In this way the position of levers or flaps or speeds can be monitored.
Depending on the electrical pin assignment the inductive sensor is working as a normally opened or as a normally closed
contact against ground.
Normally opened:
when the sensor clearance falls below 8mm the sensor current rises to approx. 10mA;
LED (3) is lit.
(with a clearance >8mm the sensor current decreases to 0,5mA, LED (3) is extinguished)
Normally closed:
when the sensor clearance falls below 8mm the sensor current decreases to approx. 0,5mA;
LED (3) is extinguished.
The LED (3) is always lit when the switching status is closed, independant from the the pin assignment.
At the combine harvester all inductive sensors are connected as normally opened contacts.
A minimum distance Dmin of at least 4 mm must be observed between the sensor head and the monitored functional
element in order to prevent possible damage.
The inductive sensor must not be connected to a 12V power supply without protection resistance (approx. 70
Ohm) as otherwise it will be destroyed.
Maximum current load 400mA.
1
2
3
4
H 96
Inductive sensor
Metal body
LED
AMP-connector 282 104-1
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
1
Ds 8mm
Dmin > 4mm
SW
WS
NPN
NPN
NPN
NPN
switching
against minus
minusschaltend
switching
against minus
minusschaltend
normally opened function
normally closed function
Schliesserfunktion
Oeffnerfunktion
56-054
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 97
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Sensors, overview
Sensors right side of the machine
1
Grain sensor straw walker (left and right)
Switch straw chamber warning flaps
Potentiometer in servo motor for deflectors
Speed sensor chopper
Sensor for straw guide plate position
Potentiometer in servo motor for straw guide plate
Grain sensor sieve pan
Wheel sensor for grain loss monitor and job computer LH 1000 (not applicable with TERIS/TCS)
10
Switch returns elevator cover
11
Speed sensor returns elevator
12
Throughput sensor returns elevator (only with TERIS/TCS)
13
Potentiometer in the servo motors upper-/lower sieve open/close (only TERIS/TCS)
14
Sensor sieve pan oscillating arm (only TERIS/TCS)
15
Speed sensor turbo separator (only TERIS/TCS)
16
Sensor ground speed in gear box
17
Angle transmitter balance axis
18
Pressure sensor for cutting mechanism control
19
Speed sensor intermediate shaft in feed passage (only TERIS/TCS)
20
Angle transmitter cutting angle of cutting mechanism (only with balance)
21
Position sensor feed passage for LH-1000 job computer (not applicable with TERIS/TCS)
22
Position transmitter feed passage for cutting mechanism control
23
Potentiometer in servo motor concave clearance rear
24
Brake light switch
25
Switch hand brake
26
Sensors for start interlock and reverse gear horn multifunction handle
27
Brightness sensor for grain loss monitor
28
Speed sensor grains elevator
29
Throughput sensor in elevator head (only with TCS)
30
Humidity sensor in grain tank filling tube (only with TCS)
31
Potentiometer in servo motor turbo separator up/down
H 98
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
31
29,30
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
10
11 12
13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
34939-3
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 99
H
Service
Training
15
13
14
12
11
10
34940-1
13, 14, 15
21
16
19
17,18
20
17
56-017
H 100
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Sensors, overview
Sensors left side of the machine
1
Potentiometer for touching skid
Speed sensor reel
Potentiometer in servo motor concave clearance front
Angle transmitter balance axis
Speed sensor threshing drum
Speed sensor blower
Switch returns elevator cover
Throughput sensor returns elevator (only with TERIS/TCS)
Speed sensor straw walker
10
Level transmitter fuel tank
11
Temperature sensor hydraulic oil (in hydraulic pump)
12
13
Sensor grain tank top
14
Level transmitter grain tank completely full
15
Level transmitter grain tank 3/4 full
Sensors at the engine (sensors for EEC see chapter A)

16
Transmitter/switch cylinder head temperature

- 5670: transmitter mounted in 1. cylinder head, switch mounted in 2. cylinder head.
- 5650 - 5690: transmitter and switch one component.
17
Transmitter/switch engine oil temperature (with 5670 only temperature transmitter)
18
Oil pressure switch at the 5670
19
Oil pressure switch
20
Switch at tensioning pulley cooling fan belt (only engine BF6L 913C)
21
Coolant level sensor
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 101
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Multifunction lever
Gear rack device / sensor adjustment
1
Wedge action socket
LED, lighting when in reverse motion
B46 inductive sensor for reverse gear horn
B45 inductive sensor for start interlock neutral position sensor (release all-wheel drive)
LED (functional check, not lighting in neutral position)
Gear rack device
Control disk
Bowden pull wire
= forward motion
= reverse motion
Adjustments at gear rack device and Bowden pull wire

1 - Mechanical zero position
2 - Electrical zero position
3 - Zero position at the hydraulic pump (see chapter D)
These three adjustments must be consistent!
mounting advice:
- Move the multifunction lever out of zero position to reverse motion position.
- Screw in the inductive sensors via the wedge action sockets into the gear rack device until reaching the mechanical stop
at the connecting member.
- Turn back one whole revolution (thread M12x1) and secure with flat nut.
- Move multifunction lever into forward as well as reverse motion.
Minimum distance of active sensor surface to control disk: 1 + 0,5 mm.
In neutral position of the multifunction lever the LEDs (2) and (5) must not be lit!
H 102
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
0
V
R
8
1+
0,
5
2
4
Ze
N
ulrlo
stepllos
unigtio
n
,
+0
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 103
to control cabinet
to control cabinet
Service
Training
56-067
H 104
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Multifunction lever
Connector pin assignment
B45 Neutral position sensor
B46 Reverse motion sensor
X190 - X192
Pneutron connector under control console
X506, X512
21-pole connector in control cabinet
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 105
A10
H 106
0VP
WS
K22
WS
VOY
S41
M/A
S28
24VP
WS
12VP
B47
B46
B45
A
B
B
86
SW
85 2
5
C
S40
S2
NC
output starter
output starter
reversing horn
output allwheel drive
output all-wheel
drive on
output all-wheel drive M/A
input working master

switch terminal 15a
input all-wheel drive
input differential lock
input sensor for 4th gear
input reverse motion sensor
input neutral position sensor
GND
terminal 15 12V
logic module start interlock reversing horn all-wheel
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
A13
Service
Training
30
15
D+
15a
15b
logic module start interlock reversing horn all-wheel
F19
50a
B48
SW
F22
SW
3
30
87
87a
starter
control unit all-wheel drive
16050210
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
A13 logic module, connector pin assignment, function
A13
Logic module
A10
Control unit all-wheel
B45
Sensor neutral at hand throttle
B46
Sensor reverse at hand throttle
B47
Sensor 4th gear
B48
Reverse gear horn
F..
Fuses
K22
Start relay
H39
Indicator light all-wheel on
S2
Start switch
S28
Foot switch slip control (diff. lock)
S40
S41
Switch all-wheel on
Pin
Designation
Cable colour
Measuring value
Input from A10 M/A
bl
11V/0V
Input 12V for control unit A10
rt
12V
---
Output A10 12VPA
bl/ws
2V/12V
Output relay K22, starter
sw/vi
0V/12V
sw/vi
0V/12V
---
NC, input start switch S2
Output reverse gear horn B48
vi
1,5V/12V
Terminal 15
sw
12V
10
Ground GND
br
0V
11
Sensor neutral B 45
sw
11V/4V
12
Sensor reverse B46
ws
11V/4V
13
Sensor 4th gear B47
vi/gr
11V/4V
14
Input switch S28, diff. lock
15
16
bl
11V/0V
Input switch S41, all-wheel on
sw/ws
10V/0V
Input working master switch S40, terminal 15a
sw/gn
12V
When foot switch S28 is actuated the logic module is connecting pin 1 to ground.
Function of logic module:

1.
Start interlock:
Release of relay K22 upon neutral position of the multifunction lever by means of sensor B45
2.
Activation of the reverse gear horn B48 by means of sensor B46 upon position reverse of the multifunction lever
3a
Release of activating the all-wheel drive by means of switch S41 if:

- Working master switch S40 is on (terminal 15a)
- Multifunction lever is in neutral position, B45
- the 4. gear is not engaged, B47
3b
Activation of slip control (differential lock) upon activated foot switch S28 and activated all-wheel drive S41.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 107
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Control unit EEC
Gas control unit
1
A1 control unit EEC
Connector at engine side
Connector at vehicle side
Gas control unit
Diagnosis plug-socket
LED UB, power supply voltage
LED VCC, power supply from EEC
LED TH/2, half throttle
LED TH/1, full throttle
10
LED SDW, threshing mechanism on = 15b, (LED on = threshing operation)
Notice: With full throttle and switched-on threshing mechanism all LEDs are lit.
A2 pin assignment
Pin
1
2
3
Designation
Input half throttle from S5
Input full throttle from S5
Pot. throttle ground
Cable colour
gr/rt
gr/bl
br
Pot. throttle slider
ws/bl
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Pot. throttle supply

Input droop changeover from K11
Output droop changeover to A1
Ground droop changeover
Supply 12V from control cabinet X8
Supply A1
ws/rt
sw/gn
ws/gn
br
sw
sw
H 108
Supply for diagnosis connector

Ground for A1
Ground for A1
sw
br
br
br
br
Measuring value
0V/12V
0V/12V
1,2V idle throttle
2,8V half throttle
4,1V full throttle
5V
0V/12V
digit
12V
12V
12V
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
X8
MED_ACAD*11/24/10 11:01 AM Rev:12.23
SOLARI 1.she
Motor
Fahrzeug
16
9
1
56-116
56-055
10
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 109
H
Service
Training
Notes
H 110
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Electronic cutting table control
EMR-D Self-levelling control / AutoControl
Function
The EMR-D self-levelling control / AutoControl system is
used for automatic control of the cutting table levelling
system on the combine harvester.
The electronic control unit EMR-D processes the actualvalue signals (position sensor, pressure sensor, tracker
bar sensor), compares them with the predefined settings
(operating control) and transmits the appropriate control
signals to the control valves (for a more detailed
description, please refer to the Operating Instructions).
Components of the
EMR-D Self-levelling control / AutoControl:
Electronic EMR-D control unit (in the control box)
EMR-D control valve (on left as seen in direction of
travel, mounted on the grain tank next to the grain tank
discharge tube)
Electronic tilt control unit, AutoControl
(in the control box)
Tilt control valve (on left as seen in direction of travel,
built into the control valve block, next to the grain tank
tube)
Control panel (control box)
Control functions in the Commander Stick
Position sensor (mounted on the centre of rotation of
the feed passage, to the right as seen in the direction
of travel)
Pressure sensor with activating valve and pressure
accumulator (mounted on the drive axle)
Tracker rod sensors (up to 3)
(4 k potentiometer on the front attachment)
Floating frame with hydraulic cylinders for tilt control
(AutoControl)
Note:
Tilt control is also termed "lateral flotation" or "field
tracking".
Switching logic
Operating standby / "Diagnostic" standby
(precondition for adjustment)
1. First calibration completed
2. Front attachment and electrical connector connected
3. Ignition switch to position (1)
4. Engine running
5. Working master switch
6. Threshing mechanism engaged
7. Desired operating mode selected
8. Automatic button in commander stick pressed
A00253
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 111
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Layout of controls
Layout of the control panel for EMR-D self-levelling (basic variant) and AutoControl (variant with tilt control):
Item No.Self-levelling / Autocontrol version
(1)
(2)
Overstroke button (Important: only press briefly until reaching the cylinder end-stop).
(3)
Contact pressure preselection
(4)
Cutting height preselection
(5)
Diagnostic indicator light red LED
(6)
Status indicator light (comes on in automatic mode) green LED
Layout of controls of the Commander Stick

Item No. Topliner
(10)
Raise front attachment normal fast mode
(11)
Lower front attachment normal fast mode
(12)
Raise reel
(13)
Lower reel
(14)
Tilt front attachment, right side down
(15)
Tilt front attachment, left side down
(16)
Automatic mode
(17)
Reel back
(18)
Reel forward
Extra equipment:
(19)
Cutting angle adjustment: up
(20)
Cutting angle adjustment: down
H 112
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
1.3
1.4
1.2
1.1
6
5
33918
19
12
13
10
11
18
20
17
14
15
16
17
16
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
WS/GR
WS/GE
GR/BR
GE
GR/PK
19
PK
VI
GN
BR
WS
14
15
RT/BL
GR
BL
SW
RT
hebl
hegn
BN/GN
AUTO
20
WS/BL
13 18
WS/RT
12
WS/SW
11
10
hebl
hegn
5
7
H 113
H
Service
Training
H 114
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Calibration
Calibrating the EMR-D Self-levelling control /
AutoControl
Reason: To adapt the EMR-D to the relevant front
attachment for optimal levelling and guidance of the front
attachment.
When?
When using for the first time
When changing tyres or changing front attachment
When fitting an extra hydraulic cylinder
If the combine sinks deeply on soft ground
Conditions:
The front attachment and combine must be standing on
flat ground; the skids and tracker bars must be resting on
the ground.
Second calibration stage (2)

Determines and stores the weight of the front
attachment.
Required:
after performing the first calibration stage, if the weight of
the front attachment has been changed.
Procedure:
Steps 1. 5.
The front attachment must hover just above the
ground (50 ... 100 mm).
Press the "Lower front attachment" and "Raise front
attachment" push-buttons simultaneously and hold
them down for at least 7 seconds.
The status indicator light flashes 8 times to confirm
calibration.
Comment
In the Balance version, the drive axle must be in neutral
position (mid-position).
The second calibration stage (2) is complete.
First calibration stage (1)
Determines and stores the weight of the front attachment

at maximum raised height.
Determines and stores the position of the feed passage

when the front attachment is rested on the ground, and
registers the sensor values at the skids.
Required:
after carrying out the second calibration stage.
Conditions:
The front attachment and combine must be standing on
flat ground; the skids and tracker bars must be resting on
the ground.
Procedure:
1. Switch the ignition lock to position "I".
2. Start the engine.
3. Switch on the main switch for the hydraulic functions
(threshing section master switch).
4. Switch the mode selector switch to the transport
position (calibration).
5. Raise or lower the front attachment at least 100 mm,
and then lower to ground.
The front attachment must rest on the ground.

Press the "Lower front attachment" and "Automatic"
push-buttons simultaneously and hold them down for
at least 7 seconds.
The status indicator light flashes 5 times to confirm
calibration.
Third calibration stage (3)
Procedure:
Steps 1. 5.
The front attachment must be raised to just under its
maximum raised height (the cylinder end stop must
not be reached).
Press the "Automatic" push-button and hold it down
for at least 7 seconds.
The status light flashes 12 times to confirm
calibration.
The third calibration step (3) is complete.
To repeat a calibration step, switch off the engine and
restart the calibration process from the beginning.
Note::
The field tracker remains active while the ground
clearance and contact pressure are adjusted, even if
the automatic function is not active.
(signal change 2 Volt required to switch off).
The first calibration stage (1) is complete.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 115
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Fault diagnostics
The EMR-D control unit constantly monitors the system for faults. Faults are classified in three classes.
The EMR-D electronic cutting table control responds differently according to the error class.
Reaction to faults:
Major faults:
The EMR-D control action is stopped and locked in position.
The relay is switched off (output stage protection).
Driver warning: the red diagnostics indicator (5) emits the fault code. Error output is terminated when the
control system is restarted.
To restart the control system: remedy the fault and restart with the ignition key.
The front attachment can now only be raised or lowered by manually operating the control valves.
Medium-severity faults:
The EMR-D control action is stopped and locked in position.
Work can continue in any unaffected operating mode.
EMR-D functions in the "TRANSPORT" position.
Driver warning: the diagnostics indicator (5) emits the fault code.
To restart the control system:
Remedy the fault and release EMR-D by pressing the "Raise / Lower front attachment" buttons.
The red LED (5) only goes out after pressing the operating buttons if the fault has been remedied.
If a fault code has been started it will be finished.
Minor faults:
The EMR-D control action continues.
Driver warning: the red diagnostics indicator (5) emits the fault code.
The diagnostics indicator light goes out after the push-buttons have been pressed, provided that the fault has
been remedied. If a fault code has been started it will be finished.
H 116
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Fault diagnostics
Fault code list for EMR-D
With the aid of the fault code list, faults can be located and identified. The next few pages specify the fault codes and
associated fault descriptions. The fault codes are divided into major faults, medium-severity faults and minor faults. The
error message for a fault is divided into two sequences of flashes. The first flash sequence specifies the fault class and
represents the first digit (tens) of the 2-digit fault code.
First flash sequence:
10
Major fault
Two flashes ()
20
Medium-severity fault
Three flashes ()
30
Minor fault
One flash
()
The second sequence of flashes follows after a short pause and subdivides the class or severity of the fault. It
corresponds to the second digit (ones) of the 2-digit fault code.
The fault code is obtained by counting the number of flashes in the first flash sequence and entering this number in
the tens position, and then counting the number of flashes in the second sequence and entering it in the ones position.
The relevant fault description for this fault code can then be found by looking up the code in the fault code list.
The diagnostics indicator light repeats the error message until the fault is remedied.
Examples: Fault 22
If the signal line to the "cutting height" setting potentiometer is broken, the indicator light will show e.g. Fault 22.
Two flashes - short pause - two flashes - long pause - REPEAT
- - - - - - - -- - - - - - - -- - - - - - - -
Fault 22
Examples: Fault 35
(Low battery voltage):
Three flashes - short pause - five flashes - long pause - REPEAT
- -- - - - - -- -- - - - - -
Fault 35
Simultaneous faults
If a number of faults occur at the same time, the other fault codes are displayed after the long pause. After all faults have
been indicated, the diagnostics indicator repeats all fault codes from the start.
Examples: Fault codes 22 and 35
Two flashes - short pause - two flashes - long pause - three flashes - short pause - five flashes long pause - REPEAT
- - - - - - - -- -- - - - - -- - - - - - - -- -
- - - - - - Fault 22 and Fault 35
By switching the ignition off and on again, the error message is always restarted from the start of the first fault code and is
then repeated.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 117
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Fault diagnostics
List of fault codes for EMR-D
Fault
Code
Brief Description
Major faults
Pin No.
Fault Description
11
RAISE output stage
37
The output stage for the "Raise front attachment" solenoid valve
is defective, or the line from the raise/lower solenoid valve to
pin 35 of the EMR-D control unit is broken.
12
LOWER output stage
19
The output stage for the "Lower front attachment" solenoid valve
is defective, or the line from the raise/lower solenoid valve to
pin 35 of the EMR-D control unit is broken.
13
Short-circuit
35
The current measured across pin 35 is too high.
Short-circuit between pins 19 and 35

or between pins 37 and 35 (solenoid coil short-circuit
possible).
14
Cable break
35
No current is measured across pin 35, even though the solenoid

coils are energised.
Possible cable break in the supply lines to the solenoid

coils (pin 19, 37 or 35).
Possible defect in the solenoid coils.
Possible absence of battery voltage at pin 29

(defective fuse).
Defective control box.
15
Commander Stick
Raise/Lower/Fast
Push-button signal is incorrect.

Malfunction of the RAISE, LOWER or FAST push-button.
16
Power supply
2
20
The operating voltage supply is incorrect.

Fault in 9.5 V supply or earth.
17
Battery
29
Battery voltage exceeds 18 Volt.
18
21
Selector lever signal is incorrect.

Cable break or signal not connected.
H 118
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Fault diagnostics
List of fault codes for EMR-D
Medium-severity faults
Fault
Code
Brief Description
Pin No.
21
Position sensor
Position
22
Cutting height setting

potentiometer
22
Signal of the setting potentiometers incorrect.
Cable break or potentiometer not connected.
23
Pressure sensor
Contact pressure signal incorrect.

(only responds if pressure control is preselected with the
preselection switch).
24
Contact pressure
setting potentiometer
Signal of the setting potentiometer incorrect.

(only responds if pressure control is preselected with the
preselection switch).
25
"FAST" push-button
14
The "FAST" push-button is activated even though the "RAISE"

or "LOWER" button is inactive.
Fault
Code
Brief Description
Pin No.
Fault Description
signal incorrect.
Cable break or sensor not connected.
Short-circuit or short-circuit to chassis earth.
Incorrect calibration of the position sensor.
Minor faults
Fault Description
31
Tracker bar sensor,

right
26
The signal from the right-hand sensor is incorrect.
Possible short-circuit or short-circuit to chassis earth.

(This diagnosis is only carried out when tracker bar feedback
control is active, i.e. only when the belt clutch for the threshing
or pressing mechanism is engaged and "clearance control"
mode is selected).
32
Tracker bar sensor,

left
The signal from the left-hand sensor is incorrect.
Possible short-circuit or short-circuit to chassis earth.
33
Commander Stick tilt

(right/left)
and automatic
27
Push-button signal incorrect, or malfunction of the "TILT,

RIGHT", "TILT, LEFT" or "AUTOMATIC" operating function.
35
Battery
29
Low battery voltage (less than 12 Volt).
36
Valve defect or
no oil pressure
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Despite activated RAISE current at pin 37 of the EMR-D box,

the front attachment is not raised even though the engine
is running. No pressurised oil supply available, or the valve is
sticking.
H 119
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Control unit EMR-D (Bosch), connector pin assignment A3
Illustration seen from the cable side
pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44-45
46
47-50
51
52-55
signification
angle transmitter feed passage ground
power supply EMR-D control unit
MF handle lift/lower fast
Release EMR-D automatic
Setpoint pression on the support
Angle transmitter feed passage signal
Cutting mechanism skid left signal
Pressure transmitter signal
MF handle vers. lift/lower
not used
longitudinal slope from Balance
Status indication (LED green)
MF handle automatic
Cutting mechanism coding >7,2 m
Lateral tilt left input, pin 5
not used
MF handle lift
Solenoid valve reservoir
Solenoid valve lower
Control unit ground
Control unit operation mode
Setpoint cutting height
Cutting mechanism skid centre signal
Ignition terminal 15
not used
cutting mechanism skid right signal
MF handle vers. autom. lateral tilt
Ground terminal 31
Power supply terminal 30
Overstroke key
Diagnosis indication (LED red)
MF handle left turn
MF handle right turn
Lateral tilt right input pin 4
MVs ground lift/lower
MF handle lower
Solenoid valve lift
Pressure transmitter ground
Pressure-/angle transmitter/skids vers.
not used
Cutting mechanism skids ground
not used
Coding cutting mechanism > 7,2 m
not used
Lateral tilt/MV reservoir ground
not used
Lateral tilt power supply, pin 2
not used
colour
sw-vi
rt
br-gn
bl-gn
br
sw-bl
gn
ws-ge
sw
signal
0V
9,5V
0V/2,7V
11V/0V
0V...9,5V
2,4V...7,1V
2,4V...7,1V
2,4V...7,1V
5V
gr-sw
rt-bl
rs
br
rt-sw
Frequenz 392,5 Hz...2000 Hz

0V/5V
0V/6,3V
5V/0V with cutting mechanism >7,2 m jumper to PIN 43 inserted
PWM 10V/0V, 125Hz
rt
gr-ws
br-sw
bl
ws
or
or
sw
0V/3,5V
0V/12V, 2A
PWM 0V/12V, 1...3,2 A, 1kHz/80Hz
0V
6,4V/ 5,7V/ 3,3V/ 4,9V
0V...9,5V
2,4V...7,1V
12V
ge
rt-bl
br
rt
gr
sw-ws
ws-gr
ge-br
sw-ge
br
bl
ws
ws-bl
gr
2,4V...7,1V
11V
0V
12V
11V/0V
0V/5V
0V/6,3V
0V/6,3V
PWM 10V/0V, 125Hz
0V
0V/3,5V
PWM 0V/12V, 1...3,2 A, 1kHz/80Hz
0V
9,5V
1 EMR-D control unit (Bosch), A3
2 Lateral tilt control unit for EMR-D, A12
0V
3 Connector view EMR-D control unit seen from
cable side
4 Connector view lateral tilt control unit from
0V
cable side
5 Connector pin assignment EMR-D control unit
0V
A4
6 Jumper for coding MW > 7,2m
12V
7 Ferrite ring for electromagnetic shielding of
control unit A3 and A12
br
br
br
sw
Connector pin assignment for lateral tilt control unit EMR-D (Bosch) A12
pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
H 120
signification
MV right turn
Lateral tilt power supply
MV left turn
Lateral tilt right input
Lateral tilt left input
Lateral tilt ground
colour
sw-gn
sw
rt-gn
sw-ge
rt-sw
br
signal
PWM,
12V
PWM,
PWM,
PWM,
0V
12/0V, 1,2...2,2A, 125Hz

12/0V, 1,2...2,2A, 125Hz
10V/0V, 125Hz
10V/0V, 125Hz
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5 4
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
5
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
Pin Nr.
5
A3
20
H33
H32
S13
2
21
31
S12
12
Cutting height
R2
R1
Contact pressure
22
5
30
H017-1
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 121
H
Service
Training

Topliner 4060 4090H as from chassis No.: ...7296
EMR-D Self-levelling / AutoControl
Measuring diagram
For testing, use measuring adapter 16017182
Earth
Earth
Control panel
Status indicator
red
0 V or 5 V
green
0 V or 5 V
Setpoint,
stubble height
Setpoint,
contact pressure
valve
solenoid
Lower
valve
open Threshing section

open Straw chopper
closed Power press
0 V or 12 V
open Threshing section

open Powerpress
closed Straw chopper
Right
Supply
Tilt prop.
Solenoid energisation
valve
solenoid
Tilt
Left
EMR-D control unit
solenoid
Cutting table
Accumulator
0 V or 12 V
Rise
Activation
Tilt
Valves
For version without tilt control, Nos. 7, 16 and 18 do not apply.
Overtravel push-button
(Earth)
All unmarked lines 1.0 mm 2

Ends marked with contact No.
Supply
Selector lever
1 = Stubble height with
1 = tracking control
2 = Contact pressure
3 = Stubble height without
3 = tracking control
4 = Transport
Diagnostics indicator
Earth
Stationary state detection
S1 = open:
S1 = closed:
bl/br
Tracker control inactive

Tracker control active
11 V or 0 V
Energisation
via threshing
section/powerpress relay R 28
Activation via
relay K 12
Connector, rear view
15
ws
rt
sw
bl
br
white
red
black
blue
brown
A00262
H 122
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
13-pin
EMR-D control unit
Tracking sensor,
middle
Self-levelling
Supply
Signal
Earth
variant without tilt control,

with one tracking sensor
Supply
Signal
Earth
Tracking sensor L
Supply
Signal
Earth
Supply
Signal
Earth
Tracking sensor R
Supply
Signal
Earth
7 8
Tracking sensor middle
10 11 12
13-pol.
Position measurement
yellow
Sensors
Measuring diagram (continued)
The sensor voltage increases with increasing ground clearance and must be less than 6.8 V.
Supply
Signal
Earth
Cutting table / PU operation
Fast mode,
Up
0 V / 2,7 V
Raise
0 V / 3,5 V
Lower
0 V / 3,5 V
Fast mode,
Down
5V
11 V
Automatic
mode
0 V / 6,3 V
Turn
anticlockwise
0 V / 6,3 V
Turn
clockwise
0 V / 6,3 V
12 b
Multifunction lever
12 a
Pressure measurement
Battery terminal 30 (not via ignition lock)
Supply
Battery (line to earth)

Ignition terminal 15
8
4
13
12a
14
12b
11
15
ge
dubl
hebl
sw
hegn
ws
sw
ws
white
black
white
7 6
3 2
yellow
5
1
8
4
7 6
3 2
5
1
dark blue
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
8
4
7 6
3 2
5
1
pale blue
8
4
7 6
3 2
black
5
1
8
4
7 6
3 2
5
1
pale green
H 123
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Feed passage position sensor

Basic setting:
The turning slot of the position sensor shaft (3) must
run in line (parallel) with the clamp lever (2). The
adjusting mark on the position sensor shaft (3) must
point in the direction of the connector (4) rough
setting.
Basic length of the coupling rod 173 mm (see
drawing) fine setting.
173
Checking the basic setting:

Required conditions: the combine must be standing on a
flat surface, with front attachment mounted.
When the front attachment is lowered, the signal voltage
(pin 2) must be 0.25 ! supply voltage VS (pin 3). When
the front attachment is fully raised, the signal voltage
(pin 2) must 0.75 ! supply voltage VS (pin 3).
For testing, use measuring adapter 16031484 or
16017182.
Signal voltage at maximum raised height (overtravel
button, cylinder end-stop): 7.1 Volt. Cut-off threshold
when raising the front attachment with the multifunction
lever: 6.8 V (signal voltage).
Checking the overtravel distance:
With the front attachment fully raised, a cylinder travel of
at least 30 mm must be available up to the cylinder endstop, i.e. when the overtravel button is pressed, the
cylinders must extend a further 30 mm before reaching
their end-stop.
I
After resetting the position sensor, the calibration
procedure must be repeated.
1
Position sensor (rotation angle sensor)
Clamping lever
Position sensor shaft
Connector
H0506
Tracker bar sensors Installation

The potentiometers must be fitted to the skids as
shown in Figure 31053. The potentiometers (10) must be
placed on the skids at an offset angle of 15 to allow the
engaging piece to be inserted in the bolt slot. The
electrical connection must point upwards. The potentiometer must then be rotated until the fixing screws (11) are
located roughly in the middle of the oblong holes.
Potentiometer resistance: 4 k
The tracker bar sensors are automatically calibrated
during the calibration process, i.e. if a tracker bar sensor
is changed, full recalibration is necessary.
11
10
H 124
31053
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
1
AutoControl version
Self-levelling version
13-pin socket on the cutting table
10 Tracker bar sensor, left
8
8
12 Tracker bar sensor, right
10
2
11 Tracker bar sensor, middle
11
3
13
Testing the tracker bar sensors (potentiometer)
12
Potentiometer resistance: 4 k
Supply voltage: (pin 9): 9.5 V
Earth connection (pin 7): 0 V
(Pin 5: Tracker bar sensor, Left)
Tracker skid:
raised
lowered
Signal voltage:
2.4 V (min.)
6.8 V (max.)
(Pin 8: Tracker bar sensor, Middle)

(Pin 11: Tracker bar sensor, Right)
0V
9,5V
2,46,8V ( 2V)
0V
Make sure that the signal voltage is always within the

"signal window" range (2.4 to 6.8 V).
The operating range of 2 V for the tracker bar sensors
is preset by the tracker bar travel (chain length left / right
400 mm, middle 350 mm).
Note:
After replacing or resetting a potentiometer, the calibration
procedure must be repeated.
0V
2,46,8V ( 2V)
9,5V
2,46,8V ( 2V)
9,5V
0V
9,5V
2,46,8V ( 2V)
The operating range of the tracker bar sensors must be at

least 2 Volt ( 2 V).
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 125
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
13-pin connector - Pin layout
Cutting table connector:
Male
Cutting table
potentiometer middle
Cutting table
potentiometer left
+ rt/ws
S or
br
S
rt/bl
+ sw
Reel speed sensor
Reel speed variator

Rape cutting table
Cutting table
potentiometer right
Female
AutoControl
version
(3 tracker
skids)
Potentiometer Middle
Potentiometer Left
Reel speed sensor

Rape cutting table
Female
Self-levelling
version
1 tracker
skid)
9
1
10
2
4
5
11
3
13
12
+ rt/ws
S gge
br
+ bl
g g
S ge/gn
br
+ bl
g g
S ge/gn
br
br
8
7
+ bl
g g
S ge/gn
br
Potentiometer Middle
S
+
9
1
10
2
4
5
11
3
13
br
bl
bl
+
br
Potentiometer Right
12
g g
ge/gn
bl
br
8
7
Reel speed sensor
Reel speed variator

Rape cutting table
H 126
br/sw
bl/rt
g
gn/ge
g
+
g
br/ge
+ bl
Reel speed variator
gn
g
bl
9
1
10
2
4
5
br
br
bl
bl
+
br
11
3
13
12
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
Balance Description
5650H 5690HTS
Balance
4 6
Brief description
5 1
BALANCE
3 8
AUTO
The purpose of the Balance control is to keep the combine

harvester in a horizontal position within certain limits when
driving on a slope. The machine is levelled both laterally and
longitudinally.
Longitudinal levelling can be deactivated in special
situations.
AUTO
8
2
If hydraulic cutting angle adjustment is installed, the control

system can adjust the cutting angle of the cutting table
within a certain range so that the cutting table remains
parallel with the ground.
NEUTRAL
DEUTZ-FAHR
Pos. Control element/indicator
35395
The Balance control is not operational (4 LED's (9) are

lighting), until
the engine is running,
the charge control light is extinguished,
the main working switch is on and
the parking brake (handbrake) has been released.
Function
Key LIFT
- Machine is being lifted horizontally / automatic mode is deactivated

- Key (2) simultaneously pressed: Activation of dual-line control
- Key (7) simultaneously pressed: Delay cutting angle controller 0 s
Key LOWER
- Machine is being lowered horizontally / automatic mode is deactivated

- Key (1) simultaneously pressed: Activation of dual-line control
Key TILT RIGHT
- Machine is being tilted to the right / automatic mode is deactivated

- Key (4) simultaneously pressed: Activation of single-line controller**
Key TILT LEFT
- Machine is being tilted to the left / automatic mode is deactivated

- Key (3) simultaneously pressed: Activation of single-line controller*
Key AUTO
- Switching on automatic mode..

- Keep key (7) simultaneously pressed while switching on: Calibration mode
on
- Key (1) simultaneously pressed: Slow position controller is being activated
- Key (2) simultaneously pressed: Fast position controller is being activated
LED AUTO
Display automatic mode On/Off:

LED is constantly lighting:
Fast position controller is activated
LED is flashing:
Slow position controller is activated.
Key NEUTRAL
- Causes the axle cylinder to travel into half extended position (keep pressed until
middle LED (8) is lighting / automatic mode is deactivated
- Keep key (5) simultaneously pressed while switching on: Calibration mode on
LEDs (10 pcs)
Indication of axle cylinder position
LEDs AUTO key (4 pcs)
are flashing if calibration mode is selected.

When single-line control is active, all LEDs are momentarily lighting while pressing the key (5) AUTO.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 127
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Balance
Operation
Driving on roads
Prior to on-road driving the machine shall be
completely lowered.
Activate Balance for this purpose (activate engine and
working master switch, release parking brake) and lower the
machine completely by means of pressing the key "LOWER
(2) (both lower LEDs (8) are lighting).
Manual operation:
The machine can be moved into any required position via the
four yellow buttons ("LIFT" (1), "LOWER" (2), "TILT RIGHT"
(3) and "TILT LEFT" (4)) on the control unit. The machine
then remains in this position.
Neutral position:
The "NEUTRAL" button (7) is used to set the machine to a
neutral middle position in which it remains parallel with the
ground. The button must be pressed until the machine has
reached its neutral middle position (the middle LEDs (8) light
up).
However, the machine does not adjust to the topological
features in this case.
4 6
5 1
BALANCE
AUTO
CAUTION!
If the gear is engaged or the service brake is
activated, the combine harvester is moving
forward or backward in case of being lifted or
lowered by means of the Balance control.
AUTO
8
2
DEUTZ-FAHR
Automatic mode:
7
NEUTRAL
35395
Activate:
TPress "AUTO key (5).
LED "AUTO (6) is lighting. The machine is being held in
horizontal position through automatic correction.
Deactivate:
Press "LIFT key (1) or
"LOWER key (2) or
"TILT RIGHT key (3) or
"TILT LEFT key (4) or
Press "NEUTRAL key (7).
LED "AUTO (6) extinguishes. The machine is in manual
mode.
H 128
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
Single-line and dual-line control:
5650H 5690HTS
Balance
Activation of single-line control (lateral tilt control):
The control by the longitudinal axle (longitudinal

control) is being deactivated.
Press the keys "TILT RIGHT (3) and "TILT LEFT (4)
simultaneously.
- The single-line control is activated.
Activate automatic mode by pressing the "AUTO key (5).

- Serving as a function indication all LEDs are
momentarily lighting when the automatic mode is
activated.
Activation of dual-line control

(Logitudinal and lateral tilt control):
35396
The control by the longitudinal axle (longitudinal

control) is being reactivated.
Press the keys "LIFT (1) and "LOWER (2)

simultaneously.
- The dual-line control is activated.
Activate automatic mode by pressing the "AUTO key (5).

- Serving as a function indication the LEDs are not lit
when the automatic mode is activated.
Activation of position controller
35397
4 6
5 1
BALANCE
3 8
AUTO
Activation of the fast position controller:

Press the keys "AUTO (5) and "LOWER (2)
simultaneously.
8
DEUTZ-FAHR
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Activation of the slow position controller:

Press the keys "AUTO (5) and "LIFT (1)
simultaneously.
- Status indication: In automatic mode the LED "AUTO
(6) is flashing.
AUTO
2
The fast position controller is activated as factory

default and after each calibration.
- Status indication: In automatic mode the LED "AUTO

(6) is lighting continuously.
NEUTRAL
35395
H 129
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Balance
Calibration of position controller
AUTO
The calibration of the position controller shall be

carried out prior to adjusting the EMR-D.
Start the engine (charge warning indicator must be off).
Switch on the main work switch.
Park the combine harvester so that it is level in all

directions. Set Balance to "NEUTRAL" (press button
down until machine is in a horizontal position).
Put on the parking brake (handbrake).
Press and hold the buttons "AUTO" and "NEUTRAL".
Release the parking brake (handbrake).
NEUTRAL
After 10 seconds the Balance is switching over to

calibration mode.
The four middle LEDs (9) flash.
One LED on the right and left light up continuously.
The machine begins to move.
The Balance is in calibration mode.
Press "LIFT" continuously until the machine reaches its

upper dead centre.
Press "LOWER" continuously until the machine reaches

its bottom dead centre.
Press "LIFT", "LOWER", "TILT RIGHT" and "TILT LEFT"

to adjust the machine until it is absolutely horizontal in all
directions. Use a spirit level to check the adjustment if
necessary.
Bild 22
BALANCE
AUTO
AUTO
9
DEUTZ-FAHR
H 130
NEUTRAL
Bild 23
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
Briefly press "LIFT" and "LOWER" simultaneously.
5650H 5690HTS
Balance
4 6
The data is being saved.
5 1
BALANCE
3 8
AUTO
The calibration process is finished:

- The middle LEDs (9) light up. One LED (8) lights up in
the middle of the light bands on the right and left.
- Lateral and longitudinal levelling is active.
- Automatic mode is inactive.
- The fast position controller is activated, delay cutting
angle controller 0 s
- The dual-line control is activated.
AUTO
8
If the machine was not absolutely horizontal

during calibration , it may move a few
centimetres when switching over between
AUTOMATIC and NEUTRAL.
The calibration should be repeated if the
deviation is too large.
NEUTRAL
DEUTZ-FAHR
35395
Operation of the automatic cutting angle control
11
Machine requirements:
10
All electrical leads connected
All position encoders correctly installed and set
35398
12
By factory default and after each calibration the

delay for the cutting angle controller is set to 0 s.
The automatic cutting angle control is active when the

Balance control unit is ready for operation and when the
cutting angle control has been switched on by
simultaneously pressing the keys "CUTTING ANGLE
FORWARD (11) and "CUTTING ANGLE BACKWARD (10).
Indication is done through control lamp (12).
When the machine is shut down or when the Balance
control unit is switched off, the cutting angle control will also
be deactivated and must be reactivated if required.
35430
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 131
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Balance
Manual operation:
1
35398
Can be used immediately after starting the machine and

switching on the main working switch.
Otherwise deactivate automatic cutting angle control by
simultaneously pressing "CUTTING ANGLE FORWARD" (2)
and "CUTTING ANGLE BACK" (3). Indicator (12) is off.
The cutting angle can be set as required via the buttons
"CUTTING ANGLE FORWARD" (2) and "CUTTING ANGLE
BACK" (3) on the multi-purpose lever.
Automatic operation:
12
35430
Release parking brake (handbrake).
Engage threshing section.
Set the EMR-D operating mode (pressure or position

control).
Press (1) to set automatic cutting table control to

Automatic.
Set required setpoint on EMR-D control.
Activate automatic cutting angle control by simultaneously

pressing "CUTTING ANGLE FORWARD" (2) and
"CUTTING ANGLE BACK" (3). Indicator (12) lights up.
Set the machine to a neutral position on level ground.
Adjust the cutting table so that the earlifter skids are

parallel to the ground.
Completely lower the machine and then completely raise

it again. With proper calibration and recommended tyres
the sliding surfaces of the crop lifters are aligned nearly
parallel to the ground during the entire adjusting process.
Correct the cutting table position or bearing pressure
again if necessary.
Indicator (12) flashes when the cutting table is disengaged

and automatic cutting table control (EMR-D) is switched off.
Cutting angle control remains active. The cutting angle is
also adjusted if the machine is adjusted via the Balance
control (e.g. for manoeuvering on a slope).
If the cutting angle is changed (e.g. when disengaging the
cutting table), the new value upon activation of the automatic
system is adopted as the new default. The adjustment must
be repeated.
Automatic cutting angle control must be

deactivated in order to lower the cutting
mechanism onto the transport cart!
H 132
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Balance
10
Calibration / adjust delay for automatic

cutting angle control
11
Calibration of cutting angle control limit positions

Press the keys "CUTTING ANGLE FORWARD (10) and
"CUTTING ANGLE BACK (11) simultaneously and keep
pressed for at least 10 seconds, until the control lamp (12)
flashes fast.
35398
4 6
5 1
BALANCE
3 8
AUTO
Adjusting the response delay of the cutting angle

controller
AUTO
8
2
The cutting angle adjustment drives to both end positions and

stores the values. During operation, the cylinders will be
electrically deactivated just before they reach the mechanical
end position.
It is recommended to work with a response delay of

2 seconds.
NEUTRAL
DEUTZ-FAHR
35395
Delay in
seconds
0
1
2
3
Press the keys

simultaneously to select:
NEUTRAL and LIFT
NEUTRAL and LOWER
NEUTRAL and TILT LEFT
NEUTRAL and TILT RIGHT
(7 and 1)
(7 and 2)
(7 and 4)
(7 and 3)
The selected setting will be memorized until the next change

is carried out.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 133
H
Service
Training
2
3
8
10
11
H 134
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Balance with automatic cutting angle control
1 Control cabinet
2 Multifunction handle
3 Balance control unit
4 Status light for automatic cutting angle control
5 Pilot control unit MO for Balance hydraulic system
6 Control unit for cutting angle control
7 Angular rotation transmitter Balance axle
8 Control valve block left
M1 Connector without colour coding sw (black)
M3 -
Connector rt (red)
M2 -
Connector bl (blue)
9 Control valve block right

M4 -
Connector without colour coding sw (black)
M6 -
Connector rt (red)
M5 -
Connector bl (blue)
10 Balance Control Unit

Observe mounting position:
- Adhesive label with arrow for driving direction located at the inner housing opposite to the relay.
- Observe the marking of CON1 and of CON2 and of the slot.
- The connectors CON1 and CON2 must not be interchanged
11 Angular rotation transmitter for cutting angle (mounted on the right side at the feed passage).
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 135
H
Service
Training
2.2
2.1
30
5
3.1
30
91
,3
3
1
26
4.1
5
4.1
H 136
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Balance
Rotation angle transmitter - Balance axle
The rotation angle tansmitters are mounted on the left and right side at the cross member and are connected each with
the final drive by means of a steering rod. When mounting the transmitter the punch mark (4,1) on the shaft must point at
the plug-in connection.
The ball head (3.1) for the steering rod must be screwed in at the final drive in the depicted position. Final drive is in
neutral position.
1
Balance axle
Final drive bearing tube
2.1 lifted position

2.2 lowered position
3
Steering rod
3.1 Ball head for steering rod at final drive

4
Rotation angle transmitter
4.1 Centre punch on the transmitter shaft

5
Clamping lever
Testing / Setting
Direction of Travel
Voltage supply
Left
8.5 V 5 %
Right
8.5 V 5 %
Vehicle raised to top end-stop

Signal voltage
6.3 V
2.1 V
Vehicle lowered to bottom end-stop

Signal voltage
2.1 V
6.3 V
Use test plug (1603 1484) to test the sensors.

Basic setting
Fully lower the Balance system (the tilt adjusting cylinders must be fully retracted; if necessary change to the
calibration mode).
Set the steering rod (3) to a length of 261 mm
Release the clamping lever (5)
Set the rotation angle transmitter to the specified signal voltage.
Angle transmitter for cutting angle

When mounting the transmitter the punch mark (6) on the shaft must point at the plug-in connection.
Precision adjustment of the transmitter by means of twisting turning the shaft inside of clamping lever (5):
- Signal voltage approx. 2,1 V with retracted cutting angle adapter
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 137
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Balance
Circuit diagram power supply Balance II and cutting angle control
A19
Control unit Balance II
K59
Relay cutting angle upwards
K67
ground at D+
K75, K76 Relay power supply Balance II

K80
Relay cutting angle downwards
S54
Push-button switch cutting angle up/down
S55
Hand brake switch
Y11
Solenoid valve cutting angle upwards
Y12
Solenoid valve cutting angle downwards
Relays K59, K80 must not be plugged when equipped with Balance.
H 138
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
hrt
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
hrt
hbl
SW2
87a
hrt
30
4
85
87
86
87a
8
85
dgr
2
87
87a
87a
4
4
X512.17
3
Hand brake switch
5
K76
S55
87
sw/gr
1
1
K75
F15
15
S54
2
86
86
X9
4
3
Cutting angle up
87a
30
Light at D+
Y11
hbl
85
X30
br
8
5
K67
RT3
con2.35
X92.35
GND
87
ge/rt
X29
Threshing mechanism on
rs/ws
15b
X30
K59
Working master switch on
con1.9
X91.9
Solenoid valve cutting
angle up
X30
ws/bl
15a
tr
hrt
30
con2.18
X92.18
+UB
bl/sw
bl/rt
X29
ws/sw
86
X30
K80
85
con2.5
X92.5
Push-button cutting
angle up
vi/ws
bg/ws
dgr
X9
con2.23
X92.23
Push-button cutting
angle down
con1.8
Solenoid valve cutting X91.8
angle down
A19
Cutting angle down
Y12
Service
Training
30
15
D+
F40
15
3
3
1
30
30
86
87
85
D2
2
D3
ws/bl
ws/sw
bl/rt
ge/rt
.19 .18
X192
Multifunction lever
H 139
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Connector pin assignment Balance II with automatic cutting angle control
signal
colour
signification
Connector CON1
signification
colour
signal
17
control unit 12V
bg
12V
16
control unit R3
gr
MUX
15
control unit R2
vi
MUX
14
control unit. R1
rs
MUX
Pin No.
18
35
MUX
rt
control unit SP1
34
MUX
bl-ws
control unit SP2
33
MUX
gn-ge
control unit SP3
32
MUX
ws
control unit SP4
31
MUX
sw-ws
control unit. SP5
30
13
12
MUX
gr-ws
0V
sw
control unit SP6
29
control unit GND
28
11
10
0V
br-ws
12V/0V
27
GND MVs SW
MV cutting angle upwards rs-ws
12V/0V
MV cutting angle downwards vi-ws
12V/0V
Status cutting angle auto or-ws
12V/0V
6*
Freq. longitudinal slope gr-sw
26
2k
25
24
23
(Pin 11 EMR-D)
5
Programming
connector
22
rt
sw
RS232-TXD
21
bl
RS232-RXD
20
br
RS232-GND
Boot
---
3
2
19
1
H 140
down = 2000 Hz, up = 392,5 Hz
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Vehicle ground cable

Rotation angle transmitter for cutting angle
Rotation angle transmitter balance axle left
Rotation angle transmitter balance axle right
Solenoid valves M4 - M6 right
Solenoid valves M1 - M3 left
Connector X28 - X31 at cabinet bottom
Programming connector
Resistor 2 kOhm
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H05VV-F 2x1-3200
br
bl
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 141
56-200
1 gn-ge
21 20 19
9 24 22
4 3 2 1
H05VV-F 3G1-3200
br
gn-ge
bl
H05VV-F 3G1-1250
br
gn-ge
bl
3 2 1
H05VV-F 3G1-1250
br
gn-ge
bl
28
M6
rt
FLYY 6x1-1550
br
gn
29
M5
bl
ws
ge
30
M4
sw
sw
rt
Masse
CON 2
31
2 1
M3
rt
FLYY 6x1-1550
br
gn
32
M2
bl
ws
ge
33
M1
sw
sw
rt
26
3 2 1
lflex-100/03 25x0,75-4000
(Lapp 0010034 )
rt-ws
gr-ws
18 35 5 23
tr
bl-sw
bg-ws
ro
6 34
gr
tr-ws
sw-ws
gr-ws
bg
sw
bl-ws
gn-ge
ws
6 27
7 14 15 9 8 16
X 29
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
br-ws
or-ws
rt-ws
vi-ws
bl
or
8
Service
Training
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Connector pin assignment Balance II with automatic cutting angle control
signal
colour
0V
br
signification
Connector CON2
GND
bl
M0
34
0V/12V
sw
M1
33
0V/12V
ws
M2
32
0V/12V
br
M3
31
0V/12V
sw
M4
30
0V/12V
ws
M5.
29
br
M6
colour
signal
18
+UB
tr
12V
17
M0.GND
or
0V
16
M1.GND
rt
0V
15
M2.GND
ge
0V
14
M3.GND
gn
0V
13
M4.GND
rt
0V
12
M5.GND
ge
0V
11
M6.GND
gn
0V
angle transmitter cutting angle br
8V
angle transmitter feed passage tr-ws
2,4V...7,1
push button switch SW up
0V/12V
35
0V/12V
0V/12V
signification
Pin No.
28
10
27
9
0V/5V
rt-ws EMR-D-LED green
26
8
25
7
2V...6V
gn-ge angle transmitter SW signal
24
0V12V
bg-ws push button switch SW down 23
0V
bl angle transmitter SW GND
22
br angle transmitter left VCC
21
bl-sw
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2V...6V
gn-ge angle transmitter left signal
20
0V
bl angle transmitter left GND
19
angle transmitter right VCC br
8V
angle transmitter right signal gn-ge
2V...6V
angle transmitter right GND bl
0V
Vehicle ground cable

Rotation angle transmitter for cutting angle
Rotation angle transmitter balance axle left
Rotation angle transmitter balance axle right
Solenoid valves M4 - M6 right
Solenoid valves M1 - M3 left
Connector X28 - X31 at cabinet bottom
Programming connector
Resistor 2 kOhm
H 142
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H05VV-F 2x1-3200
br
bl
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 143
56-200
1 gn-ge
21 20 19
9 24 22
4 3 2 1
H05VV-F 3G1-3200
br
gn-ge
bl
H05VV-F 3G1-1250
br
gn-ge
bl
3 2 1
H05VV-F 3G1-1250
br
gn-ge
bl
28
M6
rt
FLYY 6x1-1550
br
gn
29
M5
bl
ws
ge
30
M4
sw
sw
rt
Masse
31
CON 2
2 1
M3
rt
FLYY 6x1-1550
br
gn
32
M2
bl
ws
ge
33
M1
sw
sw
rt
26
3 2 1
lflex-100/03 25x0,75-4000
(Lapp 0010034 )
rt-ws
gr-ws
18 35 5 23
tr
bl-sw
bg-ws
ro
6 34
gr
tr-ws
sw-ws
gr-ws
bg
sw
bl-ws
gn-ge
ws
6 27
7 14 15 9 8 16
X 29
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
br-ws
or-ws
rt-ws
vi-ws
bl
or
8
Service
Training
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Balance
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause / Remedy
No display on control panel
Engine not running

Handbrake on
Threshing main switch not ON
Fuse No. 40 (15 A) blown
Microrelay K67, K75 or K76 defective
Balance "hunting" or in constant motion
Rotation angle transmitter incorrectly set or steering rod bent

Dirt in valve seat, causing lowering and therefore
constant readjustment
Uncontrolled movements
Repeat calibration procedure

Check setting of rotation angle transmitter
Balance rises on one side, lowers on one side
Check the setting of the rotation angle transmitter and

check that the steering rods are correctly fitted
Control panel display indicates end-stop although

the tilt adjusting cylinders are not fully extended/retracted
The rotation angle transmitter are out of adjustment.

heck setting.
Balance no longer extends/retracts fully
Incorrect calibration values have been stored

(calibration error).
Repeat calibration procedure
Various push-buttons and LEDs on the control panel

are not functioning
Faulty control panel.

Faulty cable connection between the microcontroller
and the control panel
Balance does not remain longitudinally and laterally

horizontal after calibration
Check that the control unit (microcontroller) is mounted

parallel to the drive axle in the longitudinal and
transverse direction.
Compensate with spacing washers.
H 144
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
Notes
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 145
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Throughput Monitor (Grain Loss Monitor) / On-board Computer
LH-865 / 1000
1
1.1
2
3
4
4.1
4.2
5
6
7
8
9
10
Display unit grain loss monitor

Wiring harness (5-core) to control cabinet
LH-1000 on-board computer
Light sensor (mounted on cab roof)
Straw walker sensors (plate sensor)
Wiring harness (3-core) from Straw walker sensor, left
Wiring harness (3-core) from Straw walker sensor, right
Pulse generator, feed passage
Sieve pan sensor (pipe sensor)
Magnet (2x) at feed passage
Junction box with circuit board
Wheel sensor
Control cabinet
Function check throughput monitor

Switch on the ignition.
Tap the left and right straw walker sensors in turn. The needle for "straw walker grain loss" must move. Tap the tubular
sensor mounted on the sieve box. The needle for "sieve box grain loss" must move.
Connector pin assignment of distributing

circuit board measured values
Terminal strip I
No. Cable
Function
colour
Connector pin assignment for display unit

Pin No
Cable colour Function
Measuring
white
Supply for sensors +
value
brown
Power supply +
green
Power supply -
yellow
Signal wheel sensor
grey
Brightness sensor
black 1
Power supply -
0V
black 2
Power supply +
11V
black 4
Signal wheel sensor
11V, 1.5V
green/yellow Signal sieve pan sensor
black 3
Signal straw walker sensor 8.3V .... 6V
pink
Brightness sensor
blue
wheel sensor
11V
blue
Signal straw walker sensor
brown
wheel sensor
0V
red
Signal sieve pan sensor
green/yellow Sieve pan sensor +
11V
black 2
Signal sieve pan sensor
8.3V .... 6V
10
black 1
Sieve pan sensor -
0V
8.3V .... 6V
Terminal strip II
No Cable
Function
colour
Measuring
value
1
2
black 1
Straw walker sensor 1 -
0V
black 2
Signal straw walker sensor 1 8.3V .... 6V
green/yellow Straw walker sensor 1 +
11V
black 1
Straw walker sensor 2 -
0V
black 2
Signal straw walker sensor 2 8.3V .... 6V
green/yellow Straw walker sensor 2 +
11V
8
9
10
H 146
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
H0508-2
H0518-1
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H0520-2
H 147
H
Service
Training
4
2
33734
7
5
56-202
31536
H 148
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Adjustments at grain loss monitor
The travel of the pointer for the grain loss indication through sieve pan (3) and straw walker (4) is adjusted with rotary
knobs (1, 2). Depending on the cutting mechanism width, the rotary knobs are to be adjusted such that the indicator
needle points to the transitional green/red area of the display field indicating that the grain loss is still acceptable.
Depending on the crop, the grain loss sensor sensitivity can be adjusted in three steps:
low sensitivity for big grains like beans or maize

medium sensitivity for cereal
high sensitivity for small grains like rape, mustard, linseed
Corresponding dot markings (7) at the sensor casing ease proper positioning of the switch.
Sieve pan sensor: Adjustment through toggle switch (5)
Straw walker sensors: Adjustment through rotary switch (6)
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 149
H
Service
Training
4
7
30672
8
30768
10
H0519
9
10
10
56-202
H 150
31534
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
On-board Computer LH 1000
Key functions:
1
Working time (hours and minutes)
Hectaremeter (partial count)
Hectaremeter (total count)
Speed (km/h)
Working with input in cm
Wheel circumference input in cm
Resetting of counters (consumption of hectares and time), input of 0
For proper functioning of the work computer the wheel sensor (9) at the rear wheel and the pulse transmitter (8) at the
feed passage are required. The pulse transmitter must be adjusted such that both magnets (10) overlap the face side of
the transmitter with the cutting mechanism lifted.
The clearance between magnet and sensor should be adjusted to 5 8 mm.
Cable pin assignment

Item 6: blue, power supply 12V
Item 5: brown, ground
Item 4: Sensor input wheel sensor
Item 2: Sensor input pulse transmitter feed passage
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 151
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
The work computer is equipped with 3 function sets
Function set 1:
Time counting, hectare counting, speed

(Working width and wheel circumference must be entered beforehand)
1. Time function
Starting the timer
Press this key to start the timer (the colon starts flashing)
The on-board computer will now start counting the elapsed time (hours and minutes). If you select another
function, the timer will continue running in the background. This key can be pressed at any time to stop and
restart the timer.
2. Hectaremeter
Hectares per field "partial area"
ha
Press this key to display the area worked in hectares. The area is indicated with two decimal
places in the range from 0 99.99 ha and with 1 decimal place in the range from 100 999.9 ha.
Hectares per field "total area"
ha
Press this key to display the total area worked in hectares. The area is indicated with two decimal
places in the range from 0 99.99 ha, with 1 decimal place in the range from 100 999.9 ha and
without decimals in the range from 1000 9999 ha.
This function is used to totalize the complete area worked.
3. Speed indicator
Press this key to display the forward speed in km/h.
kmh
If the hectaremeter is stopped while the speed indicator is displayed, the letter "r" is displayed in
front of the speed.
Function Set 2: Odometer, wheel revolutions

1. Odometer
Basic setting
ha
Press this key
Then press this key followed by
9
ha
H 152
Enter
When you press this key again the distance covered will be displayed in metres.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
2. Wheel revolutions
This function is mainly used to count the number of wheel revolutions when determining and entering the
wheel diameter.
Basic setting
kmh
Press this key
Then press this key followed by:
9
kmh
Enter
When you press this key again the distance covered will be displayed in metres.
Function Set 3: Sensortest

First enter a working width of 8888 by pressing the following keys in the order shown below:
Then select the timer function:
Press this key to select the timer function.
The display will now read

"h", if the wheel sensor is activated
"r", if the pulse transmitter of the feed passage is activated
Note: the letter "r" is also displayed when the hectaremeter is stopped.
Error message
The message "FEJL" appears in the display when the supply voltage is less than 12 Volt.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H 153
H
Service
Training
Notes
H 154
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
Appendix A
Wiring Diagrams
5650H 5690HTS
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
HA 1
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Appendix A
Wiring layouts
HA 2
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Appendix A
Table of contents
running
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
designation
wiring diagram
wiring diagram
wiring diagram
wiring diagram
wiring diagram
cable harness engine
cable harness engine
cable harness
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
topic
control console
control console
Steering column
cabin
cabin
Engine 5670
Engine 5680/90
Control valves work hydraulics
drawing No.
1605 2333 page
1605 2333 page
1605 2333 page
1605 2333 page
1605 2333 page
11
12
41
42
HA 3
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Wiring layouts
1. Wiring diagram control console
H39
H40
H41
H42
H43
H44
S38
S40
S41
S42
S43
S44
S49
S66
S67
HA 4
1605 2333 page 1 1
All-wheel on off
All-wheel differential lock
Deflectors left centre
Deflectors left outside
Deflectors right centre
Deflectors right outside
Partial width change-over with TERIS/TCS
All-wheel on-off
Colza cutting mechanism on-off
Reverse cutting mechanism
Grain tank interior light
Deflector adjustment
Switch straw guide plate
Grain tank extension lift lower
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
2333_1-1
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
HA 5
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Wiring layouts
2. Wiring diagram control console
1605 2333 page 1 2
H34 Error lamp EEC

H35 Indicator light chopper operation
H36 Indicator light cutting angle automatic
H61 Indicatorlight automatic wind system
S2
S5
Throttle control half-/full throttle
S33 Switch hazard warning signal flasher

S68 Switch mirror adjustment
HA 6
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
2333_1-2
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
HA 7
H
Service
Training
2333_5
HA 8
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Wiring layouts
3. Wiring diagram steering column
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
1605 2333
page 5
HA 9
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Wiring layouts
4. Wiring diagram cabin
S6
1605 2333 page 4 1
Working lights front rear
S34 Light switch

S35 Change-over switch dipped beam main beam top down
S36 Wind screen wiper
S37 Revolving light
HA 10
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
2333_4-1
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
HA 11
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Wiring layouts
5. Wiring diagram cabin
HA 12
1605 2333 page 4 2
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
HA-015
X513.3
X513.4
X513.5
X513.6
X513.7
X513.8
X513.16
X513.15
X513.14
X513.1
X513.2
0,34 sw
0,34 ws
0,34 vi
0,34 bl
0,34 gr-ro
0,34 ro
-5000
-5000
-5000
-5000
-5000
-5000
0,34 gr
0,34 ge
0,34 gn
0,34 br
0,34 rt
-5000
-5000
-5000
-5000
-5000
3
4
5
6
7
8
16
15
14
1
2
HA-014
26-13
25-12
24-11
23-10
..
R3
R2
R1
3
22-9
21-8
20-7
19-6
18-5
17-4
16-3
15-2
14-1
SP1
SP2
SP3
SP4
SP5
SP6
12V
GND
12 11 10
15 14 13
HA-013
18 17 16
21 20 19
2333_4-2
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
HA 13
H
Service
Training
X2
X1
X3
X4
X21
X22
GE
WS
DGN
SW
HGR
DBL
20
19
21
42
X1
16
43
HR
T
X1
SW
X1
17
40
WS
GE
X1
41
18
3
15
14
4
13
5
6
12
7
11
8
10
HA-001
HA 14
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5670
6. Cable harness engine
Speed monitoring elevator head
Connector at engine frame, X140 X143
Minimum pressure switch air filter
Junction box grain loss sensors
Ground collective terminal at engine frame
br
Reverse gear buzzer
vi/ge
ws/bl
Transducer fuel tank level
vi/ws
Speed sensor straw walker
ws/ge
10
Temperature sensor hydraulic oil
vi
11
Starter terminal 50
sw
12
Temperature sensor cylinder head
bl/gn
13
Temperature switch cylinder head
bl/sw
14
Oil pressure switch
bl/ge
15
Temperature sensor engine oil
sw/vi
16
Switch at tensioning pulley cooling ventilator belt
bl/rt
17
Generator terminal B+, D+, W
rt, bl, or
18
Servo motor threshing drum variator
sw/ge, sw/gn
19
Screw type terminal B+ at control cabinet
rt
20
Connector X1 X4, X21, X22 at control cabinet
21
Terminating resistor 120 Ohm (pin 5-6) for CAN bus line
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
br/ws, br
gn, br
HA 15
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
7. Cable harness engine
Speed monitoring elevator head
2.
Connector at engine frame, X140 X143
3.
Minimum pressure switch air filter
4.
Junction box grain loss sensors
5.
Ground collective terminal at engine frame
br
6.
Temperature sensor/switch engine oil
sw/vi, vi/gn
7.
Reverse gear buzzer
vi/ge
8.
ws/bl
9.
Transducer fuel tank level
vi/ws
10.
Speed sensor straw walker shaft
ws/ge
11.
Temperature sensor hydraulic oil
vi
12.
Generator terminal B+, D+, W
rt, bl, or
13.
Oil pressure switch
bl/ge
14.
Temperature sensor/switch coolant
bl/gn, bl/sw
15.
Starter terminal 50
sw
16.
Servo motor threshing drum variator
sw/ge, sw/gn
17.
Screw type terminal B+ at control cabinet
rt
18.
Connector X1 X4, X21, X22 at control cabinet
19.
Terminating resistor 120 Ohm (pin 5-6) for CAN bus line
HA 16
br/ws, br
gn, br
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
X2
X1
X3
X4
X21
X22
GE
WS
DGN
SW
HGR
DBL
18
17
19
1
42
43
HR
X1 T
X1
SW
X1
WS
16
40
GE
X1
41
15
14
4
5
6
13
7
12
8
11
9
10
HA-002
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
HA 17
H
Service
Training
X9
X25
X10
DGR
HGN
ELB
10
RT
1
BR
2
GE
9
BL
8
SW
3
GR
7
GN
6
OR
4
WS
5
VI
14
BL
13
BR
HA-003
11
RT
d
12
SW
SW 12
11 RT
RT
10
BR
BL
GE
SW 8
GR
GN
WS
OR
VI
d
11 RT
BR
13
14 BL
12 SW
HA-012
HA-004
HA 18
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
8. Cable harness for control valves work hydraulics
Connector X9, X10, X25 at control cabinet
The 2-pin connectors for the control valve solenoids are marked with cable binders in different colours.
Control block small consumers
Control valve for cutting mechanism bank: In case of Balance combine harvesters this valve is located separately
next to the control block.
Control valve cutting mechanism lift lower
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
HA 19
H
Service
Training
Notes
HA 20
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Appendix B

Operating Instructions
5650H - 5690HTS
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
HB 1
11
12
4
13
Cal
Diag
Setup
10
The key functions are only active when the main

work switch is on.
35402
HB 2
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

No
Controls
Function/Operation
Screen: Select the main screen here.
Status indicators for

Grain tank clutch engaged
Threshing section clutch engaged
Cutting table clutch engaged
Blank field = Disengaged

Flashing symbol =
Clutch currently engaging
Symbol = Engaged
35402
35402
Swivel grain tank discharge pipe in/out:

Press key I:
The grain tank pipe swings out. Press one of the keys again to stop
the pipe movement.
Press key 0: The grain tank pipe swings in. Press one of the keys again to stop
the pipe movement.
Pay attention to the indicator "grain tank pipe released" on the central
instrument cluster or on the TERIS/TCS screen.
The grain tank clutch for emptying the grain tank is engaged with the pedal
switch. If the grain tank pipe is fully retracted while the grain tank clutch is
engaged, the grain tank clutch will be automatically disengaged.
35402
Engaging/disengaging the threshing section:

Key I: Engage threshing mechanism.
Key 0: Disengage threshing mechanism (if the cutting table is activated, it too will
be disengaged).
To engage the threshing section, the main work switch must be switched
on, and the engine must be running at slow idling speed.
If the straw chopper is activated (straw guide plate in the chopping
position), when the threshing key is pressed, the straw chopper will
automatically be engaged first, followed by the threshing section. On
disengaging, the threshing section is disengaged first, followed by the
straw chopper.
35402
Engaging/disengaging the cutting table

Key I: Engage the cutting table.
Key 0: Disengage the cutting table.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
To engage the clutch, the threshing section must be activated.
HB 3
11
12
4
13
Cal
Diag
Setup
10

work switch is on.
35402
HB 4
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

No
Controls
Function/Operation
Press 1 x Concave clearances: Open the "Set Clearances" menu to set the
concave clearances for the threshing drum and turbo separator (the
main work switch must be switched on).
35402
Press 2x Sieve adjustment: Open the "Set Clearances" menu to adjust the
sieves (the main work switch must be switched on).
Concave rapid opening: Hold down the key for 3 seconds. See section on
"Concave rapid opening".
Return to main screen/Load settings.
35402
Open the "Speed Monitor" menu to set the speed warning limits for the tailings
elevator, straw walker shaft and grain tank auger.
With TERIS/TCS, this function is inactive. Activate the function with the
terminal.
Return to main screen/Load settings.
Setting the winnowing fan speed:

(To set the fan speed, the threshing section must be in operation).
Setup
Setup
Setup
35402
key:
key:
Increase fan speed (indicator at (13))

Decrease fan speed (indicator at (13))
Setup Menu:
Hold down the Setup + and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds. The "Setup
Menu" for setting the language appears. See the section on "Language Selection".
Only use the Setup menu to set the language version. All other
functions are intended for customer service only.
35065
35066
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
35402
HB 5
11
12
4
13
Cal
Diag
Setup
10

work switch is on.
35402
HB 6
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

No
Controls
Function/Operation
Threshing drum speed adjustment:

(to adjust the drum, the threshing section must be activated).
Diag
Diag
Diag
key:
key:
Increase threshing drum speed (indicated by 11))

Decrease threshing drum speed (indicated by (11))
The diagnosis menu is only intended for customer service.
35402
10
If the diagnosis menu is selected inadvertently, it can be closed by

pressing keys Cal + and
simultaneously.
Reel speed adjustment:

(to adjust the pick-up reel speed, the cutting table must be in operation)
Manual speed adjustment:
Cal + key:
Increase reel speed
Cal
key:
Decrease reel speed
Cal
Activate/deactivate automatic reel speed adjustment:

Press Cal + and
keys simultaneously.
(see section on "Setting automatic reel speed adjustment".)
35402
When automatic reel speed adjustment is activated, the ratio of the reel
speed to the travel speed can be adjusted by pressing the Cal + and
keys simultaneously.
Calibration menu:
Hold down keys Cal
menu" will appear.
11
and
simultaneously for 3 seconds. The "Calibration
Threshing drum speed display (rpm)

35402
12
Travel speed display (km/h)

35402
13
Winnowing fan speed display (rpm)

35402
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
HB 7

System start and shutdown
CAUTION
When switching on the ignition, the clutch
servomotors may move, because the
clutches are automatically driven to the
disengaged position.
The Commander Control 2000 is switched on with the

ignition. Two audible signals are sounded, and the start
screen is displayed.
On starting the engine, the system is restarted.
35402
35405
The bottom two lines of the start screen show

the installed software version with the release
date.
The main screen is then displayed, and Command

Control 2000 is ready for operation.
If the battery charge lamp is lit or if the message

"Low battery" is displayed, the Commander
Control 2000 is not ready for operation.
If necessary, briefly increase the engine speed.
The Commander Control 2000 is switched off by

switching off the ignition.
35429
HB 8
35402
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

Selecting the language /
Setting the view angle
To set the desired language and view angle, open the
Setup menu.
Hold down the Setup + and
simultaneously for 3 seconds.
keys (1)
The Setup menu must only be used to set the

language version and the view angle. All
other functions are intended for customer
service only.
Cal
Diag
Setup
Language selection
When the Setup menu is displayed, the highlighted cursor
bar is on "Language" (if not, select the "Language" line
with the Diag (2) keys).
Select the desired language with the Setup (1) keys.
35429
35402
Save the selection by pressing the Cal + and

keys (3) simultaneously.
The selected language is activated immediately.
The main screen is displayed again.
Setting the view angle

Language:
Select the view angle with the Diag (2) keys.
English
Front tyres:
Radial 800/65R32
Change the view angle with the Setup (1) keys.
Turbo separator:
Save the selection by pressing the Cal + and

keys (3) simultaneously.
The change is activated immediately.
yes
View angle:
Cal
Diag
Setup
35402
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
In the Setup menu, if more than 10 seconds

elapse without any user input, the system
automatically returns to the main screen. In this
case, the settings entered while the Setup menu
was open will not be saved.
35406
HB 9

Setting the speed warning limits
With TERIS/TCS, this function is inactive. Activate

it on the terminal.
The speeds of the returns elevator, straw walker shaft

and grain tank delivery auger are continuously monitored.
A minimum warning limit can be set for each speed. If the
speed falls to the set warning limit, the audible and visual
alarm is activated.
The warning limit can be set to a speed reduction of
between 5 % and 50 % (relative to the nominal speed).
To set the speed warning limits, open the "Speed
monitor" menu in the main screen.
Cal
Diag
Setup
Press key (1).
35402
The Speed Monitor menu appears.
Setting the warning limits:

Grain tank delivery auger keys (3)
Straw walker shaft
keys (4)
Returns elevator
keys (5)
Speed Monitor
Deactivating the alarm:

Set the warning limit to the bottom value, i.e. 50 %
reduction.
Hold down the
key for 5 seconds.
The selected warning will be deactivated, and the symbol
appears next to the display bar (as shown in the
illustration opposite for the delivery auger).
Activating the alarm:
Press the + key.
Cal
Diag
Select each warning limit as required.
Setup
Saving the values:

Press key (1). The main screen is displayed.
In the absence of any user input for a period of

more than 10 seconds, the system automatically
returns to the main screen. In this case, any
settings previously entered will not be saved.
To quit the menu without saving the values,
press key (2).
35402
HB 10
35407
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

Setting the automatic reel speed
control
(optional)
The automatic reel speed control enables the reel speed
to be adapted automatically to the travel speed (ground
drive speed).
Activating/deactivating:
Press the Cal + and
(1) keys simultaneously.
After switching on automatic reel speed control, the

symbol
appears next to the reel speed symbol to
indicate automatic reel speed control mode (2).
Cal
Diag
Standby/active mode:
The automatic reel speed control is in standby mode if
the symbol (2) remains continuously lit. If the symbol is
flashing, automatic control is active.
At full throttle in the operating range from 2.0 to 9.0 km/h,
the automatic reel speed control automatically switches
from standby mode to active mode.
Setup
1
Adjusting the reel speed ratio:
Switch on the automatic reel speed control.
35402
Increase the speed ratio
Cal
Decrease the speed ratio
Cal
key
key
When adjusting the ratio, the control is automatically

switched to standby mode. Ten seconds after completing
the adjustment process, the system automatically returns
to active mode with the new ratio of reel speed to travel
speed.
35409
When automatic reel speed control is

deactivated, the reel speed is directly adjusted
with the Cal + and
keys.
Displaying the adjustment process:

Manual or automatic adjustment of the reel speed is
indicated by arrows above or below the symbol for
automatic reel speed control (2). If the arrow points
upwards (3), the reel speed is increasing, and if it points
downwards (4) the speed is being reduced.
35411
35410
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
HB 11

Setting the concave clearances
Caution
The servomotors and linkage mechanisms
move are moving parts.
The clearances of the concave and separator concave
can be set in this menu.
Precondition: the main work switch must be on.
To set the concave clearances in the main screen, open
the "Set clearances" menu.
Cal
Diag
Press key (2).
Setup
35402
The "Set clearances" menu is displayed.

The clearance is set in discrete increments (steps).
Set clearances
Selecting clearances:
Turbo separator concave
Threshing concave, rear
Threshing concave, front
Keys (3) 5 steps

Keys (4) 15 steps
Keys (5) 15 steps
Saving values:
Press key (2). The adjustment process is started, and on
completion the main menu is displayed.
Cal
Diag
Setup
35402
HB 12
If the selected settings are in the prohibited

range, they are automatically corrected to the
permitted minimum/maximum value when saved
(otherwise the threshing drum would strike the
concave).
In the absence of any user input for a period of
more than 10 seconds, the main screen
automatically reappears. In this case, any
press key (1).
35407
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
If you attempt to adjust the clearances while

adjustment is prohibited (main work switch off),
the following message appears on the screen:
Set clearances
Clearance
adjustment is
prohibited.
35402
Switch back to the main screen with key

(1) or (2).
Rapid opening of threshing

concave/separator concave
CAUTION
Servomotors and linkage mechanisms are
moving parts.
The rapid open function immediately opens the threshing
concave and separator concave (e.g. to prevent blockage
of the threshing mechanism).
Activating the rapid opening function:
Hold down key (2) for three seconds.
The "Rapid opening" information window is displayed.
Cal
Diag
Setup
Rapid opening
of thr. drum and
Turbosep. active
35412
35402
When the opening process has been successfully

completed, the information window "Rapid opening is
terminated" is displayed.
Rapid opening
is
terminated.
35413
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
HB 13

Resetting rapid opening:
Briefly press the Setup
or
key (3).
The previous settings for the threshing and separator

concaves will be restored.
Error message:
Interruption of rapid opening is indicated by the "Error"
window:
Error
Cal
Diag
Setup
Rapid opening not

complete.
Engine fault!
35414
35402
HB 14
Possible causes of failure:

Clogging/fouling by threshed crop.
Servo drives not running smoothly.
Switch off the ignition. Remedy the fault and repeat the
calibration procedure. If the error message is displayed
again, call a specialist workshop.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

Sieve adjustment
The top and bottom sieves are adjusted in a single
window.
Activating sieve adjustment:
Press key (2) briefly twice.
35402
CAUTION
The servomotors are moving parts.
35429
The "Set clearances" window is displayed.

The sieve clearances are set in millimetres, with a range
of 1 to 14 mm.
Set clearances
Setting the clearances:

Top sieve
Cal keys (4)
Bottom sieve Setup keys (3)
Saving values:
Press key (2). The adjustment process is started, and
then the main menu appears (if the gap has been
reduced, the sieves are first closed further before being
driven outwards to the new setting).
Cal
Diag
Setup
35402
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
In the absence of any input for a period of more

than 10 seconds, the system automatically
press key (1).
35415
HB 15

Calibration
All calibrations are carried out in the factory

before delivery.
Recalibration is necessary e.g. after:

Fitting other sieves
Changing the mechanical basic setting
Replacing servomotors
Reinstalling software
Cal
Diag
After changing the sieves several times, check

the sieve setting and if necessary calibrate.
Recommendation: carry out a sieve calibration
at least once a year.
Setup
To open the calibration menu:

Hold down the Cal + and
keys (1)
1
CAUTION
The servomotors move during the calibration
processes.
35402
The "Calibration menu" is displayed.

Selecting the function:
Calibration menu
Mark the line of the desired function with the Diag

and
keys (2).
Sieves
Sieves
Straw guide plate
Spreader plates
Concave clearances
Open the selected function with the Setup + or

keys (3).
The calibration menu of the selected function is
displayed.
Cal
Diag
Setup
35402
HB 16
The Calibration menu or any specific calibration

menu can be closed at any time by pressing the
Cal + and
keys (1) simultaneously. Any
calibration that has started will be aborted.
In the absence of any input for a period of more
than 10 seconds, the system automatically
35415
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

Calibrating sieve adjustment
(Electric sieve adjustment optional)
CAUTION
Park the combine and secure it against
rolling.
The servomotors move during calibration.
5
33992
Preconditions:
The basic sieve setting must be correct.
The engine must be switched off with the ignition on.
The sieve box light must be switched on with button
(3).
The sieves must be cleaned.
Calibration menu
Sieves
Sieves
Straw guide plate

Spreader plates
Concave clearances
Always make sure that the louvres of the left and

right-hand sieve are opened the same distance.
If necessary, slightly modify the basic setting.
Calibration:
keys (1)
The "Calibration" (6) menu is displayed
In the "Calibration menu", select "Sieves"

(with the Diag + and
keys).
Press the Setup
Sieve adj. calib.
Calib. Procedure
1.Open sieves
2.Close sieves
position and
both keys.
3.Close sieves
position and
both keys.
to 14 mm
press
to 0 mm*
press
35417
Sieve adj. calib.
Top sieve
Potentiometer
Cal. min.
Cal. max.
2.02V
2.02V
6.96V
Sieve adj. calib.
2.02V
2.02V
6.96V
Bottom sieve
Potentiometer
Cal. min.
Cal. max.
2.45V
2.45V
6.21V
35419
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
or
keys.
The "Sieve adj. calib." window (7) appears.
Top sieve calibration:

Fully open the top sieve with key (1).
Close the top sieve with key (2) until the sieve
aperture is 14 mm.
Hold down keys (1) and (2) simultaneously for at least
1 second.
Fully close the top sieve with key (2),
and then open approx. 0.5 1 mm.
1 second.
The calibration values of the top sieve appear in
the window (8).
35418
Top sieve
Potentiometer
Cal. min.
Cal. max.
Bottom sieve calibration:

Fully open the bottom sieve with key (4).
Close the top sieve with key (5) until the sieve
aperture is 14 mm.
1 second.
Fully close the bottom sieve with key (5),
and then open approx. 0.5 1 mm.
1 second.
The calibration values of the top sieve appear in
the window (9).
HB 17
Back to main screen:

Press keys Cal
and
simultaneously.
Checking the settings:

Set the sieve aperture successively to 4, 8 and 12 mm
and check.
Cal
Diag
Setup
35429
HB 18
In the event of any deviations, repeat the basic

setup (see section on the "Threshing Section")
and calibration.
35402
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

Calibrating the straw guide plate
CAUTION
Calibration menu
Sieves
Straw guide plate
Spreader plates
Concave clearances
Preconditions:
The engine must be switched off, with the ignition on.
Calibration:
keys simultaneously
for 3 seconds.
The "Calibration menu" (1) is displayed.
In the Calibration Menu, select "Straw guide" (2)

keys).
Str. guide calib.

Calibrate
Press the Setup
or
keys.
The "Str. guide calib." window (3) is displayed.

The adjusting motor is automatically driven to the
two end positions, and the result is evaluated.
After successful calibration, the message "Calib.:

successful" is displayed in the window with the
average values (4).
If calibration is unsuccessful, the message

"Cal.: Error" is displayed in the window (5).
35420
Str. guide calib.

Calib.: successful
Potentiometer
Cal. min.
Cal. max.
2.27V
2.29V
5.70V
35421
Str. guide calib.

Cal.: Error
Possible causes of error:

Clogging/fouling with straw
Servomotor not running smoothly.
Switch off the ignition and remedy the fault, and
then repeat the calibration procedure. If the error
message appears again, have the machine
inspected by a specialist workshop.
35422
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Back to the main screen:

Press keys Cal
and
simultaneously.
HB 19

Calibrating the spreader plates
1.1
Preconditions:
Calibration:
keys simultaneously
for 3 seconds.
1.2
35379
Calibration menu
Sieves
Straw guide plate
Spreader plates
Concave clearances
Spreader plate calib.

Drive the motor to both
end positions and press
key.
In the Calibration Menu, select "Spreader plates" (5)

keys).
Press the Setup
or
keys.
The "Spreader calib." window (6) is displayed.
Drive the adjusting motor to the two end positions with

key (1):
Key (1.1): drive the straw spreader plates to the right
as far as they will go and then check that the straw
guide plates are in the end position.
Key (1.2): drive the spreader plates to the left as far
as they will go and then check that the straw guide
plates are in the end position.
Press the Setup
or
key.
35423
Spreader plate calib.

Calib.: successful
Potentiometer
Cal. min.
Cal. max.
0.15V
0.14V
6.43V
After successful calibration, the message "Calib.:

successful" is displayed in the window with the
average values (7).
35424
HB 20

Press keys Cal
and
simultaneously.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

Calibrating the concave clearances
Preconditions:
The basic mechanical basic must be correct.
Calibration menu
Sieves
Straw guide plate
Spreader plates
Concave clearances
CAUTION
Calibration:
keys simultaneously
for 3 seconds.
In the Calibration Menu, select "Conc. clearances" (2)

keys).
Set clearances
Press the Setup
or
keys.
Calibration starts automatically. The servomotors

are driven to the end positions, and the result is
evaluated. The calibration process can be
monitored with the clearance indicators in the
"Set clearances" menu (3).
After successful calibration, the information

window (4) is displayed.
If calibration is unsuccessful, the error message

is displayed (5).
35403
Set clearances
Calibration of
concv. clearance
successful!
35421
Set clearances
Error
Calibration of
concv. clearance
has failed!
Possible causes of error:

Clogging/fouling by threshed crop.
Servomotors not running smoothly.
Switch off the ignition and remedy the fault, and
then repeat the calibration procedure. If the error
message appears again, have the machine
inspected by a specialist workshop.
35422
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

Press keys Cal
and
simultaneously.
HB 21

Error messages and warnings
Error messages and warnings appear in the form of a
window on top of the existing display. In machines with
TERIS/TCS, error messages are generally output on the
TERIS/TCS monitor. However, if the connection to
TERIS/TCS is blocked due to a fault, the error messages
are displayed on the Commander Control.
The Commander Control handles error messages as
follows:
When an error occurs, a message appears on the
display. At the same time, an audible signal is sounded
for 2.5 to 5 seconds.
The message disappears when:
the cause of the error is no longer present
the message is acknowledged by pressing a key

(except for the warnings "Engine speed/Engine oil
temperature too high").
If more than one incident requiring a message occurs,
the incident with the highest priority is displayed.
The individual messages are listed in descending order of
priority in the list that follows.
Messages are displayed as Warnings or Errors.
Example "Warning":
"Engine speed too high"
This message:
has the highest priority and appears when the engine
speed rises above 2900 rpm.
cannot be cancelled by pressing a key.
automatically disappears when the engine speed
drops back below 2800 rpm.
Warning
Engine speed
too high!
35427
When driving downhill, brake and shift down a

gear.
Example "Error":
"Overload in Command. Control pot supply"
This message:
appears when the 5 V potentiometer supply falls below
4.5 V due to overload.
Error
Overload in
Command.Control pot
supply!
Switch the ignition off and on again. If the error

message appears again, call a specialist
workshop (servomotors not functioning, possible
short circuit).
35428
HB 22
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

List of warning and error messages
Message text
Type*
Engine speed too high
Description/Cause
Remedy
has top priority if the engine speed rises above

2900 rpm.
When driving downhill, brake and

shift down a gear.
cannot be cancelled; automatically

disappears when the engine speed falls below
2800 rpm.
Engine speed too low
appears when the engine speed falls below

the value set in the Setup menu during one
second.
Reduce engine load.

Set a lower warning limit.
Engine oil temperature

is too high
appears when the engine oil temperature

switch is closed.
cannot be cancelled; automatically disappears
when the engine oil temperature drops.
Reduce engine load.

Allow the engine to idle.
Check/remove any fouling
of the radiator.
Cooling water level
appears if the coolant level in the tank is too

low
Replenish coolant
Overload in
Command.Control
pot supply
appears when the 5 V potentiometer supply

falls below 4.5 V due to overload.
Switch the ignition off and on

again. If the message appears
again, call a specialist workshop
(servomotors not functioning,
possible short circuit).
Chopper speed too slow
appears when chopper speed falls below

1200 rpm for one second at nominal engine
speed.
drive belt is slipping.
Reduce load.
appears when the speed of the returns

elevator falls below the limit set in the Speed
Monitor menu for one second.
Reduce load.
appears when the speed of the straw walker

shaft falls below the limit set in the Speed
Monitor menu for one second.
Reduce load.
Set lower warning limit.
appears when the speed of the grain tank

delivery auger falls below the limit set in the
Speed Monitor menu for one second.
Reduce load.
Set lower warning limit.
appears when the grain tank extension is

extended, with the main work switch off and
the ground travel speed is more than 2.0 km/h.
if the grain tank cover is opened.
Retract grain tank extension
Ret. elevator speed

too slow
Straw walker speed

too slow
Delivery auger speed

too slow
The grain tank cover

is extended
* W = Warning
Check drive/belt tension.
Close grain tank cover
E = Error
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
HB 23

Message text
Type*
Adjusting motor,
concave, rear
Description/Cause
Remedy
appears in the event of adjusting motor

malfunction for the rear concave clearance.
Possible causes:
Switch the ignition off and on,

and try again.
clogging of threshing section
Clear the blockage.
mechanical defect
Check the adjusting

mechanism.
Fuse F50 faulty

Relay K60, K81 faulty
Check the fuse and relay, and

replace if necessary.
Electrical system faulty
Check the electrical

connections.
If the fault cannot be remedied,
call a specialist workshop.
Adjusting motor,
concave, front

Possible causes:

and try again.
Clear the blockage.
mechanical defect
Check the adjusting

mechanism.
Fuse F49faulty


connections.
Adjusting motor,
turbo separator

Possible causes:

and try again.
Clear the blockage.
mechanical defect
Check the adjusting

mechanism.
Fuse F51 faulty



connections.
Grain tank pipe,

swivelled in
Handbrake applied
* W = Warning
HB 24
appears when the grain tank pipe is swivelled

out, the main work switch is switched off, and
the travel speed is above 2.0 km/h.
Swivel the grain tank pipe

inwards.
Proximity switch faulty
Check the proximity switch and

appears when the handbrake is applied and

the travel speed is above 2.0 km/h.
Release handbrake.
switch faulty.
Check the switch, and replace

if necessary.
E = Error
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

Message text
Type*
TCS/Teris not
addressable
Description/Cause
Remedy
appears when the TERIS/TCS is set in Setup

but cannot be accessed via the CAN bus
(only for TERIS/TCS).
Switch the ignition off and on.
EMERGENCY MODE
No functions are monitored any
longer.
Fuse F38 faulty
Check the fuse, and replace if

necessary.
Fuse (10 A) in voltage stabilisation module

A14 faulty.

necessary.
Voltage stabilisation module A14 faulty.
Check the indicator lamps, and

replace the module if necessary.
allow the machine to run until
empty and immediately call a
specialist workshop.
Sieve adjusting is not

addressable
appears when electric sieve adjustment is set

in Setup, but the relevant electronic module
cannot be accessed via the CAN bus (only for
units with electric sieve adjustment).

and try again.
Fuse F57 faulty.

necessary.
Straw guide is not

addressable
appears when electric straw guide plate

adjustment is set in Setup, but the relevant
electronic module cannot be accessed via the
CAN bus (only for units with electric straw
guide plate adjustment).

and try again.
Fuse F56 faulty.

necessary.
Spreader plates are not

addressable
appears when electric spreader adjustment is

set in Setup, but the relevant electronic
module cannot be accessed via the CAN bus
(optional equipment).

and try again.
Fuse F55 faulty.

necessary.
* W = Warning
E = Error
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
HB 25

Message text
Type*
Straw guide adjusting

motor is faulty
Description/Cause
Remedy
appears in the event of malfunction of the

adjusting motor for the straw guide plate.

and try again.
Clogging/fouling
Clear the blockage/fouling.
Mechanical fault
Check the adjusting mechanism.
Fuse F13 faulty

Relays K16, K37 faulty
Check the fuse and relays, and

Electrical fault

connections.
Top sieve adjusting

motor is faulty.

adjusting motor for the top sieves (optional
equipment).

and try again.
Mechanical fault
Fuse F52 faulty


Electrical fault

connections.
Bottom sieve adjusting

motor is faulty.

adjusting motor for the bottom sieves
(optional equipment).

and try again.
Mechanical fault
Fuse F53 faulty


Electrical fault

connections.
* W = Warning
HB 26
E = Error
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
Appendix C

Setup and Diagnosis
5650H - 5690HTS
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
HC 1
H
Service
Training
Setup menu
If there is no input in the setup menu for

more than 10 seconds, the main screen
automatically reappears. Settings carried out
in the meantime will not be saved.
Calling the setup menu:

Press the keys Setup + and
Cal
Diag
(1)
Setup
35429 35402
The first page of the setup menu appears.
Setup
1/4
The setup menu consists of 4 pages. The page

number (4) is displayed on top at the right side in the
menu window:
1/4 = page 1 of 4
Language:: english
Front tires:
R adial 650/75R32
Turbo separator:
yes
LCD View angle;
Page selection:
Keys (3): Cal
Parameter selection:
Keys (2): Diag
Cal
Diag
Setup
or
Parameter setting:
Keys (1): Setup
or
or
Saving of adjusted values:

Keys (3): Cal + and
simultaneously.
35402/35406
HC 2
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
Setup menu
Example:
Adjustment of speed alarm limit
Setup
1/4
In this example the speed alarm limit is supposed to

be adjusted from 0% to -20%.
Language:: english
Front tires:
R adial 650/75R32
Turbo separator:
yes
LCD View angle;
Setup
Setup
4/4
4/4
Alternat
oo
rrss
pp
::
Alternat
DZ
Lichtm.:
8040
Eng.sp.
factor:
MotorDZFaktor
3.32
3.32
DZ
Motor:
Engine
Motore
NG:
Warngrenze:
2421
2421
W arning limit:
0%
Setup
Setup
4/4
4/4
Press the keys Setup + and

and
The first page of the setup menu (1) appears.

2
Press the key Cal
3x.
8040
fourth page of the setup menu (2)
The
appears. The first line is marked.
0%
Alternat
or sp:
DZ
Lichtm.:
8040
8040
MotorDZFaktor
Eng.sp.
factor:
3.32
3.32
DZ
Motor:
Motore
NG:
Engine
Warngrenze:
Warngrenze
2421
2421
W arning limit:
0%
Setup
Setup
4/4
4/4
0%
Alternat
or sp:
DZ
Lichtm.:
8040
8040
Eng.sp.
factor:
MotorDZFaktor
3.32
3.32
DZ
Motor:
Motore
NG:
Engine
Warngrenze:
Warngrenze
2421
2421
W arning limit:
-20%
-20%
3x.
Press the key Diag
The fourth line alarm limit (3) is marked.

3
Press the key Setup + or

as often as
necessary in order to set the desired %-value of
-20% (4).
Press the keys: Cal
and
simultaneously.
main screen appears, the set value is

The
saved.
35406/35429
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
HC 3
H
Service
Training
SETUP MENU
The four pages of the setup menu:
Setup
1/4
Machine type:
Maschinentyp
Maschinentyp:
Language:: english
Front tires:
R adial 650/75R32
Turbo separator:
LCD View angle;
Setup
Setup
yes
2/4
2/4
5670
5670
Setup
Setup
3/4
3/4
Setup
Setup
El.sieve adj:
yes
Alternator sp:
DZ
Lichtm.:
El.straw guide
no
el.Siebverst.:
ja
4/4
4/4
8040
8040
Chopper:
yes
TERIS/TCS:
yes
ja
el.Hckslerk.:
nein
El.spread.pl:
no
Eng.
p.
actor:
Eng.
ss
p.
ffactor:
3.32
MotorDZFaktor:
3.32
ja
no
el.Strohvert.: nein
DZ
Motor:
Motore
NG:
Engine
Warngrenze
Hcksler:
TerisTCS:
GTL sensor #2:
KTFSGeber
R evers. drum: #2
nein
no
Wendetrommel:
nein
W arning limit:
2421
2421
0%
0%
Adjustment range of parameters in the setup menu

Parameter
Adjustment range
page 1:
language
deutsch - (englisch)
front tyres
Radial 800/65R32
this input is necessary for the exact calculation
Radial 650/75R32
of the ground speed
Radial 620/75R30
Radial 620/75R26
Diagonal 30,5-32
Diagonal 24,5-32
Diagonal 23,1-30
Diagonal 23,1-26
turbo separator
yes - no
LCD viewing angle
0 ... 9
page 2:
type of machine
5670 - 5680 - 5690
chopper
yes - no
Teris TCS
yes - no
KTFS transmitter #2
(grain tank level transmitter no. 2)
yes - no
impeller
yes - no
page 3:
electrical sieve adjustment*
yes - no
electrical chopper flap adjustment*
yes - no
electrical straw spreader adjustment*
yes - no
page 4:
engine speed coefficient
0.10 ... 9.99
dynamo machine speed to engine speed ratio

alarm limit engine speed
0% ... -50% ... (aus)
* * Programming of CAN modules see chapter H
HC 4
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
Diagnosis
CAUTION
After calling the diagnosis menu no machine
functions will be monitored or controlled any
more. All safety functions are switched off.
Calling the diagnosis menu:

Press the keys Diag + and
(1)
Cal
Diag
In order to completely engage or disengage,
Setup
actuate the servo motor until the clutch

control power unit switches off the servo
motor in the final.
35429 35402
The diagnosis menu appears.

2
Enabling of the actuators:
Diagnosis menu
Speeds
Concave Clearances
Main Clutches
Grain Tank
Threshing Mode
Ground Drive Mode
Indicator Lights
CAN
Press the keys (2) and (3) simultaneously.
The actuators are enabled.

3
Cal
Diag
It is necessary to enable the actuators in the

diagnosis menu. Otherwise no adjustment is
possible in the diagnosis.
Selecting the function:

Mark the line of the desired function by means of
the keys Diag + and
(1).
Setup
An arrow at the beginning or at the end of the

menu window indicates further hidden lines.
Call the desired function by means of the keys

Setup + or
(4).
5
both:
Quit
menu
Line
Call
35402/25Men
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
The first page of this function appears.
It is possible to quit the menu or any page

anytime by means of pressing the keys
Cal + und
(5) simultaneously.
HC 5
H
Service
Training
Diagnosis Speed 1/2

Reel
Reel
0UPM
Rel.: Faster
+I+
Rel.: Slower
-IThreshing Drum
Rel.: Faster
Rel.: Slower
Diagnosis
Example for display of pages
The first page (1) of the menu item Speeds appears

after selection by means of the keys Setup + or
.
page display 1/2 (2) indicates: Page 1
The
of 2.
0UPM
-I-I-
The speed (RPM) is shown in the status

display (3).
Fan Speed
1302UPM
Rel.: Faster
-IRel.: Slower
-I-
Diagnosis Speed
Reel
Rel.: Faster
Rel.: Slower
Switching over the status display (3):

Press the keys Diag + und
simultaneously.
1/2
2.4Hz
-I-I-
Threshing Drum
Drum 0.0Hz
Threshing
Rel.: Faster
-IRel.: Slower
-IFan Speed
Rel.: Faster
Rel.: Slower
display will be shown successively

The
in RPM, Hz and static sensor signal.
21.7Hz
-I-I-
Diagnosis Speed
Press the keys Diag

once more.
1/2
Reel
Rel.: Faster
Rel.: Slower
status display will be switched over to Hz

The
(4).
and
simultaneously
static sensor signal (5) is shown in the

The
status display (this only makes sense for
evaluation when the drive has stopped).
Threshing Drum
Rel.: Faster
Rel.: Slower
Fan Speed
Rel.: Faster
Rel.: Slower
Calling of page 2:
Diagnosis Speed
2/2
Chopper
0UPM
Straw Walker
0UPM
Returns Elevator 0UPM
Filling Auger
0UPM
Dynamo Machine 8050UPM
Engine
2424UPM
Wheel Imp.
0UPM
Press the keys (1): Cal
or
The page 2/2 will be displayed (6).

Switching over of the status display is done on this
page in the same way as described before.
HC 6
All further key functions are described in the

following descriptions of the menu items.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
Diagnosis
Display of sensor and switching statuses
Symbol
Status
Sensor dampened
Sensor non dampened
Switch closed
Switch opened
Status display of servo drives

Symbol
Status
Servo drive is switched off
|+
Failure: Line disconnection or short circuit behind power supply
+|
Failure: Short circuit to ground
+|+
Servo drive is switched on
Subsequently all menu items with the appropriate pages are discussed in the successive order of the
diagnosis menu:
Menu items
Speeds
Concave clearances
Main clutches
Grain tank
Threshing mode
Ground drive mode
Indicator lights
CAN
System
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Page title
Diagnosis Speeds
Diagnosis CCo
Diagnosis MC
Diagnosis GT
Diagnosis TM
Diagnosis GDM
Diagnosis IL
Diagnosis CAN
Diagnosis Syst.
HC 7
H
Service
Training
Diagnosis
speeds
Speed adjustments may only be carried out
when the drive is running and the clutch is
engaged.
Diagnosis Speed 1/2

Reel
Reel
0UPM
Rel.: Faster
+I+
Rel.: Slower
-IThreshing Drum
Rel.: Faster
Rel.: Slower
0UPM
-I-I-
Key functions:
Page selection:
keys (1): Cal
Fan Speed
1302UPM
Rel.: Faster
-IRel.: Slower
-I-
Line selection:
keys (2): Diag
Cal
Diag
Page
Line
both:
both:
return
to the
Diagnosis
menu
Status
display
Speed adjustment:
keys (3): Setup
Setup
or
or
or
The speed of the drive selected on

page 1 (4) is altered directly by
means of actuating the servo drive.
Adjustment is done as long as the key is pressed:

Setup + Speed is increased
Setup
Speed is decreased
Speed
adjustment
Status display:
keys (2): Diag
28Diag 35402
and
simultaneously
In the status display the speed

(RPM), Hz and static sensor signal
will be shown successively (this only
makes sense when the drive has
stopped).
Return to the Diagnosis menu:

keys (1): Cal + and
simultaneously
Diagnosis Speed 1/2

Reel
Reel
0UPM
Rel.: Faster
+I+
Rel.: Slower
-IThreshing Drum
Rel.: Faster
Rel.: Slower
0UPM
-I-I-
Fan Speed
1302UPM
Rel.: Faster
-IRel.: Slower
-I-
Diagnosis Speed
A sensor and two relays are assigned to each

actuator.
2/2
Chopper
0UPM
Straw Walker
0UPM
Returns Elevator 0UPM
Filling Auger
0UPM
Dynamo Machine 8050UPM
Engine
2424UPM
Wheel Imp.
0UPM
HC 8
Page 1/2:
Speeds which can be altered:
Reel speed
Threshing drum speed
Fan speed
Page 2/2:
Indication of speeds which cannot be altered with the
Commander Control 2000.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
Diagnosis DCC
Concave controller (concave clearances)
Diagnosis CC
1/3
Key functions:
Rear concave
Pot.
Cal. min.
Cal. max.
Actual value
Rel.: Extend
Rel.: Retract
3.21V
0.48V
4.40V
69.4%
-I-I-
Page selection:
keys (1): Cal
Diag
or
Actuation of servo drive:

keys (2): Setup + or
Cal
The servo drive of the selected

page/function will be activated.
Setup

Setup + Servo drive is extending
Setup
Servo drive is retracting
1
Page
both:

keys (1): Cal + and
simultaneously
2
Actuate
servo drive
return
to the
Diagnosis
menu
30Diag 35402
Diagnosis CC
1/3
Rear concave
Pot.
Cal. min.
Cal. max.
Actual value
Rel.: Extend
Rel.: Retract
Diagnosis CC
3.21V
0.48V
4.40V
69.4%
-I-I-
2/3
Front concave
Pot.
Cal. min.
Cal. max.
Actual value
Rel.: Extend
Rel.: Retract
Diagnosis CC
3.97V
0.48V
4.40V
89.0%
-I-I-
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
On each page is displayed:

Pot.
the electrical measuring value at the
servo potentiometer
Cal.min./max. the calibration values as saved with
the last calibration process.
Actual value
the relative position of the servo

drive as a result of the measuring
value of the potentiometer within the
calibrated stroke.
Rel.: Extending/Retracting
Electrical status of the servo drive
3/3
Turboseparator
Pot.
Cal. min.
Cal. max.
Actual value
Rel.: Extend
Rel.: Retract
Page 1/3: Concave adjustment rear.

Page 2/3: Concave adjustment front.
Page 3/3: Separating grate adjustment of
turboseparator
Note:
0.43V
0.48V
4.40V
-3.7%
+I+
-I-
In case of manual adjustment of the clearances an

actual value of 0% resp. 100% must be reached in
the limit stop positions. Repeat the calibration
procedure if the displayed value differs significantly
from the actual value.
HC 9
H
Service
Training
Diagnosis MC
Main clutches
Diagnosis MC
The individual outputs can be switched

independently from each other and are not
subject to any automatic monitoring ensuring
proper operation.
1/2
Threshing mechanism
mechanism
Threshing
Status
-IRel.: engage
+I+
Rel.: disengage
-ICutting mechanism
Status
-IRel.: engage
-IRel.: disengage
-ISwitch CM
Cal
Diag
Key functions:
Page selection:
keys (1): Cal
Line selection:
keys (2): Diag
Setup
Actuate servo drive:

keys (3): Setup
Page
Line
Actuate
servo
drive
or
Status
outputs
on/off
both:
return
to the
Diagnosis
menu
or
or
or
The servo drive of the selected clutch

(4) is activated.

Setup + engage
Setup
disengage
32HK12 35402
In the diagnosis menu it is not possible to operate the

grain tank tube and the clutches by means of the
respective function keys
and 0 .
Switching of status outputs:
First select the lineStatus (5) of the desired function.
keys (3):
Setup
Setup
Diagnosis MC
1/2
Threshing mechanism
mechanism
Threshing
Status
-IRel.: engage
+I+
Rel.: disengage
-ICutting mechanism
Status
-IRel.: engage
-IRel.: disengage
-ISwitch CM
Diagnosis MC
2/2
Chopper
Status
Status
Rel.: engage
Rel.: disengage
+I+
-I-I-
Grain tank discharge

Rel.: engage
-IRel.: disengage
-ISwitch GTD
HC 10
Switch on status output

Switch off status output

keys (1): Cal + and
simultaneously
Page 1/2:
Threshing mechanism clutch
Cutting mechanism clutch
Switch CM = Foot switch cutting mechanism stop
Page 2/2:
Chopper clutch
Grain tank clutch
Switch GTD = Foot switch grain tank discharge
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
Diagnosis GT
Grain tank
Diagnosis GT
1/1
Key functions:
Grain tank tube

V.: Swing in
-IU.: Swing out
+I+
Status NS GTT
-INS grain tank tube
Grain tank top
Level transmitter 1
Level transmitter 2
Line selection:
keys (2): Diag
Diag
or
Swinging of grain tank tube:

Start the swinging procedure by means of the keys (3):
Setup
Setup
Cal
Swing out grain tank tube

Swing in grain tank tube
Setup
Terminate the swinging procedure with the

keys (3) Setup
Page
Line
Swing
in/swing
out
return
to the
Diagnosis
menu
or
Switching of status output:

First select the line Status (4).
1
both:
keys (3):
Setup
Setup
Switch on status output

Switch off status output
Start/Stop
32HK12 35402
Diagnosis GT
1/1
Grain tank tube

V.: Swing in
-IU.: Swing out
+I+
Status NS GTT
-INS grain tank tube
Grain tank top
Level transmitter 1
Level transmitter 2
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

keys (1): Cal + and
simultaneously
The menu item diagnosis grain tank consists of one

page.
HC 11
H
Service
Training
Diagnosis TM
1/1
Diagnosis TM
Threshing Mode
Working master sw.

Straw guide plate
Straw chamber warn. sw.#1
Straw chamber warn. sw.#2
Returns elevator #1
Returns elevator #2
Feed passage
Angle transmitter 2.75V
One page:
Switches and sensors for monitoring of the threshing
process.
Diagnosis GDM
Ground Drive Mode GDM
1/1
Overspeed engine
+I+
D+
Engine excess temp.
Engine oil excess temp.
Engine oil pressure sw.
Engine cooling fan
Engine air filter
Hand brake

keys Cal + and
simultaneously
One page:
Switches and sensors for monitoring of the ground
drive mode.
Line selection:
keys Diag
or
Switching the status output:

First select the lineOverspeed Engine (1).
keys:
Setup
Setup
Switching on the status

output
Switching off the status
output

keys Cal + und
simultaneously
HC 12
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
Diagnosis IL
Engine oil pressure
Charge control
Central warning
Hand brake
Grain tank level
Chopper speed
Engine excess temp.
Engine cooling fan
Engine air filter
Straw chamber monitoring
Diagnosis IL
Returns elevator
Grain tank tube
Chopper mode
Revolving light
Buzzer
1/2
+I+
-I-I+I+
+I+
+I+
-I-I+I+
-I-
Diagnosis IL
Indicator Lights
Pages 1/2 and 2/2:
Indicator lights of the combined instrument gauge and
further optical and acoustical signal transmitters.
Line selection:
keys Diag
or
2/2
+I+
-I-I+I+
-I-
Switching the status output:

First select the desired function.
keys:
Setup
Setup
Switching on the status output

Switching off the status output

keys Cal + and
simultaneously
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
HC 13
H
Service
Training
Diagnosis CAN
CAN modules
Diagnosis CAN
1/4
Key functions:
El. adjustment:
Upper sieve
Pot.
Cal. min.
Cal. max.
Actual value
Extend key
Retract key
Rel.: extend
Rel.: retract
Page selection:
keys (1): Cal
3.41V
2.22V
6.02V
31.3%
Line selection:
keys (2): Diag
-I-I-
Actuating servo drive:

keys (3): Setup
Cal
Diag
Setup
Page
Line
Swing
in/Swing
out
both:
or
or
The servo drive of the selected

function is activated.

Setup + Servo drive is extending
Setup
Servo drive is retracting
return
to the
Diagnosis
menu
or
Switching the power outputs:

First select the line of the desired function.
keys (3):
Start/Stop
Setup
Setup
Switch on power output

Switch off power output
32HK12 35402

keys (1): Cal + und
simultaneously
Diagnosis CAN
El. adjustment
Straw guide plate
Option is not
available!
3/4
It is possible to check the proper function of the CAN

modules by means of the CAN diagnosis. The CAN
modules must be activated in the menu Setup.
If a CAN module is not activated or if it is not
displayed on the bus, the message "Option not
available appears on the corresponding page. See
example opposite (4).
Note:
In case of manual operation of the individual functions
an actual value of 0% resp. 100% must be reached in
the limit stop positions. Repeat the calibration
procedure if the displayed value differs significantly
from the actual value.
HC 14
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
H
Service
Training
2
1
Diagnosis CAN
1/4
El. adjustment:
Upper sieve
Pot.
Cal. min.
Cal. max.
Actual value
Extend key
Retract key
Rel.: extend
Rel.: retract
3.41V
2.22V
6.02V
31.3%
-I-I-
3
Diagnosis CAN
2/4
El. adjustment:
Lower sieve
Pot.
Cal. min.
Cal. max.
Actual value
Extend key
Retract key
Rel.: extend
Rel.: retract
4.05V
2.61V
5.91V
43.4%
-I-I-
4
Diagnosis CAN
3/4
El. adjustment:
Straw guide plate
Pot.
Cal. min.
Cal. max.
Actual value
Chopper switch
Rel.: Extend
Rel.: Retract
4.41V
2.05V
6.17V
57.0%
-I+I+
5
6
Diagnosis CAN
4/4
El. adjustment:
Deflector
Pot.
Cal. min.
Cal. max.
Actual value
0% ... 20%
20% ... 40%
60% ... 80%
80% ... 100%
Diagnosis CAN
CAN modules
3.6V
0.00V
8,07V
45.0%
-I+I+
-I-I-
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Pages 1/4 and 2/4:

Electrical adjustment upper sieve and lower sieve.
On these pages is depicted:
Pot.
servo potentiometer
Cal.min./max.
the calibration values as saved with the
last calibration process.
Actual value
the relative position of the servo drive
as a result of the measuring value of the
potentiometer within the calibrated
stroke.
Key extending/retracting
Operating keys for sieve adjustment at
the rear ladder
Rel.: extending/retracting
Page 3/4:
Electrical adjustment straw guide plate.
On this page is depicted:
Pot.
servo potentiometer
Cal.min./max.
Actual value
stroke.
Chopper switch Switch at the straw guide plate
Rel.: extending/retracting
Page 3/4:
Electrical adjustment deflectors.
On this page is depicted:
Pot.
servo potentiometer
Cal.min./max.
Actual value
stroke.
0% ... 100%.
Status of the four indicator lights
HC 15
H
Service
Training
Diagnosis Syst.
1/1
Commander Control:
Battery
12.4V
pot. Exc.
4.97V
CAN modules:
El. sieve adjustment
pot. Exc.
0.01V
El. straw guide plate
pot. Exc.
7.95V
El. deflector
pot. Exc.
8.04V
Component
Range of operation

Battery
Pot. Exc.
10,00 ... 16,00 V

4,80 ... 5,20 V
El. sieve adjustment

Pot. Exc.
7.75 ... 8.25V
El. straw guide plate adjustment

Pot. Exc.
7.75 ... 8.25V
El. deflector adjustment

Pot. Exc.
7.75 ... 8.25V
HC 16
Diagnosis Syst.
System
One page:
Electric power supply, Commander Control 2000 and
CAN modules.

keys: Cal + and
simultaneously
The opposite table shows the permissible range for

the electric power supply and the supply voltage of
the servo potentiometers (pot. Exc.).
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
I
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS
Air condition
Table of Contents
Type of combine harvester
5650H
5680H
5660HTS 5690HTS
Safe maintenance and repair of air condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .02 03
Overview function elements in cabin roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04 05
Circuit diagram for electric system heating und cooling system in cabin roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . .06 07
Functional description of the air condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .08 - 09
Refrigerant and PAG oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 11
Components of the air condition system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 - 13
Magnetic clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Compressor Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Components of the air condition system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 - 17
Expansion valve (TEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 - 19
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
I1
I
Service
Training
Safe maintenance and repair of air

condition
Qualification of personnel
For all persons involved in maintenance or repair of the air
condition system it is mandatory
- to be qualified for these works and to be adequately
trained
- to carefully observe the instructions in the repair manual.
You and your employees should be trained and specially
instructed for maintenance works on air condition systems.
Training can be carried out by the after-sales service of
SAME DEUTZ.
SZ-0115
Personal safety equipment

Liquid refrigerant evaporates under atmospheric pressure.
The skin of your hands may freeze when contacting with
refrigerant.
PAG oils damage the skin surface upon frequent contact.
Protect your hands and eyes from refrigerant and
refrigerant oil (PAG).
Wear solid safety gloves (leather)!
Wear safety goggles or face screen!
Handle refrigerant and refrigerant container carefully.

SZ-0102
Never touch liquid refrigerant and refrigerant bottles without

wearing safety goggles!
Do not expose refrigerant bottles to direct heat impact and
never heat above 50 C. Do not expose to direct sunlight or
to heat radiators.
Rising temperatures cause the pressure inside the
container to increase. A strong pressure increase may
cause thin-walled bottles to explode!
Do not fill refrigerant bottles to maximum level. By doing this
the refrigerant can expand when temperature is rising.
Shut multiple-use steel bottles immediately by means of a
shutoff valve after taking out refrigerant.
Protect the shutoff valve against damage! Screw on safety
plug and screw cap.
Always move refrigerant bottles carefully. Avoid shock!
Never refill damaged bottles. Mark the containers clearly,
e.g. "Bottle damaged. Do not refill - Danger of accident!
When opened, drain non-returnable refrigerant bottles into
the service station for safety reasons.
Close drained bottles.
I2
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
I
Service
Training
Safe maintenance and repair of air

condition
Refrigerant is heavier than ambient air. It will sink down in
case of a leakage in refrigerant pipes. In the course of this
high refrigerant concentrations are occuring in the ambient air.
There is danger of suffocation!
Leave the room immediately. Re-enter the room only after
sufficient ventilation.
If possible, use breathing protection, e.g. a compressed air
breathing apparatus.
Never drain refrigerant in closed rooms. Make sure that there
is good ventilation, e.g. switch on the air exhauster.
Maintenance works in the drivers cabin:
Never allow refrigerant to be drained into the closed cabin.
Open the cabin door and make sure that there is good
ventilation!
SZ-0010
First aid in case of contact with refrigerant

After inhaling:
Take the person to fresh air immediately and lay down
carefully.
Call a medical doctor!
Give artificial respiration in case of unconsciousness or
respiratory paralysis.
After contact with the eyes:
Do not rub out the eyes. Force apart the eyelids and rinse with
plenty of lukewarm water for at least 15 minutes. Go and see a
medical doctor immediately!
After contact with the skin:
In case of contact of refrigerant with the skin sponge down
with plenty of water.
Safety measures with welding works
In case of temperatures above 800 C, e.g. contact of
refrigerant with naked flame or glowing metal (welding works),
the R134a is decomposed chemically. In the course of this
highly toxic phosgene gases (chlorocarbonic oxide gases) are
formed. Inhaling of these gases is causing serious damage to
health!
A pungent stench is a clear sign of the formation of such toxic
gases.
Leave the room immediately. Ventilate the place of work
extensively.
Observe with soldering and welding works:
By all means avoid heat exposure to the components of the air
condition!
Parts of the system may explode due to strong heat during
welding.
Never touch refrigerant with naked flames or glowing metal
(e.g. welding works)!
Do not smoke while carrying out maintenance and repair
works!
While varnishing the machine:
Drain the air condition in advance, if the vehicle is supposed to
stay in the drying oven for more than 20 minutes with 80 C.
Never varnish the evaporator and the condenser!
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
I3
I
Service
Training
K1
K3
K4
X135 X136
K5
6
12.1
7
16
15
14
13
12
17
11
10
18
5.2
21
20
I4
5.1
19
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
I
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Overview function elements in cabin roof
Relay for cooling compressor and blower
Blower
Wiper motor
Connector X135, X136 for headlamps
Coolant hoses
5.1 Pressure hose

5.2 Flexible suction tube
6
Hoses for heating
Heating valve with servo motor

Observe proper mounting position: In header line, in direction of flow!
Connector X115, X134, X182
Interior lighting
10
Temperature sensor air recirculation, no longer utilised as of year of construction 2002
11
Circulating air filter
12
Control panel air condition, heating
12.1 Control unit air conditioning (electric thermostate)

13
Temperature sensor
14
Heat exchanger heating
15
Evaporator air condition system
16
Expansion valve
17
Fresh air filter left and right
18
Master cylinder service brake
19
Disconnect for coolant- and heating hoses
20
Refrigerator section
21
Cabin floor
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
I5
I
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Circuit diagram for electric system heating und cooling system in cabin roof
Relay K1-K4 are mounted in the cabin roof
Low/high pressure switch:

Switch is opening at 1.2 bar and at 28 bar resp.
Switch is closing at 2,4 bar and at 19,5 bar resp.
I6
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Low/high pressure switch
Compressor
Malfunction control
Water
potentiometer
Electrical thermostat
Air conditioning
potentiometer
Air conditioning
switch
Water valve
Evaporator fan M2
Fan switch
Evaporator fan M1
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Circuit diagram for electric system heating und cooling system in cabin roof
56-077
I7
I
Service
Training
10
12
9
11
16
15
14
13
1
3
5
7
X142
I0074
I8
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
I
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Functional description of the air condition
Coolant circuit
Position
Designation
Function
Compressor
Takes in gaseous refrigerant from the evaporator for compression.

In the course of this the refrigerant is warming up (pressure build-up).
Belt pulley with

magnetic clutch
The compressor is driven via v-belt, belt pulley and magnetic clutch. Activation
and deactivation of the magnetic clutch causes the compressor to be separated
from the drive.
Filling connections
(service valves)
The pressure gauge ports in the refrigerant pipes at the compressor are equipped
with spindle valves made by Schrader.
Condenser
The compressed refrigerant is cooled down in the condenser. In the course of this
it is liquefied (condensed).
Container
(part of the dryer)
Absorbs the liquid refrigerant.
Dryer (1
The dryer withdraws possibly existing humidity (water) of the refrigerant.
High/low pressure switch
Deactivates the cooling system if the pressure between compressor and

expansion valve falls below 1.2 bar or exceeds 28 bar. At the same time the red
failure lamp is lighting.
Fresh air blower
Blows the intake air through the evaporator
Expansion valve
Point of separation between high pressure and low pressure side.

From there a metered quantity of liquid refrigerant is entering the evaporator and
starts to expand here.
10
Evaporator
In the evaporator the refrigerant is expanding and completely evaporating,

changing into gaseous condition at the same time. The required energy (heat) for
this is withdrawn from the ambient air flowing by the evaporator fins. The air is
cooled down, taken in by the blower and routed to the cabin.
11
Temperature sensor
Captures the temperature of the cooled down air after the evaporator.
12
Control unit
(electronic thermostat)
Activates or deactivates the refrigerating compressor by means of K1.
13
Rotary potentiometer
Air temperature adjustment (cooling capacity)
14
Toggle switch
Used for commissioning of the air conditioning system The rotary switch for the
fan must be switched at least to stage 1.
15
Failure lamp red
Lighting as soon as the air conditioning system is deactivated by means of the

high/low pressure switch.
16
Rotary switch for fan
Activation /deactivation of the fresh air fan; with 3 speed stages.
(1 Installed in front of the cooler package.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
I9
I
Service
Training
Refrigerant and PAG oils

Refrigerant
In the air condition system of the combine harvester the refrigerant R 134a is used which is free from chlorine.
Its pressure and temperature response is similar to the type R 12 applied in the past.
CAUTION!
Danger of injury!
Observe the safety regulations when handling refrigerants!

Read the EC safety data sheet of the refrigerant producer.
The refrigerant R 134a is a low-boiling agent.
Boiling point: -26,1 C at normal atmospheric pressure of approx. 1 bar.
Boiling point temperatures depending on the pressure
Determine the corresponding evaporation temperature with the following table.
Temperature in C
Pressure in bar (absolute pressure)
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
2,92
3,49
4,14
4,88
5,71
6,65
7,69
8,86
10,16
11,59
13,17
14,90
16,81
18,89
21,17
23,65
26,35
29,29
32,48
35,95
39,72
Absolute pressure is measured pressure minus ambient pressure.

Ambient pressure is air pressure.
For the pressure in the closed system subtract 1 bar of the value in the table.
I 10
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
I
Service
Training
Refrigerant and PAG oils

Refrigerant
Refrigerant R 134a is able to absorb heat quickly (thermal absorption) and to also dissipate it quickly
(heat dissipation). Due to these qualities R 134a is very well suitable for serving as heat transport agent in air condition
systems.
If appropriately handled R 134a is not inflammable or explosive, neither in liquid condition nor in gaseous condition
However, R 134a may light off if mixed with an air concentration of more than 60% and the pressure is above the
atmospheric pressure.
Therefore:
Never fill pressurized air into refrigerant bottles, the air condition system or into the filling station!
It is colourless and odourless.
Refrigerant in vapour state does not change the quality of food. It will not be poisoned or become inedible.
However, liquid R 134a enriched with PAG oil may corrode copper and a few types of plastic.
In case of a strong enrichment of R 134a in the breathing air difficulties of breathing may occur, as the oxygen will be
displaced by the gaseous refrigerant.
IMPORTANT!
Material damage!
Do not fill up the air condition system with the refrigerant R 12. Never mix the refrigerant R 134a with R 12!
Refrigerator oil, seal and piping materials as well as the system pressure are different with R 12 and R 134a air
condition systems.
Using the wrong refrigerant may cause chemical reactions with the refrigerator oil and corrosion of the
components.
PAG oils
PAG oils are synthetic oils that are very hygroscopic, i.e. they are storing up humidity.
Humidity reduces the efficiency of an air condition system.
Therefore:
Only use PAG oils in small barrels if possible.
Consume immediately.
Dispose of the remainders properly.
In case of storage in larger barrels, e.g. in the filling station:
Store the oil in airtight containers!
Filling amounts
Refrigerant
Filling amount
R 134 a
2000 g
Refrigerator oil
Filling amount
PAG (Polyglycol) *
207 cm3 (in case of new compressors)
* The type of oil filled in ex works is printed on the rating plate of the compressor!
IMPORTANT!
Material damage!
Too much refrigerator oil in the compressor

- reduces the refrigerating capacity of the air condition and
- may damage the system!
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
I 11
I
Service
Training
3
4
7
5
2
1
6
2
I0001
I0014
I0002
I 12
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
I
Service
Training
Components of the air condition system

Compressor
The combine harvester is equipped with an axial-flow cornpressor with constant working volume.
The compressor is driven by means of a v-belt. Frictional connection is achieved through a magnetic clutch which is
activated when the air condition is switched on.
The compressor takes in gaseous refrigerant from the evaporator, then compresses and pumps it into the cooling circuit.
Function
The compressor is of the axial-flow type with 7 pistons and constant working volume. A slanted swash plate is actuating the
double action pistons. The pistons are guided by guide shoes.
During downstroke of the piston cold gaseous refrigerant is taken into the piston chamber. For that purpose an inlet valve
is opening between valve plate and piston chamber.
During upstroke of the piston the refrigerant is compressed. For that purpose the inlet valve is closing and the exhaust
valve between valve plate and cylinder head cover is opening.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Magnetic clutch
Connecting plug (electrical connection)
Oil fill screw
Connection pressure line to condenser
(high pressure)
Connection suction line from evaporator
(suction pressure)
Pressure relief valve (built-in only with compressor Sanden type C)
Gauge and filling port high pressure
Gauge and filling port suction pressure
Pressure relief valve

The pressure relief valve protects the compressor against damage in case of an air condition system malfunction.
IMPORTANT!
Material damage!
Chillers are suitable only for gas compression.

In case of taking in liquid refrigerant the compressor will be damaged!
Never fill up the inlet side of the compressor with liquid refrigerant!
Compressor
Magnetic clutch
The refrigerating capacity of the air condition system is controlled by activating and deactivating of the magnetic clutch.
The control unit in the cabin controls activation and deactivation of the magnetic clutch.
The high/low pressure switch located in the high pressure circuit of the system opens the magnetic clutch when the shut
down pressure (28 bar) is exceeded or when the pressure falls below 1,2 bar.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Solenoid
Retaining ring
Ball bearing
Belt pulley
Dust cover
Driving plate
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
I 13
I
Service
Training
Compressor
Lubrication
The compressor is filled with 207 cm3 of special refrigerator oil.
This oil quantity is mixed with the refrigerant. It permanently circulates in the circuit and lubricates all movable components,
e.g. pistons and expansion valve. The compressor bearings are lubricated through oil holes and splash lubrication.
During operation the oil contained in the compressor is distributed within the entire system by means of the refrigerant.
When the air condition is shut down the refrigerator oil is depositing in the individual components.
Therefore the oil level cannot be checked at the compressor.
The exact oil level can only be checked by draining every component where refrigerator oil is depositing.
For this reason filling up the oil everytime requires the exact acquisition of the sampled oil amount.
IMPORTANT!
Material damage!
Too much refrigerator oil in the compressor reduces the refrigerating capacity of the air condition and may
damage the system!
Service notes
Types of oil
Quantities
PAG oil for R 134a *
207 cm3 (with new compressors)
* The type of oil filled in ex works is printed on the rating plate of the compressor!
Prior to refilling the air condition system with refrigerant
Check the oil level in the compressor.
Substitute the oil quantity (collects in the filling station) which is separated during suction resp. evacuation of the system.
Refill new refrigerator oil on the inlet side of the compressor.
Check the attachment of the compressor.
Check the v-belt tension and its proper condition.
Switch on the air condition once a month for about 10 minutes.
By this means the refrigerator oil is distributed and provides for lubrication and corrosion protection of all components in
the system.
I 14
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
I
Service
Training
Notes
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
I 15
I
Service
Training
4
gaseous
liquid
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Container
Inlet connection
Outlet connection
Sight glass
Inlet pipe
Fine filter
Hygroscopic material
Connection pressure switch
I0069
I 16
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
I
Service
Training

Container with dryer
The liquid refrigerant is flowing directly from the condenser into the dryer.
The container with dryer has the following functions:
The liquid refrigerant is collected in the container.
The solid-state dryer stores up water and dirt particles of the refrigerant.
The dryer consists of a mixture of silica gel, molecular sieves and aluminium oxide.
These components are agglomerated to a solid body by means of resin.
Function
The liquid refrigerant enters the container at the side where it is collected. Inside of the container the refrigerant flows
through the solid-state dryer which filters off existing humidity and dirt particles.
Subsequently it continues to flow towards the expansion valve.
Humidity is the biggest problem of an air condition system.
The dryer is able to store up 6 12 g of water, depending on the type. The solid-state dryer is saturated when it has stored
up this amount of liquid. In this case the water existing in the liquid refrigerant is flowing until reaching the nozzle of the
expansion valve. There the water is freezing, thus clogging the nozzle opening. You can recognize a frozen expansion
valve when the air is flowing into the cabin alternating between cooled and uncooled.
Temperature in the cabin is

decreasing,
Refrigerating capacity normal
Expansion valve frozen
Temperature in the cabin

increasing,
no refrigerating capacity
Expansion valve defrosting
Service notes
Read liquid level at sight glass with running compressor.
The system is filled sufficiently with refrigerant:
White ball is floating inside of sight glass.
Read water absorption at sight glass.
Dryer is saturated with humidity:
Oval blue ball has changed its colour to violet.
Replace container.
IMPORTANT!
Material damage!
Never leave the dryer unsealed. The humidity of the air is saturating the solid-state dryer causing it to become
defective.
Open the sealing plug short time before mounting.
Replace the dryer every time when works are carried out at the air condition system.
Rusty spots can be seen in the sight glass:
Replace container.
When refrigerant temperatures exceed 112 C a safety fuse is smelting in the container. After draining the refrigerant the
container is defective.
Replace container.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
I 17
I
Service
Training
9
6
5
I0068
I 18
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
I
Service
Training

Expansion valve (TEV - Thermostatic Expansion Valve)
The thermostatic expansion valve (TEV) is the point of separation between high pressure and low pressure area in the
refrigeration cycle. The refrigerant evaporates at this location.
Through the TEV always the exact amount of liquid refrigerant evaporating under optimum conditions - is flowing into the
evaporator.
This is preventing overdosing of refrigerant in the evaporator.
This control is depending on:
Suction pressure (compressor side)
Temperature at evaporator outlet
Layout
Position
Designation
Function
Connection
Liquid refrigerant is flowing from the dryer into the TEV.
Connection
Liquid refrigerant is flowing from the dryer into the evaporator.
Connection
Gaseous refrigerant is flowing from the evaporator into the TEV.
Connection
The compressor is taking in gaseous refrigerant.
Temperature sensor
Measures the temperature at the evaporator outlet. It is filled with an agent which
is expanding when heated up.
Diaphragm
Below, the pressure of the temperature probe agent is acting (evaporator side);
above, the suction pressure is acting (compressor side).
Valve tappet
Actuates the valve 8. It is firmly connected with the diaphragm. The movement of
the valve tappet is determined by the movement of the diaphragm.
Valve
Is opened by the valve tappet. At the same time liquid refrigerant is injected into
the evaporator.
Insulating cap
An insulating cap must be mounted at the temperature probe of the expansion valve.
Function
Above the diaphragm (6) the pressure of the temperature sensor is acting, below the diaphragm (6) the suction pressure of
the evaporator outlet is acting.
When the air condition is switched off, equal pressure prevails at the diaphragm and the compression spring is closing the
valve (8).
When the air condition is switched on, the compressor takes in gaseous refrigerant from the evaporator.
At the same time the pressure in the evaporator is decreasing and because of that also the pressure below the diaphragm (6).
A differential pressure is acting at the diaphragm, as the pressure of the temperature sensor above the diaphragm is higher.
The diaphragm (6) is moved downwards. The valve tappet (7) is following this movement and opens the valve (8).
At this moment liquid refrigerant is ejected into the evaporator.
The temperature arising in the evaporator (evaporation heat) is determined by the temperature sensor. The agent inside of
the temperature sensor is changing its volume depending on the temperature and hereby determines the pressure above the
diaphragm (6). When the temperature is decreasing, the pressure is decreasing and the valve (8) is closed.
This continuous control process ensures:
- that only an amount of liquid refrigerant which can be vaporized under optimum conditions is allowed to enter the evaporator
- that the compressor only takes in gaseous refrigerant.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
I 19
I
Service
Training
Notes
I 20
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS
Threshing mechanism
Table of contents
5650H
5680H
5660HTS 5690HTS
Threshing section clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .02 03
Installation of the threshing drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04 05
Electrical concave adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .06 07
Concave suspension, disawner plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .08 09
Installation of the rear beater drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 11
Drum variator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 13
Assembling the variator gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 15
Setting the variator adjusting mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 17
Changing the variator belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 19
Dust shields and sealing at threshing mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 21
Drum reduction gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 27
Electrical turbo separator clearance adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 31
Installation of maize threshing concave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 33
Threshing drum - maize threshing, weld drum bars with rosettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 35
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K1
K
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Threshing section clutch
Spring tension (A) with clutch engaged.
Gauging length (B) for the servomotor stroke (maximum stroke: 100 mm)
Length A
Length B
5650, 5660
142 mm
80 mm
5680, 5690
140 mm
82 mm
The spring tension (A) is set at the potentiometer of the relevant load relay (see Chapter C).
The stroke (gauging length (B)) of the servomotor is set by the setscrew (4). After setting, lock the nuts firmly.
Always set length A first, then length B.
If the adjustment range of the setscrew (4) is insufficient, the mounting (2) of the guide pulley (3) can be adjusted in
height. By turning the support (2) through 180, the guide pulley (3) can be positioned even higher. After each adjustment
of the guide pulley (3), the upper belt guide must also be readjusted.
1
Clutch pulley
Support
Guide pulley
Setscrew
Belt guide for clutch belt

5
Hold-down device
Upper belt guide
Front belt guide
Lower belt guide
Adjust belt guides with engaged belt such that the belt is not rubbing. The front belt guide (7) shall have a clearance of 8
mm to the backside of the belt on the entire circumference.
The hold-down device (5) must be adjusted such that the disengaged belt will not rub at the drive pulley and cannot
escape laterally leaving the running grooves.
K2
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K
Service
Training
K006-1
8 mm
8m
7
K 0037
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K3
K
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Installation of the threshing drum
1
Flanged shafts
1.1 Flanged shaft with reducing gear

2
M12x40 screws adhesive-bonded. Screw quality 10.9 (Loctite 243)
Tightening torque of the slotted nut to the left and right: 140 Nm
Screw quality 10.9
For repairs, please note:

Always change the drum bars in pairs.
Always mount the balancing weights in the same position as they were mounted by the manufacturer.
K4
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K
Service
Training
K0010
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K5
K
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Electrical concave adjustment
A concave clearance adjustment front, left view

(1) Servo motor for concave clearance front
(3) Bearing shaft concave suspension front
(4) Tension brackets front concave suspension
B Servo motor:
(8) Potentiometer in servo motor
(9) Slide shaft of the servo motor
C Concave clearance adjustment rear, right view:
(2) Bearing shaft concave suspension rear
(5) Tension brackets rear concave suspension
(6) Servo motor for rear concave clearance (motor is mounted horizontally!)
The stroke of both servo motors is 127 mm max. An integrated potentiometer (8) measures the displacement of the slide
shaft (9). The signal voltage of the potentiometer is processed in the Commander Control 2000 in order to display and
control the concave clearance.
Observe upon mounting the servo motors:
The resistance of the potentiometer is approx. 800, measured at the yellow and grey cable when the slide shaft (9) is
completely retracted.
Basic adjustment of concave adjustment and concave clearance:

1. Assembly dimension of the retracted servo motors:
- left servo motor (1):
402 mm
- right servo motor (6): 413 mm
Firmly secure nuts M16 (7) after adjustment.
The tension brackets (4,5) must not touch the bearing shaft (2,3) with retracted servo motor (1,6).
2. Basic adjustment of the clearance between concave and threshing drum by means of readjusting the tension brackets
(4,5). Servo motors are completely retracted:
The display - indication for the Concave Clearance front (11) and rear (12) is set to position 1.
Concave clearance
concave
Cereals
maize
Front
4th rail: 6 mm
3rd rail: 30 mm
Rear
last rail: 3 mm
last rail: 10 mm
After installing (or replacing) the servo motors calibration of the concave adjustment must be carried out with the
Commander Control 2000. At the same time both servo motors are completely extended and retracted and the corresponding potentiometer values are stored.
K6
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K
Service
Training
2
3
402
2x
3
Set clearances
35
16052636-1
11
12
1
35403
B
8
5
413
16052636-2
56-078
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K7
K
Service
Training
3
2
4
5
5
7
7
6
K0601-2
2
1
K0038
K0039
K8
K0040
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Concave suspension, disawner plates
1
Servo motor for concave clearance front
Bearing tube for concave suspension rear
Bearing tube for concave suspension front
Tension plates front
Tension plates rear
Servo motor for concave clearance rear
Sealing plate
Disawner plates
1
Disawner plates 1 to 5
Control lever
Locking rod for fifth disawning plate
Tightening screw for locking rod
The fifth disawning plate can be removed if required. For this purpose loosen screw (4) and remove locking rod (3).
Adjustment of actuation via oblong hole at control lever:
Upon closing of the disawning plates the control lever must revolve under tension beyond the dead centre.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K9
K
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Installation of the rear beater drum
1
Premounting dimension for inserting the shaft in the rear beater drum
Radial eccentricity of the installed shaft max. 0.2 mm
Assembly dimension for the complete beater drum
Check that the beater drum is positioned centrally in the threshing channel
Direction of rotation
Lubrication hole
Check prior to assembly of a new bearing whether the lubrication hole (6) in the bearing case and the lubrication
groove in the outer bearing race are lying upon each other.
5650H 5690HTS
Rear beater with synchronous drive (as of year of manufacture 2007)
1
Threshing drum shaft
Beater shaft, tubular shaft and stub shaft screwed together
Beater mounted on shaft (2)
Right bearing cover
Inner bearing flange
Outer bearing flange
Tension device for v-belt
Dimension A: Assembly dimension for beater on the shaft

Dimension B: Reference dimension for beater with shaft and frame
Install pre-assembled shaft in beater.
Insert pre-assembled beater in the frame and tighten outer bearing flange (6) while supporting beater on the right side.
Align v-belt pulley on the threshing drum shaft with the v-belt pulley for the beater.
K 10
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K
Service
Training
K0014-3
0,2
150
298.5
4
5
7
298.5
A
2
89.5
283.5
B
4
5
6
20
K0036
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K 11
K
Service
Training
K0017
K 12
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Drum variator
1
Nut tightening torque 460 Nm, secured with DW 59 adhesive.

Fit the fixed pulley by hammering the sliding pulley. Retighten the nut with 460 Nm.
Special tool for loosening the fixed pulley: 0043 6020
Clean the cavity, especially before and after rape threshing
The journal must be parallel to the beater drum: align with shims if necessary.
Shim
Paste cover with silicone
Inspection dimension for belt alignment
Loosen support strut only when belt is slack
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K 13
K
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Threshing section
Assembling the variator gear
1
Shims for aligning the reduction gear
K 14
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K
Service
Training
K0018
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K 15
K
Service
Training
K0019
K 16
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Setting the variator adjusting mechanism
Remove the belt and adjusting mechanism of the variable-speed drive.
Push the sliding pulley on to the fixed pulley. Insert the 1 mm feeler gauge between the contact surfaces.
Measure dimension D with inserted pressure ring (1).
At the variator adjusting mechanism, screw the adjusting ring (3) on to the adjusting sleeve
until dimension D is attained.
Adjust the guide ring (2) so that the cams of the setter ring (2) and adjusting disc (3) prevent any further rotation
of the adjusting disc (3), and an axial distance of at least 0.5 mm is provided in the cam area.
Secure the setter ring (2) with 2 cheese-head screws.
Turn the adjusting disc (3) back one turn; the cams must not touch each other.
Install the variator adjusting mechanism and set the drive to reduced speed.
Set the variator adjusting mechanism to higher speed until the chain sprocket blocks.
Check gap S of 1 mm between the control pulleys.
If the variator was dismantled: screw the stop-nuts (4) on to the guide bolts so that when the adjusting mechanism is set
to reduced speed the variator belt does not slip out of the lower control pulleys nor stick in the upper control pulleys.
Note:
The variator adjustment must be reset for all machines in which the control pulleys stick when increasing the speed.
Individual components of the variator adjusting mechanism

1
Pressure disc (check installation position)
Setter ring
Adjusting disc
Stop nuts
Ball-bearing C4 (more bearing tolerance as normal)
Determine dimension D between inserted pressure disc and gap S = 1 mm
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K 17
K
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Changing the variator belt
1. Set the variator to maximum speed in order to open the driven pulley.
2. Screw in the two hexagon-head screws (M16x140) in order to hold the driven pulley open to its maximum distance
(the screws are included in the on-board tool kit).
3. Open chain of servo motor.
4. Turn sprocket (1) clockwise in order to open the traction sheave.
5. Take out nuts (C) and swivel struts sidewards. Replace belt. Thoroughly clean the space between the pulley halves.
6. Reassemble in reverse sequence.
7. After mounting a new variator belt, set the variator to maximum and minimum speed.
Check that the belt does not stick in one pulley set or jump over the rim of the other pulley set.
If necessary, readjust the stop nuts of the upper variator pulley or reset the adjusting mechanism.
The servomotor (B) for adjusting the speed of the threshing drum is fixed to the mounting plate (A).
The pressure spring (2) of the idling pulley must be set to a length Q = 150 mm.
Sprocket
Pressure spring
A Mounting plate
B Servomotor
C Nuts
K 18
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K
Service
Training
M16
M16
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K 19
K
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Dust shields and sealing at threshing mechanism
3 Sealing
4 Dust shield in front of threshing drum (should be removed when threshing maize)
5 Dust shield with sealing strip (5.1) above the threshing drum
6 Dust plate (spring-loaded) behind the rear beater; only in case of combines without turbo separator.
7 Deflector curtain
8 Sealing
9 Sealing (felt strip)
The clearance X of the dust shield (4) and the sealing strip (5.1) must not exceed 10 mm. If the clearance is too big or in
case of a damaged dust shield excessive dust formation may occur at the feed passage inlet.
K 20
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K
Service
Training
5
5.1
X
6
X
4
7
8
9
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K0027-1
K 21
K
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Drum reduction gear
I
Direct drive 1:1

Belt pulley (6) connected to driver (7) by stud (5).
II
Reduced speed 1:1.93

Driver (7) connected with frame side wall via stud M16 x 1.5 (5) (position approx. 11 o'clock)
Screw tightening torque 210 Nm
Molykote long-term 2PLU
Stud
Belt pulley
Driver
Fitting washer if necessary
Important:
If required, install washers (8) between inner raceway of the bearing and shaft shoulder for proper centring of the threshing drum in the threshing canal.
On mounting the reduction gear shaft, first tighten the M16 screw (3) and then the clamping sleeve bearing on the left.
Tighten the stud (5) at the latest after 10 operating hours at reduced speed.
K 22
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K
Service
Training
120 Nm
K0025-1
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K 23
K
Service
Training
II
K0026-2
56-079
K0027
K 24
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Drum reduction gear
Converting to reduced speed
Fix driver of the gear at the sidewall by means of threaded bolt (position approx. 11 o'clock).
1
Threaded hole for puller screw M16 x 1,5
5650H 5690HTS
Oil changing, Checking oil level
To drain the transmission oil, rotate the reduction gear so that the screw (1) is at the bottom.
Oil filling: 1 litre transmission oil SAE 90, API GL 5
To check the oil level, rotate the gear so that both shafts (planetary gear set and compensating weight) are horizontal and
the inspection screw (1) is at the bottom left.
1
Control and drain plug
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K 25
K
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Drum reduction gear
Replacing individual parts
The components of the reduction gear are individually interchangeable, except for the special features described below.
When replacing the V-belt pulley (1) or the complete housing, it is necessary to balance the gear unit statically with
approx. 1 litre of oil at a speed of at least 300 rpm after completing assembly (balancing holes on the web of the V-belt
pulley with R 202, 20).
Balancing on the balancing block or balancing without oil are not permitted.
The driver (2) must be separately balanced with the stud (3) and O-ring (4).
V-belt pulley
Driver
Stud
O-ring
K 26
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K
Service
Training
K0028
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K 27
K
Service
Training
6
K0029-1
405
5
A
K 28
25
30
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Turbo separator
Distance of the turbo separator drum to the separator concave in the lowest position.
Distance B last bar 25 mm
Distance A first bar approx. 30 mm
1
Installation length for turbo separator shaft
Tightening torque for the clamping sleeve bearing to left and right: 140 Nm
Fixing of the paddle bars with Allen screw M12x30 and support washer 1601 5594
Tightening torque 120 Nm for screw and nut quality 10.9
Always replace paddle bars in pairs
Adjusting movement
The transfer rack must rest on the separator concave
Separating grate
5650H 5690HTS
Electrical turbo separator clearance adjustment
1
Servo motor
Control shaft
Tie rod
Bearing plate
Guide plates
Basic adjustment:
Assembly dimension of the retracted servo motor:
Clearance between turbo separator drum and separating grate:
405 mm
30 mm (at grate inlet)
Adjustment at the tie rods (3) left and right must be done with completely retracted servo motor.
The basic adjustment of the turbo separator drum can be checked approximately from outside:
Vertical distance between bearing plate (4) and guide plates (5) = approx. 5 mm.
Control and calibration of the servo motor is identical with the concave adjustment.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K 29
K
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Turbo separator - drive
The turbo separator is driven by a double V-belt from pulley A to pulley B.
Pulleys A and B are of 2-stage diameter for two speed ranges.
The speed ranges and drum spacing are selected on the basis of the threshing table.
Speed
range
Speed
rpm
Pulley
V-belt on:
Pulley
790 20
A1
B1
II
380 20
A2
B2
For maize and sunflower threshing, the slow speed must be set.
Moving of v-belt:
Slacken tensioning pulley C, (attach tube at pin (1)) lock clamping arm with bolt (2).
K 30
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K
Service
Training
1
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K 31
K
Service
Training
K0034
1
33648
K 32
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Installation of maize threshing concave
When converting to maize threshing, the standard-fitted stone trap (3) and front plate (4) must be removed.
Mark out the operating rods (6) for the stone trap on the intake plate (2).
Remove the dust cover (7) for maize threshing.
Hook maize concave into lower borehole (1) of the front tension plates.
Basic setting of the concave
Concave intake
Concave discharge
Last bar
Maize concave version

Maize concave
(10 Concave bars))
3rd bar
30 mm
10 mm
CCM-concave
2nd bar
30 mm
10 mm
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K 33
K
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Threshing drum - maize threshing
Weld drum bars with rosettes
1
Start of seam
Weld rum bars with rosettes
K 34
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K
Service
Training
K0035
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
K 35
K
Service
Training
Notes
K 36
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
L
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS
Cleaning system
Table of contents
5650H
5680H
5660HTS 5690HTS
Straw walker drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .02 03
Setting the drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04 05
Mounting the straw walker bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .06 07
Mounting the straw walker shafts and straw walkers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .08 09
Mounting of straw walker guide rakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 11
Sieve pan drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 13
Grain pan with removable segments
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 15
Grain pan, sieve box with drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 17
Fan variator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 19
Fan Airflow guide system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 21
Returns elevator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 23
Electrical sieve adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 25
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
L1
L
Service
Training
L0005
L2
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
L
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Straw walker drive
The rear straw walker shaft is driven by V-belt. The compression spring (1) for the idling pulley is set to a tension length
of 70 mm. The guide pulley (2) is height-adjustable. The straw walker speed can be adjusted if required by mounting or
removing additional spacing discs (3) on the rear V-belt pulley.
Compression spring
Guide pulley
Spacing discs
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
L3
L
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Setting the drives
spring-loaded idling pulley
1
Spring tension 72 mm.
Idling pulley for sieve crankshaft drive belt

2
Tensioning sprocket for the grain auger drive chain

3
Slipping clutch as overload protection for the grain auger. Response torque approx. 400 Nm with cup spring bias set
to a dimension of 22 mm.
L4
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
L
Service
Training
L0006
2
L0007
L0008
L0009-1
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
L5
L
Service
Training
L0010
L6
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
L
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Mounting the straw walker bearings
Mounting instructions:
Degrease shaft and sleeve
Wet the inner bearing ring with oil (hydraulic fluid)
Set the sleeves by hammering in the axial direction
Observe equal distance of clamping sleeve halves to each other
Slotted nut
Mount outer bearing with the slotted nut facing the centre of machine.
Degrease the bearing seat and outer bearing ring.

Secure the outer ring at 3 points of its circumference with liquid locking agent.
Tightening the slotted nut:

Pretighten to 50 Nm
Then tighten fully by turning 180
Slotted nut wrench 0041 6050
Cover plate
In case of combines without turbo separator, a cover plate is mounted at the front straw walker shaft on all bearings.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
L7
L
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Mounting the straw walker shafts and straw walkers
1.
Centre the straw walker shafts axially in the frame, so that the distance of the outer straw walker bearings to the side
wall is equal. The distance between the rear straw walker shaft and front straw walker shaft must be equal on the left
and right-hand sides (orientation on the paint mark of the rear bearing housing).
2.
Install all straw walkers and tighten the front straw walker bearing securely; the rear straw walker bearing should be
hand-tightened only. Turn the straw walker shafts by hand to synchronise the cranks.
3.
Tighten the bearings of the outer straw walkers and turn the shafts by hand. The effort required must be equal. If this
is not the case, loosen the bearings again and turn the rear shaft slightly to set precise synchronism with the front
shaft. Repeat the process.
If the oblong holes in the rear straw walker bearing blocks are not sufficient, the rear shaft must be shifted horizontally
(oblong holes in the straw hood).
4.
Tighten the other straw walker bearings one by one, in each case turning the straw walker shafts by hand. At the
bearings that have still not been tightened, there must be no displacement between the bearing housing and straw
walker bearing block during one revolution.
If different resistance is encountered when turning the straw walkers, one of the straw walker shafts may be bent or
twisted (if there is no bearing damage).
Bent or twisted straw walker shafts must be replaced.
5650H 5690HTS
Installation dimensions for straw walker shafts and bearings
1
Straw walker shaft, rear
Straw walker shaft, front
The long shaft end must be on the right-hand side
Combine Harvester Number of

Types
Straw Walkers
Dimensions
c
Tightening torque
5650 5660
206
206
252
237
1008
Prethigtening torque 50 Nm
5670 5690
206
206
252
237
1260
+ Retightening angle180
L8
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
L
Service
Training
left machine side
L0013
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
L9
L
Service
Training
3
2
1
5650 5660
5670 5690
L0020
L 10
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
L
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Mounting of straw walker guide rakes (Optional extra)
Arrangement of straw walker rakes
8 units for 5650 5660
9 units for 5670 5690
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
L 11
L
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Sieve pan drive
Mounting the sieve crankshaft

1
Special tool for tightening the slotted nut: 0043 6070
Crank drive
1
Bearing support
Support plate
2.1 Bolt M14, 10.9

2.2 Bolt M10
3
Swinging arm
Connecting rod
Head bearing
The support plate (2) must rest in parallel at the face side of the bearing support shaft (1). Tighten bolt M14 (2.1) first and
then check the position of the support plate versus the bolting face at the frame. Adjust support plate or add spacer discs
as necessary.
L 12
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
L
Service
Training
L0015
2.2
2.1
L0015
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
L 13
L
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Grain pan with removable segments
When installing the segments (2), make sure that they engage in the catch (1.1). The segments are fixed to the grain pan
frame (1) through the front cover (3).
Front cover (3) is attached at the grain pan frame by means of 3 nuts (4).
Installation of the grain pan rocker

A: Standard combine harvester
B: Balance combine harvester
5
Rocker
Distance plate
Spacing sleeve
Assembly and length (L) of the grain pan rockers (5) is different for standard and balance combine harvesters.
A: Standard combine harvester: L = 232 mm.
A distance plate (6) shall be installed on the frame between the lower bearing case and the bearing support
B: Balance combine harvester: L = 210 mm.
The spacing sleeve (7) shall be installed between upper bearing case and grain pan.
L 14
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
L
Service
Training
L0024-3
L
6
L0049
L
L0050
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
L 15
L
Service
Training
L0027-2
L0028
L 16
L0029
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
L
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Grain pan, sieve box with drive
1
Pitman rod basic setting 584 mm
Rocking lever
2.1 Sleeve bearing

3
Bearing block horizontally adjustable on the left-hand side
Grain pan
4.1 Grain pan rocker

5
Sieve box, top
5.1 Graepel sieve cartridge

6
Sieve box, bottom
Straw walker return pan
Suspension for bottom section of sieve box, straw walker return pan
Rocker for top section of sieve box and straw walker return pan
9.1 M12 screws

9.2 Bearing blocks
The grain pan and sieve box sections must rock longitudinally in parallel in the frame. The guide shoes (a) must not touch
the frame side walls. If necessary, the length of the pitman rod (1) must be adjusted to the left or right. Also, the left-hand
bearing block (3) can be slightly adjusted horizontally.
During assembly, the grain pan and sieve box top and bottom sections (4, 5 and 6) on the rocking lever journals must be
precisely adjusted to one another in the axial direction to ensure sufficient clearance between the moving parts.
The axial play of the sleeve bearing (2.1) must be compensated with spacing discs.
The housings of the rubber bearings for the suspension (8) of the grain pan, sieve box bottom section, straw walker
return pan and the M12 screws (9.1) of the rocker (9) must be tightened with the rocking lever (2) in the mid position.
The rockers (9) must be mounted free of strain. The guide shoes (b) of the straw walker return pan must not make contact
with the frame side walls. If necessary, adjust the position of the bearing blocks (9.2).
Observe different length L of grain pan rocker with standard and balance combine harvesters:
Standard: L = 232 mm
Balance:
L = 210 mm
The Graepel sieve cartridge (5.1) is screwed in the upper part of the sieve pan (5) and its inclination is adjustable. The
inclination shall be in parallel with the grain pan (4).
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
L 17
L
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Fan variator
1
Servomotor
Swivelling variator
Tensioner for lower variator belt

Spring tension 90 mm at maximum revs
Compression spring
Adjusting nuts
Nuts
Bearing pin
Sliding pulley
Fixed pulley halfs
10 Grease nipple
Settings on the variator
Retightening the variator belt:

Set the swivelling variator (2) to the mid-position.
Loosen the bearing pin (7).
Retighten the belt with the adjusting nuts (5), fully turning the threshing mechanism.
Retighten the bearing pin (7).
II
Setting the variator adjustment range:

Set the swivelling variator to the end positions
(maximum and minimum speeds).
A gap S of at least 1 mm must remain between the sliding (8) and fixed (9) pulley halves.
Set the adjustment range using the nuts (6) on the mounting of the servomotor (1).
After adjusting, lock the nuts (6) tightly against one another again.
Check the adjustment range with every belt change.
Notes for operation and maintenance:

The variator should not be run continuously at constant speed for a long period.
At least once a day, the fan speed should be slightly modified.
The contact surface of the sliding pulley half must be lubricated at least once a day.
Grease nipple (10).
L 18
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
L
Service
Training
L0042
L0040
L0041
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
L 19
L
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Fan Airflow guide system
1
Fan drum
Sealing plate
Diffuser wedge, lower
Diffuser wedge, upper
Adjusting lever left and right
Tuning scale left and right
Cover
It is possible to adjust the slope of the upper diffuser wedge (4) around the centre of rotation (z) by means of the adjusting
levers (5). The numerical value on the tuning scale (6) corresponds to the clearance between the leading edge of the
diffuser wedge (4) and the top of the wind duct.
The adjustement affects the amount of wind at the step between the grain pan and the sieve pan.
Small tuning scale value: less amount of wind at the step
High tuning scale value: more amount of wind at the step
A scale value of 20 is factory pre-adjusted.
In case of slightly granular threshing material (e. g. rape, oat) adjusting a smaller scale value (e. g. 15) might possibly be
more advantageous.
By this, observe a balanced adjustment on the left and on the right side.
Sequence for inspecting or setting the installation position:

a
Ensure that the fan drum (1) is parallel to the trough and is axially centred.
b Ensure that the sealing plate (2) is parallel to the fan drum.
The sealing plate (2) must lie flush with the air housing over the full width of the machine.
c Ensure that the diffuser wedge (3, 4) is parallel in the air passage.
L 20
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
L
Service
Training
12-1
Z
20
100
0,
12+1
92
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
L 21
L
Service
Training
L0045
4.1
35
6.1
4
M005
6
L0046
L 22
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
L
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Returns elevator
1
Elevator auger
Scoop wheel
Stepped pulley slow speed for threshing maize and beans
Cover with replaceable friction insert smooth or fluted
Momentary-contact switch ("make" contact) on left and right for monitoring the cover (when the cover is closed,
the switch is pressed).
Speed monitor distance between sensor (6) and puls transmitter (6.1): 4 mm
Centre the scoop wheel (2) in the housing before wedging it to the auger shaft.
Check installation position: the smooth surface of the scoop must face the direction of rotation.
Replace damaged scoop wheels risk of damage due to unbalance.
Check the installation position of the pressure clip (4.1) for the returns elevator cover (4).
The short side of the pressure clip must press against the cover (4).
Compression spring tension: 35 mm
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
L 23
L
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Electrical sieve adjustment
1
Servo motor (stroke 115mm) with integrated potentiometer (1k)
Control shaft, integrated in the sieve pan
Lever bracket on control shaft in upper sieve pan
Lever bracket on control shaft in lower sieve pan

Observe mounting position of lever brackets.
Brackets for upper and lower sieve are different.
Ball pivot for sieve adjustment (1 ball pivot for every sieve unit)
Ball socket
Adjusting device on every sieve unit
Adjusting rail for sieve plates
Upper resp. lower sieve
Function of adjusting device:

The stroke of the servo motor (1) is transferred to the adjusting rail (8) of the sieves (9) via the control shaft (2) through
the ball sockets (6).
The sieve plates are opening when the servo motor is retracting,
the sieve plates are closing when the servo motor is extending.
Basic adjustment of the adjusting device (7):
When the sieve plates are closed the ball socket (6) must project 42 mm over the front edge of the sieve. With mounted
sieves the servo motor must be completely extended when the sieve plates are closed.
Removal of the sieves:
Loosen sieve fixation (it is mandatory to always loosen both sieves, even if only one sieve shall be removed).
Press push-button switch for opening sieves until the servo motor is completely retracted; at the same time the ball
pivot (5) is swinging out of the ball socket (6).
The sieves can now be drawn out.
Installation of the sieves: (servo motor must be completely retracted)
Clear sieve guides from grains and chaff, especially the front sieve stop.
Insert sieve in sieve pan until ball socket (6) engages in ball pivot (5).
Press push-button switch for closing sieves; check at the same time whether the sieve is pulled to the front resp.
whether the sieve plates are closing.
Mount the sieve fixation.
Completely open upper and lower sieves by means of push-button switch and close halfway; check whether the sieve
opening at the right and the left side is the same.
If the sieve opening is not the same the ball socket (6) at the adjusting device must be readjusted.
Calibration of the sieve adjustment for upper and lower sieve: (see instruction manual TERIS/TCS)
L 24
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
L
Service
Training
+
+ POTI ROT 1
Signal
signal POTI TRANS 2
POTI SCHWARZ3
6 Blindstopfen
5 MOTOR SCHWARZ
4 MOTOR GELB
4
2
115
9
25
27
31
42
25
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
22
L 25
L
Service
Training
Notes
L 26
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
M
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS
Grain elevator, grain tank
Table of contents
5650H
5680H
5660HTS 5690HTS
Grain elevator with elevator head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .02 03
Elevator head, speed monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04 05
Elevator head at grain tank extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .06 07
Elevator head with TCS (grain throughput measurement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .08 09
Grain tank clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 11
Grain tank unloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 13
Unloading system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 15
Angular gear inside of tube bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 17
Support for grain tank tube, Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 19
Level transmitter, sensor for grain tank cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 21
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
M1
M
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS
Grain elevator with elevator head
Grain tank filling auger
Fixing plates for elevator chain
Chain wheel for elevator chain
Distance collar
Chain wheel Z13, or Z18 for increased speed in case of maize threshing
Cardan joint
6.1
Connection cardan joint - filling auger
Elevator housting
Elevator chain
Grain auger
10
Ratchet clutch
Assembly instructions:
-
Shift grain auger (9) entirely to the right while assembling, so that the distance collar (4) is resting against the inner
raceway of the bearing. Tighten the adjusting ring at the right side first.
The elevator chain (8) must be guided by the chain wheels (3) centrically inside of the elevator shaft. Center the chain
wheels (3) in the elevator shaft by means of adjusting washers if necessary, resp. shorten the distance collars (4).
Tensioning of the elevator chain:

Readjust fixing plates (2) evenly by means of the tightening screws left and right.
The elevator chain is to be tensioned only as far as the chain links can still be moved laterally at the lower chain wheel (3).
The belleville springs of the ratchet clutch are arranged individually in an opposite direction on the hub.
M2
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
M
Service
Training
1
4
M030
6.1
M040-1
M 001-1
10
3
4
M031
22
10
L0001-1
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
M3
M
Service
Training
2
3
6
6
7
4
M032-1
M4
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
M
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS
Elevator head, speed monitoring
Sealing at feed pipe
Fixing plate for elevator chain
Elevator head
Sealing between elevator housing and bottom of grain tank
Running direction of elevator chain
Speed monitoring:
6
Pulse transmitter
Inductive sensor (distance to pulse transmitter 4 mm)
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
M5
M
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS
Elevator head at grain tank extension
Feed pipe with auger, swiveling to the top together with extending the grain tank extension.
Pedestal bearing
2.1
Sealing washer
Auger flight
Short Feed auger
Full floating axle
Observe the right position of the feed augers and of the auger flights (3) to each other while assembling.
M6
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
M
Service
Training
1
2
20
o
3
4
M011
X
2
2.1
M010
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
M7
M
Service
Training
1
2
5
M013
M014
1
3
M012
M8
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
M
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS
Elevator head with TCS (grain throughput measurement)
Tensioning the elevator chain

Check the following dimension subsequent to tensioning of the elevator chain:
The dimension (A) between guide plate (1) and rubber sheet (2) amounts to 12 mm
Replacement of elevator chain or guide plate

Subsequent to replacing the elevator chain or the guide plates:
Adjust the dimension (A) between rubber sheet (2) and guide plate (1) to 12 mm.
Checking cover with sealing

Observe passage (B) while mounting the cover (3) or the deflecting plate (4)!
Mount resp. adjust the cover slightly lower as against the deflecting plate, as shown in fig. M012.
Replacement of the grain humidity sensor

Observe the mounting position while replacing the sensor (5)! The arrow on the sensor must point from the ascending
pipe to the outside.
Service notes
Clean the deflecting plate (4) at the throughput sensor periodically.
At ascending pipe in front:
Clean grain humidity sensor (5) periodically.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
M9
M
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS
Grain tank clutch
Tensioning rocker
Belt guides
Compression spring
Servo-motor
Adjusting nut
Adjustments when engaged:

-
Initial tension of spring A = 135 mm (for adjustment at clutch control power unit, see chapter C)
Stroke of the servo-motor B = 60 mm (adjustment at the adjusting nuts (5). Fix nuts strongly by a locknut.
Clearing between the belt guides (2) and the V-belt 8 mm.
M 10
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
M
Service
Training
M037
1
4
M021
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
M 11
M
Service
Training
4
2
31653
M 12
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
M
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS
Grain tank unloading
Feed auger inside of grain tank
Roofing sheet
Mounting for roofing sheet on right side
Adjusting plates
The purpose of the adjusting plates (4) is to limit the flow of material to the feed auger, depending on the pourability of the
harvest material. In case of overload of the unloading system (slipping through of V-belt) the adjusting plates must be
adjusted lower.
In case of hardly pourable harvest material (e.g. grass seed) it is possible to hang up the roofing sheet (2) on the right
side in the upper borehole of the mounting (3).
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
M 13
M
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS
Unloading system
Lower angular gear
Slewing rim
Ascending auger
Close-tolerance bolt M12, 10.9
Belleville spring
Locknut M12
Upper angular gear
7.1
Fastening screws
Tappet with bushings
Feed auger inside of unloading tube (divided at 5 m tube)
10
Pedestal bearing at 5 m tube
11
Bearing
12
Supporting rings
13
Spring pin
Assembly instructions:
1. Observe the mounting position of the pedestal bearing (10) and the position of the auger flights while mounting the
augers inside of the unloading tube. A projection length of 88 mm between auger shaft and unloading tube is to be
adjusted by means of a corresponding number of supporting rings (12) between bearing (11) and spring pin (13).
2. Observe the position of the auger flight of the ascending auger (3) and of the tube auger (9) while assembling the
unloading tube to the tube bend.
3. Subsequent to mounting of unloading tube the fastening screws (7.1) for the angular gear (7) are to be loosened.
Rotate the unloading system slowly. In the course of this the angular gear will be aligned towards the augers.
Retighten the fastening screws (7.1).
Tighten the locknut M12 (6) on the close-tolerance bolt (4) carefully such that the belleville
spring (5) is being tensioned.
Secure nut with loctite.
Observe mounting position: Plate spring (5) and locknut (6) must be mounted on the spot
faced circular area of the auger shaft.
M 14
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
M
Service
Training
3
M028
2
1
90Nm
10
M038
8
11
7.1
12
13
5
6
90Nm
M019
M036-1
88
M039
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
M 15
M
Service
Training
2
3
1
3
M022
M023
1
5
4
M025
M 16
M024
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
M
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS
Angular gear inside of Tube bend
Insert the pinion shafts such that the boreholes are out-of-line to each other by one tooth.
Adjust tooth clearance of 0,2 mm between casing cover and bearing by means of fitting washers.
Fill hollow space between casing cover and bearing with grease.
Packing of grease inside of casing approx. 250g EP of gear grease
5650H - 5690HTS
Lower angular gear
Oil filling
Gear oil SAE 90, GL5
0,75 l
Tooth clearance
0,15 - 0,40 mm
Moment of friction primary shaft (1)
0,4 - 0,8 Nm
Moment of friction output shaft (2)
0,1 - 0,4 Nm
Hollow space between bearing and rotary shaft seal at the output shaft (2) is to be filled with grease.
Oil-level plug,
Lubricant nipple,
Check contact pattern of the tooth faces subsequent to replacing pinion shafts resp. bevel
wheels or bearings.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
M 17
M
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS
Support for grain tank tube, Interlock
Support, adjustable in height
Latch
Tension spring
Unlatching cylinder
Inductive sensor
The message "grain tank tube swivelled out in the cabin is activated through the inductive sensor (5). The inductive sensor
(5) continues to be connected with the electronic control system for the grain tank clutch: When the grain tank tube is swung
in, the grain tank clutch will automatically be disengaged if no manual shut-down has been caused by the driver.
The grain tank clutch control is blocked in case of a defective or not connected sensor (5).
Before driving on public roads, check whether the latch (2) of the grain tank tube is engaged!
5650H - 5690HTS
Hydraulic actuation grain tank tube swivel
1
Console
Supporting screw with Insulating plastic tube
Lifting cylinder
Head piece
Shift lever
Ascending pipe
Screw down supporting screw (2) as far as the sidewall of the frame.
Adjust head piece (4) on the piston rod such that the unloading tube is pulled entirely into the support (pos. 1 on top).
M 18
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
M
Service
Training
1
3
4
M026-1
2
1
3
6
4
5
112
M027
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
M 19
M
Service
Training
TOP
1
2
2
4
25
M035
M 20
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
M
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS
Level transmitter, sensor for grain tank cover
Level transmitter Grain tank full
Level transmitter Grain tank 80% full
Sensor for grain tank cover
Position of closed Grain tank cover and lowered Grain tank extension
A clearing of at least 25 mm between the face of the transmitter and the clamping jaws must be observed while mounting
the level transmitters (1) and (2).
Clean level transmitters periodically. The message "Grain tank full will not be deactivated any more by the transmitter in
case of adsorption of humid dust or chaff.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
M 21
M
Service
Training
Notes
M 22
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
P
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS
Cutting mechanism
Table of contents
Typ of cutting mechanism
HMW 1131-1133
Schematic diagram of drives, Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .02 03
Cutting mechanism drive, Reel variator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04 05
Slip clutch for feed auger and reel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .06 07
Feed auger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .08 09
Settings of feed auger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 11
Cutter gear unit
80 mm stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 13
85 mm stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 15
Inspection of cutter actuation, Cutter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 17
Potentiometer installation in case of cutting mechanism control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 19
Connector pin assignment 13-pole plug-socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Wiring layout and circuit diagram for hydraulic system at rape attachment . . . . . . . .22 23
Rape attachment drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 25
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
P1
P
Service
Training
HMW 1131 - 1133

Schematic diagram of drives, Speeds
Speed
1
Drive shaft
480 20 min 1
Reel variator
260 - 860 min-1
Double chain wheel (series Z55/7)
Reel at double chain wheel (3) Z55/7
15 - 49 min-1
at double chain wheel (3) Z75/7

5
Cutter gear unit with 80-90 mm stroke

130 mm stroke
P2
11 - 36 min-1
600 20 min-1
580 20 min-1
Feed auger
192
min-1
reduced speed
172
min-1
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
P
Service
Training
4
3
2
5
6
32861/2-1
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
P3
P
Service
Training
12
11
8
10
7
6
4
4.1
P001
X
5
200
Nm
5.1
3.1
11
10
63,5
2.2
2.1
P002
1
225
P4
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
P
Service
Training
HMW 1131 - 1133

Cutting mechanism drive, Reel variator
Drive shaft
Variator pack - driving
2.1
Chain wheel for feed auger drive
2.2
Thread hole M16 for pressing on the sliding pulley in case of v-belt replacement
Variator pack - driven
3.1
Chain wheel for reel drive
Thrust washer
4.1
Counter nut
Bearing shaft for variator pack
5.1
Locating screw
Tie rod
Stop washer
Adjusting spindle
Distance bush
10
Circlip
11
Driving pin
12
Angular motor
Control dimension 63,5 mm for belt alignment, measured between fixed pulley and fixed pulley.
Setting of variator adjustment: (v-belt is removed)
Pull in the tie rod (6) by means of angular motor until the adjusting spindle (8) is blocked. Screw on thrust washer (4)
to the tie rod (6) as far as there remains a distance of 1 mm at the bottom of the pulley halves (X). Secure thrust
washer (4) by means of counter nut M10 (4.1).
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
P5
P
Service
Training
HMW 1131 - 1133

Slip clutch for feed auger and reel
Slip clutch for feed auger, chain wheel 3/4.
Slip clutch for reel
Hub
Pressure plate
Chain wheel
Friction linings (the chamfer (a) of the linings must point to the pressure plate in case of clutch C)
Plain bearing bush, install by applying grease
Round head cap screws, grade 8.8
Ratchet, blocking the slip clutch while reversing
Slipping moment with factory setting:

Slip clutch
A: 700 Nm
B: 350 Nm
Release slip clutch after a longer standstill period and let it slip through.
P6
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
P
Service
Training
4
1
40
2
P003
75
Nm
P005
B
3
1
21
P047
2
4
P006
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
P7
P
Service
Training
12
12
P007
P050
12
5
14
13
10
9
7
8
M008
11
12
P8
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
P
Service
Training
HMW 1131 - 1133

Feed auger
Drive shaft
Bearing plate
Adjusting segment for feed finger
Bearing shaft and drive shaft right
Bearing shaft for feed finger
Intermediate shaft with bearing
Single finger
Feed finger in centre of auger
Finger stroke
10
Spring clip
11
Spring pin (loss protection)
12
Clamping piece
13
Attachment screw M12x50; 10.9
14
Close-tolerance bolt M12x70; 10.9
Removing feed auger: Disassemble adjusting segment (3) and bearing plate (2) on left and right side.
Roll out auger from the cutting mechanism trough on the right side.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
P9
P
Service
Training
HMW 1131 - 1133

Settings of the feed auger
Bearing plate for feed auger
Adjusting segment for feed finger control
Stripper, two pieces
Feed finger
Drive shaft for feed finger
The standard distance between auger flight and cutting mechanism trough amounts to 6 - 12 mm. In case of coarse
harvest material (e.g. rape, field beans) it may be necessary to adjust the auger higher, to approx. 20 mm distance. The
height adjustment is done on the left and on the right side at the bearing plate (1). Afterwards the strippers (3) are to be
readjusted: Adjust stripper as close as possible to the auger flight in order to avoid coiling up of the auger.
The drive shaft (5) for the feed fingers is turned round by means of the adjusting segment (2).
Extension for auger flight (mounted in case of combine harvesters equipped with 5 straw walkers)
Feed angle between the feed fingers:

- 1x long, 2x short feed angle
toothed feed angle as from year of construction 2001
P 10
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
P
Service
Training
5
2
1
P046
6-12 mm
P011
6
P048
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
P 11
P
Service
Training
7
5
1.1
X
1
2
8
P014
9
X
10
B
4.1
3
4
H
X
4.1
P013-1
C
P015
11
5
6
12
13
P016
P 12
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
P
Service
Training
HMW 1131 - 1133 and rape attachment

Cutter gear unit 80 mm stroke
up to cutting mechanism no. 29107 from 3 m up to 7,20 m

as from cutting mechanism no. 29108 from 3 m up to 4,80 m
Belt pulley halves
1.1
Spacer disks, 4 pieces
Casing
Rotor
Crank (colour mark in tooth gap to crankpin)
4.1
Crankpin
Needle roller bearing
Sealing washer
Borehole for lubricating grease, 6 mm
Circlip
Pinion (dot mark on face)
10
Gear ring
11
Crank end
12
Crankshaft bearing
13
Adjusting washers
Bearings are glued in place at the outer ring, DW 59
Direction of stroke of the crankpin (4.1)
Charge of grease approx. 100 g lithium-base saponified grease K2. Relubrication every 200 operating hours.
Assembly of the gear unit

In case of a properly assembled gear unit the crankpin (4.1) must move parallel to the screw-down bores A-B (longer
side) inside of the casing
1. Assembly of pinion (9) and crank (4) in the rotor (3):

Marked pinion tooth (9) must be diametrically opposite to the marked tooth gap on the crank (4).
2. Assembly of rotor (3) with crank (4) in the casing (2):
Turn crank (4) inside of rotor (3) such that the centre points of rotor, of crank and of crankpin (4.1) are aligned
(direction of stroke H), letting the crankpin (4.1) point towards the outside of the rotor.
Insert the rotor into the casing in this position, whereas the crankpin (4.1) must point exactly towards the casing side B-C.
It must be possible to slide the pinion (9) and gear ring (10) into each other without twisting.
Fill the bearing and the gear ring with grease prior to assembly.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
P 13
P
Service
Training
HMW 1131 - 1133 and rape attachment as from 5,40 m, as from cutting mechanism no. 30988
Cutter gear unit 85 mm stroke
1
V-belt pulley halves (flywheel mass)
Spacer disks (2x2 mm between the pulleys, 1x2 mm, 1x1 mm outside)
Casing
Rotor
Gear ring
5.1*
O-ring, sheet gasket
Pinion shaft, (replace together with item 5 in case of repair)
Crank base
Screws M8x35; 12.9; glued in place
Screws M10x35, 12.9
10
Bearing support
11
Head bearing
Direction of stroke of the head bearing
The 4 dot marks (P) must lie on top of each other while assembling (1x casing, 2x rotor, 1x crank base).
Fill casing and gear ring with grease prior to assembly. Relubricate head bearing and casing with lithium-base saponified
grease K2 every 50 operating hours.
*) In the year of production 2001 the fixation of the gear ring (5) has been changed to screw connection from the inside of
the casing. At this occasion the o-ring and the sheet gasket 5.1 were being dropped.
P 14
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
P
Service
Training
4
3
P
P
10
H
P025
11
P026
80
9 Nm
4
10
5
6
5.1
11
P027
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
P 15
P
Service
Training
80
8 Nm
3
2
Y
5
P028
P029
1.1
P030
P 16
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
P
Service
Training
HMW 1131 1133

Inspection of cutter actuation, cutter replacement
1
Cutter head
Screws M6 x 28 - 10.9, tightening torque 15 Nm
Screws M6 x 18 - 10.9, tightening torque 15 Nm
Insert nut
Plastic sleeve
Head bearing
Bearing support
Screws M10 x 35
1. Synchronous operation of head bearing (6) and cutter:

The head bearing (6) must move in parallel to the direction of stroke of the cutter. The cutter head (1) must not be pushed
against the cutter guide in the cutter bar neither in horizontal (X) nor in vertical direction (Y). In case of a relative
movement of the head bearing (6) in X - direction the cutter gear unit in the gear console must be slightly turned round.
2. Checking the stroke change: H = Cutter stroke.

In case of stroke change of the cutter the overlap (Z) between blade centre and finger centre must be equal. If the
deviation is too big the cutter gear unit in the gear console must be displaced towards the direction of stroke.
Cutter replacement, as from cutting mechanism 5,40 m

-
Unscrew screws (8) at bearing support.
Extract cutter with head bearing from the cutter bar.
Insert head bearing loosely into new cutter.
Tighten screws (8). Tightening torque 80 Nm.
Vertically align cutter head (1) on the head bearing (6).
Tighten screw (1.1), take care at the same time that the cutter head will not move any more on the head bearing.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
P 17
P
Service
Training
HMW 1131 1133

Potentiometer installation in case of cutting mechanism control
1
Sensing skid (1 piece in case of level control, 3 pieces in case of autocontrol)
Skid support
Bearing plate
Centering ring for potentiometer
Driving pin
Potentiometer
Screw M5 with spring lock washer and plain washer
Observe the installation position of the potentiometers. The plug-in connection must be on top and at the same time the
casing is tightened in the center of the oblong holes.
Verify while mounting that the pendulum angle A (approx. 30) of the sensing skid is located within the angle of rotation
B (120) of the rotary potentiometer (otherwise the potentiometer will be destroyed). A return spring inside of the
potentiometer pulls its moving part towards the lower position of the sensing skid.
The driving pin (5) must not jam in radial or axial direction inside of the potentiometer: Check the groove depth in the
sensing skid and the length of the driving pins (5). Tighten screw (7) but moderately (danger of potentiometer seizing).
Adjustment of the potentiometers (see also chapter H):
Signal voltage between 2,4 V and 6,8 V with lifted resp. freely hanging sensing skid.
In case of underflow or overflow of the voltage range turn round the potentiometer casing inside of the oblong holes.
The signal voltage is supposed to change for more than 2 V from the lowest to the highest position of the sensing skid.
Pendulum angle of the sensing skids approx. 30.
P 18
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
P
Service
Training
B
120
30
310 mm
30
6
P-41
4
5
7
6
3
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
P034
31053
P 19
P
Service
Training
Notes
P 20
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
P
Service
Training
HMW 1131 1133

Connector pin assignment 13-pole plugsocket
Plug
Plug-socket
Type
Autocontrol
(3 sensing
skids)
Plug-socket
Type
Level
control
(1 sensing
skid)
Rape cutting mechanism
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
P 21
P
Service
Training
Wiring layout and circuit diagram for hydraulic system at rape attachment
Hydraulic system pump, driven by cutter gear unit (pump capacity 11cm3/rev.)
Oil container with return line filter
Control valve for left side cutter
Hydraulic system motor right (absorption capacity 12,5 cm3/rev.)
Hydraulic system motor left
Pressure lines
Return lines
Leakage oil line for right hydraulic system motor (being dropped, if only the right side cutter is mounted)
10
Shunt diode inside of plug at emergency valve
(absorption capacity 12,5 cm3/rev.)
In case of a de-energized control valve (4) only the right hydraulic system motor (5) is in operation. In case of an
energized control valve both hydraulic system motors are connected in series.
P 22
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Service
Training
10
P037
P038
P039
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
P 23
P
Service
Training
2
2.1
4
P040
P041
2
1
P043
7
P044
P 24
7.1
3
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
P
Service
Training
Rape attachment drive
HMW 1131 1133 up to 7,20 m
HMW 1133 8,10 m and 9 m (cutter gear unit with angle drive)
Cutter gear unit at rape attachment
Hydraulic system pump
2.1
Flexible disk
Deflection pulleys
Tensioning pulley
Reel bracket
Cutter gear unit at cutting mechanism
V-belt pulley with free-wheel
7.1
Bearing
When mounting the rape attachment the reel lifting cylinders in the lower borehole (X) at the reel bracket must be
detached.
For driving of the rape attachment 8,10 m and 9 m the v-belt pulleys of the cutter gear unit are to be replaced. At the
cutter gear unit for the cutting mechanism the v-belt pulley (7) with bearing free-wheel is to be mounted.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
P 25
P
Service
Training
Notes
P 26
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
U
Service
Training
5650H - 5690HTS
Straw Chopper
Table of Contents
Combine harvester type
5650H
5680H
5660HTS 5690HTS
Adjustment of the straw guide plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .02 03
Belt coupling for chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04 05
Speed monitoring, touch contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .06 07
Modification of the chopper for threshing of maize or sunflowers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .08 09
Lining for straw hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 11
Electrical adjustment of straw guide plate (chopper flap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 13
Electrical adjustment of deflectors at chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 17
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
U1
U
Service
Training
4
2
2.1
6
a
U001
5
3
6
7
U003
2
2.1
1
U006
U2
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
U
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Adjustment of the straw guide plates
Lower straw guide plate
Front limit stop for lower straw guide plate
2.1
Turn lock
Rear limit stop for lower straw guide plate
Upper straw guide plate
Tie rod
Gas strut
Swath rake (in case of combine harvesters equipped with 5 walkers only 1 rake is permitted to be installed)
The rear limit stop (3) and the tie rod (5) must be adjusted such that the straw guide plates (1 and 4) are forming a plane
surface in position long straw. The lower straw guide plate must rest against the limit stop (a) of the upper straw
guide plate.
It is possible to fold down the lower straw guide plate (1) to the front. For this purpose loosen the turn locks (2.1) outside
at the straw hood, slew the limit stops (2) upwards and unhook the tie rod (5).
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
U3
U
Service
Training
2
U012
C0110
U4
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
U
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Belt coupling for chopper
Clutch pulley
Servo-motor
Belt guides
Tensioning device
Adjusting nuts
Belt coupling adjustment:

Adjust the spring load A at the potentiometer (10) of the power relay with belt engaged.
When the potentiometer is turned to the right the load current will increase (dimension A will decrease), turning the potentiometer to the left will cause the load current to decrease (dimension A will increase).
Adjust stroke B of the servo-motor (2) by means of nuts (5).
If the dimension D falls below D = 115 mm (belt displacement) adjust the intermediate drive downwards.
Spring load A
= 110 mm
Stroke B
= 60 mm
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
U5
U
Service
Training
A
B
1
2
U016-1
U6
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
U
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Speed monitoring, touch contact
Proximity switch (speed sensor)
Pulse transmitter
Proximity switch for position of straw guide plates
Lower straw guide plate
Straw guide plate in position chopper on
Straw guide plate in position chopper off
Function of switch 3
The switch (3) activates or deactivates the speed monitor and controls the connection of the chopper clutch when the
straw guide plates (4) are set to chopper operation (position A).
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
U7
U
Service
Training
Modification of the chopper for threshing of maize or sunflowers

1
V-belt pulley for reduced speed
V-belt pulley on the chopper shaft
Deflection pulley, in case of KPAB chopper
Double pulley at intermediate drive, in case of KPAB SRX chopper
Upper straw guide plate
Deflector
Tie rod
Cover plate for shear bar casing, in case of KPAB chopper
Rasp bar
1.
Speed reduction:
A v-belt pulley (1) with a bigger diameter is to be mounted on the drive pulley (2) of the chopper. Place the deflection pulley (3) higher in case of KPAB chopper.
1.1
Speed reduction in case of KPAB chopper type SR (5650H-5660HTS, 5680H-5690HTS as of year of manufacture 2007):
Mount v-belt pulley (4) from the intermediate drive to the v-belt pulley (2) on the chopper.
2.
Installation of a deflector (6) in the straw hood in alignment with the upper straw guide plates (5).
Unhook the tie rod (7) for the upper straw guide plate.
3.
Remove the shear bar. In front of the shear bar casing a cover plate (8) is to be mounted in case of the KPAB chopper.
Remove every second swinging flail.
4.
U8
Remove rasp bars (9) in the bottom plate.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
U
Service
Training
2
33645
33646
KPAB-SRX
2
U017-1
4
7
KPAB
33686
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
9
U018
U9
U
Service
Training
495
U020
U 10
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
U
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Lining for straw hood
KPAB chopper
The lining (1) in the straw hood is an optional feature (see price list).
It helps to support the straw flow to the chopper in case of coarse-fibred rape straw.
KPAB
5650 5660
1602 6810
5680 5690
1602 6812
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
U 11
U
Service
Training
5650H 5690HTS
Electrical adjustment of straw guide plate (chopper flap)
(Changeover from chopping to long straw shedding)
Servo motor for straw guide plate
1.1
Fork head
1.2
Circuit diagram
1.3
Connector view
Inductive sensor for straw guide plate position
Speed sensor straw chopper
Socket outlet for servo motor of chopper deflectors
Straw guide plate limit stop
A26
CAN module
F13
Fuse for servo motor
F56
Fuse for CAN module A26
K16
Relay straw guide plate chopper operation
K37
Relay straw guide plate long straw shedding
S66
Straw guide plate switch
X5
Connector at control cabinet
X146 Connector at engine frame

X705 Connector at servo motor
X320 Analog ground, insulated ground strip inside of control cabinet
Mounting instruction for the servo motor:

Adjust the fork head (1.1) such that the straw guide plate completely abuts the stop limits (5) in both positions in the straw
hood.
Before initial commissioning or after replacement of the servo motor the calibration of the chopper flap adjustment shall be
carried out at the Commander Control.
U 12
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
U
Service
Training
K37/3
X5
S66
X146
A26
A26/13
5 6 2 1 3
8 7 3 4 2
5 6 2 1 3
8 7 3 4 2
br
8
A26/16
X320
K16/3
16
ws br vi ws
sw sw sw
X705 5 4 3 2 1
sw
ge
rt
tr
sw
U-004
1.3
X705
+
Signal
U-001
1.2
U-003
5
4
5
4 mm
1.1
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
U-005
U 13
U
Service
Training
H43
H41
K38/3
X26
H42
S49
A25/16
X320
K17/3
A25/13
gn
rt
br
bl
sw
2/54 g
1L
3/31
6/54
7/58 L
gn
rt
br
bl
sw
gn
rt
br
bl
sw
sw
bl
br
H44
35379
A25
X145
9
16
U-006
X706
4
gn
ws
ge
rt
R
1 kOhm
U-007
1.1
X706
U-008
U 14
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
U
Service
Training
5670H 5690HTS, until of year of manufacture 2006

Electrical adjustment of deflectors at chopper
Servo motor for deflectors
1.1
Circuit diagram for servo motor
Socket outlet at the straw hood
A25
CAN module
F14
F55
Fuse for CAN module
K17
Relay for deflector adjustment to left side
K38
Relay for deflector adjustment to right side
S49
Switch for deflector adjustment with position lights
X26

X706 Connector at servo motor
Before initial commissioning or after replacement of the servo motor the calibration of the chopper deflector adjustment
shall be carried out at the Commander Control.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
U 15
U
Service
Training
H43
H41
K38/3
X26
H42
S49
A25/16
X320
K17/3
A25/13
gn
rt
br
bl
sw
2/54 g
1/L
3/31
6/54
7/58 L
sw
rt
rt
ws
bl
H44
35379
A25
X145
9
16
U-006
R
1 kOhm
U-007
1.1
U-008
U 16
307.1133.5.6 deutsch (de) 10.2006
U
Service
Training
5650H 5660HTS
5680H 5690HTS, as of year of manufacture 2007
Electrical adjustment of deflectors at chopper
Servo motor for deflectors
1.1
Circuit diagram for servo motor
Socket outlet at the straw hood
A25
CAN module
F14
F55
Fuse for CAN module
K17
Relay for deflector adjustment to left side
K38
Relay for deflector adjustment to right side
S49
Switch for deflector adjustment with position lights
X26

Before initial commissioning or after replacement of the servo motor the calibration of the chopper deflector adjustment
shall be carried out at the Commander Control.
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
U 17
U
Service
Training
Notes
U 18
307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006
Der Nachdruck des Textes und der Abbildungen ist, auch auszugsweise, verboten.
La reproduction du prsent ouvrage, du texte et des llustratons, mme partelle est interdite.
Text and illustrations herewith enclosed may not be reproduced, not even in part and by any means.
E vietata la riproduzione, anche parziale, del testo e delle illustrazioni.
Se prohibe la reproduccin total o parcial del texto y de las ilustraciones.
A proibida a reproduo, at mesmo parcial, do texto e das ilustraces.
Der zeitliche Unterschied zwischen der Aktualisierung der Druckschriften und der Durchfhrung technischer Vernderungen (die stndig vorgenommen werden, um immer hochwertigere Erzeugnisse auf den Markt zu bringen) erfordern
aus Grnden der Korrektheit des Hinweises, dass die in dieser Ausgabe enthaltenen Daten jederzeit gendert werden
knnen und deshalb unverbindlich sind.
Le temps qui scoule entre la mise jour en impression et les modifications techniques (ces dernires changeant continuellement afin doffrir aux utilisateurs des produits toujours plus qualifis) nous oblige a vous signaler que les
donnes de la prsente publication pourraient tre susceptibles de variations. Elles sont donnes sans engagement de
notre part.
Because of the possible time lag between the introduction of technical modifications (an on-going process the aim of
which is to offer products which are being continually improved) and the latest update of the manual, we must point out,
for the sake of correctness,that the data contained in this edition are liable to change at any time and are therefore not
binding.
La differenza tra i tempi di aggiornamento in stampa e i tempi delle modifiche tecniche (variando queste ultime continuamente, ci al fine di offrire prodotti sempre pi qualificati) impongono di dichiarare, per correttezza, che i dati contenuti nella presente edizione sono suscettibili di variazione in qualsiasi momento e che quindi non sono impegnativi.
La diferencia entre los tiempos necesarios para poner al dia la impresin y los tiempos de las modificaciones tcnicas
(las que se verifican continuamente, con el objeto de ofrecer productos cada vez ms calificados) nos imponen
declarar, por correccin, que los datos contenidos en la presente edicin estn sujetos a variaciones en cualquier momento y que portanto no son obligativos.
A diferena entre os tempos necessrrios para actualizar a impresso e os tempos das modificaces tcnicas (que se
verificam continuamente, a fim de oferecer um produto cada vez mais qualificado), obrigam-nos a declarar, que os dados contidos neste manuel so susceptiveis de variaco em qualquer momento e que portanto no so vinculatrios.
NOTES
02 - 2007
By Personal computing
cod. 307.1132.3.6
Technical Publications Dep.
02-2007
307. 1133. 3. 6

5650-5690 Balance Repair Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

5650-5690 Balance Repair Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SAME DEUTZ-FAHR DEUTSCHLAND GmbH

SAME DEUTZ-FAHR DEUTSCHLAND GmbH

DF-EZ (Technical Documentation)

All rights reserved.

Part No.: 307.1133.3.6

307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

Summary 5650H 5690HTS

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .i4

Engine Assembly, Engine Parts, Engine Control, Engine Power Take-Off

Front axle, gearbox, Steering axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B

307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

General Safety Instructions

307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

Safety instructions for maintenance and repair

307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

Safety instructions for maintenance and repair

307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

Safety instructions for maintenance and repair

307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

Conversion table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .02 03

Tightening torques, bolting classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04

Sealing, Adhesives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .06

Single-component adhesives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .07

Maintenance and Inspection Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .08 09

Operating fluids, filling levels and oil grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

Release list DEUTZ lube oil quality stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Tightening torques for adapter sleeve bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Check tension of chain and belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 19

Maintenance and repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Servicing and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

Conversion from mm to inches

307.1133.5.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

Conversion from degrees Celsius (C) to degrees Kelvin (K)

307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

Shoulder stud with metric fine thread

307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

180 bis +1400

125 bis +1450

Molykote Paste G-n Rapid

Cooling System Protection

307.1133.5.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

KHD Part No.

307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

Guidelines for use

for play of 0.020.03, makes threads harder to loosen,

for play of 0.020.02, makes threads harder to loosen,

Improved press-fit 00.03, easily loosened,

for play of 0.0203, very firm connection,

for play of 0.030.5, extra-firm connection for temperatures

for faster hardening

307.1133.3.6 englisch (en) 10.2006

high-strength connection for joints shafts hubs

Maintenance and Inspection Schedule for Combine Harvesters

Maintenance and Inspection Schedule

Engine Maintenance and inspection according to engine operating instructions

Check oil level (twice per day during running in phase)

every two years

2 hours after engine shutdown)

Change fuel filter cartridge

Oil quality Deutz DQC III-05, ACEA E4-99/E6-04*